[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2021025160A1 - Cushion material, method for manufacturing cushion material, laminate, method for manufacturing laminate, method for using cushion material, connection structure for shelter division, method for forming shelter division, method for dismantling and storing shelter division, and method for forming shock absorbing wall surface panel for shelter - Google Patents

Cushion material, method for manufacturing cushion material, laminate, method for manufacturing laminate, method for using cushion material, connection structure for shelter division, method for forming shelter division, method for dismantling and storing shelter division, and method for forming shock absorbing wall surface panel for shelter Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021025160A1
WO2021025160A1 PCT/JP2020/030486 JP2020030486W WO2021025160A1 WO 2021025160 A1 WO2021025160 A1 WO 2021025160A1 JP 2020030486 W JP2020030486 W JP 2020030486W WO 2021025160 A1 WO2021025160 A1 WO 2021025160A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
laminated body
laminate
forming
resin foam
shelter
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/030486
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
優 松田
有 秀島
裕美 稲田
陽介 小久保
Original Assignee
古河電気工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 古河電気工業株式会社 filed Critical 古河電気工業株式会社
Priority to KR1020217002146A priority Critical patent/KR20220040429A/en
Priority to JP2020544869A priority patent/JP7084490B2/en
Priority to SG11202100882RA priority patent/SG11202100882RA/en
Priority to PH12021550211A priority patent/PH12021550211A1/en
Publication of WO2021025160A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021025160A1/en
Priority to JP2022087941A priority patent/JP7630463B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B5/00Layered products characterised by the non- homogeneity or physical structure, i.e. comprising a fibrous, filamentary, particulate or foam layer; Layered products characterised by having a layer differing constitutionally or physically in different parts
    • B32B5/22Layered products characterised by the non- homogeneity or physical structure, i.e. comprising a fibrous, filamentary, particulate or foam layer; Layered products characterised by having a layer differing constitutionally or physically in different parts characterised by the presence of two or more layers which are next to each other and are fibrous, filamentary, formed of particles or foamed
    • B32B5/32Layered products characterised by the non- homogeneity or physical structure, i.e. comprising a fibrous, filamentary, particulate or foam layer; Layered products characterised by having a layer differing constitutionally or physically in different parts characterised by the presence of two or more layers which are next to each other and are fibrous, filamentary, formed of particles or foamed at least two layers being foamed and next to each other
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A47FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
    • A47CCHAIRS; SOFAS; BEDS
    • A47C27/00Spring, stuffed or fluid mattresses or cushions specially adapted for chairs, beds or sofas
    • A47C27/14Spring, stuffed or fluid mattresses or cushions specially adapted for chairs, beds or sofas with foamed material inlays
    • A47C27/15Spring, stuffed or fluid mattresses or cushions specially adapted for chairs, beds or sofas with foamed material inlays consisting of two or more layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C43/00Compression moulding, i.e. applying external pressure to flow the moulding material; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C43/22Compression moulding, i.e. applying external pressure to flow the moulding material; Apparatus therefor of articles of indefinite length
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B3/00Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
    • B32B3/26Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
    • B32B3/30Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by a layer formed with recesses or projections, e.g. hollows, grooves, protuberances, ribs
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B5/00Layered products characterised by the non- homogeneity or physical structure, i.e. comprising a fibrous, filamentary, particulate or foam layer; Layered products characterised by having a layer differing constitutionally or physically in different parts
    • B32B5/18Layered products characterised by the non- homogeneity or physical structure, i.e. comprising a fibrous, filamentary, particulate or foam layer; Layered products characterised by having a layer differing constitutionally or physically in different parts characterised by features of a layer of foamed material
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/04Interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/12Interconnection of layers using interposed adhesives or interposed materials with bonding properties
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08JWORKING-UP; GENERAL PROCESSES OF COMPOUNDING; AFTER-TREATMENT NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G or C08H
    • C08J9/00Working-up of macromolecular substances to porous or cellular articles or materials; After-treatment thereof
    • C08J9/04Working-up of macromolecular substances to porous or cellular articles or materials; After-treatment thereof using blowing gases generated by a previously added blowing agent
    • C08J9/06Working-up of macromolecular substances to porous or cellular articles or materials; After-treatment thereof using blowing gases generated by a previously added blowing agent by a chemical blowing agent
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04BGENERAL BUILDING CONSTRUCTIONS; WALLS, e.g. PARTITIONS; ROOFS; FLOORS; CEILINGS; INSULATION OR OTHER PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS
    • E04B1/00Constructions in general; Structures which are not restricted either to walls, e.g. partitions, or floors or ceilings or roofs
    • E04B1/62Insulation or other protection; Elements or use of specified material therefor
    • E04B1/92Protection against other undesired influences or dangers
    • E04B1/98Protection against other undesired influences or dangers against vibrations or shocks; against mechanical destruction, e.g. by air-raids
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04BGENERAL BUILDING CONSTRUCTIONS; WALLS, e.g. PARTITIONS; ROOFS; FLOORS; CEILINGS; INSULATION OR OTHER PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS
    • E04B2/00Walls, e.g. partitions, for buildings; Wall construction with regard to insulation; Connections specially adapted to walls
    • E04B2/74Removable non-load-bearing partitions; Partitions with a free upper edge
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04FFINISHING WORK ON BUILDINGS, e.g. STAIRS, FLOORS
    • E04F15/00Flooring
    • E04F15/02Flooring or floor layers composed of a number of similar elements
    • E04F15/10Flooring or floor layers composed of a number of similar elements of other materials, e.g. fibrous or chipped materials, organic plastics, magnesite tiles, hardboard, or with a top layer of other materials
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B37/00Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
    • B32B37/12Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by using adhesives
    • B32B37/1207Heat-activated adhesive
    • B32B2037/1215Hot-melt adhesive
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2555/00Personal care

Definitions

  • the present invention is lightweight and has a linear pattern by exposing a fusion layer or an adhesive layer on a wavy uneven structure surface made of a polyolefin resin foam that can be used as a mat material or partition material.
  • An excellent cushion material, a laminate using this, a method for manufacturing the cushion material and the laminate, a method for using the cushion material, and a laminate that can be easily assembled without using an assembly tool or an assembly part are used.
  • the present invention relates to a connection structure of evacuation shelters, a method of forming an evacuation shelter section using a laminate, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation shelter section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation shelter.
  • cushioning materials using resin foam have been used as packaging materials, mats, and the like.
  • a cushioning material using such a resin foam a cushioning material having a mountain valley uneven shape formed on the surface is used.
  • Such cushioning materials are widely used, for example, as materials for various industrial products such as cushioning materials, building materials, heat insulating materials, and sound deadening materials, or as materials for various household products such as daily necessities, sports and leisure products, and sports products.
  • a thermoplastic resin foam sheet having an uneven surface with a skin Patent Document 1.
  • thermoplastic resin foam sheet of Patent Document 1 In the method for producing a thermoplastic resin foam sheet of Patent Document 1, first, a strip-shaped thermoplastic resin foam sheet having a uniform thickness is cut in a concave-convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction and divided into two upper and lower layers, or uniformly. A strip-shaped thermoplastic resin foam sheet having a large thickness is held in an uneven shape, and the middle part in the vertical direction is cut horizontally to divide the sheet into two upper and lower layers. As a result, two foam sheets having an uneven surface on one side are molded. Next, heat energy is radiated to the uneven surface of the foamed sheet to melt and cool the surface. As described above, a thermoplastic resin foam sheet having an uneven surface with a skin is formed.
  • Patent Document 2 a soundproof floor structure in which a hard plate is laminated on a plastic foam, which can be suitably used as a floor material for various houses and warehouses, such as a floor material for an apartment house such as an apartment, has been proposed.
  • Patent Document 2 a soundproof floor structure in which a hard plate is laminated on a plastic foam, which can be suitably used as a floor material for various houses and warehouses, such as a floor material for an apartment house such as an apartment, has been proposed.
  • a relatively hard material is used as a finishing material for a floor substrate such as a concrete slab, daily noise is transmitted downstairs as solid sound, which causes a problem of environmental deterioration.
  • various base materials such as polyurethane foam, synthetic fiber non-woven fabric, and polyethylene foam have been conventionally developed and used as floor base materials.
  • Patent Document 2 is a soundproof floor structure using a floor base material in which a hard plate is laminated on a floor base material made of a foam having valleys and / or peaks on the surface.
  • a hard plate is laminated on a plastic foam having a compressive hardness of 0.5 to 1.5 kg / cm 2 , an apparent density of 0.05 to 0.12 g / cm 3 , and a hardness of 5 to 35. It uses a floor base material, does not impart designability as in the present application, and does not use only foamed resin as the cushion material or laminate as in the present application.
  • Patent Document 3 a high-resilience foam having a mountain-valley surface and a polyurethane foam having a rebound resilience of 10% or less, which is closely bonded to the mountain-valley surface of the high-resilience foam, are low-resilience foam. Sufficient performance is ensured by integrating the body with the high-resilience foam by insert molding. Patent Document 3 is used in a state where a low-resilience foam and a high-resilience foam have mountain and valley surfaces in combination, and the stress of the low-resilience foam on the upper surface is supported by the high-resilience foam. The purpose is to disperse the stress.
  • the soundproof floor structure of Patent Document 3 is not intended to improve the design property by the linear pattern on the design surface.
  • Patent Document 4 discloses an invention relating to a method for manufacturing a cushion material in which a large number of corrugated uneven structures are periodically formed by profile processing in an island shape, and a foam material having a high hardness is arranged in a convex portion. Proposed. (Patent Document 4)
  • Patent Document 4 prepares a three-layer foamed resin laminate in which a hard soft foam or a semi-hard foam is bonded to the upper and lower sides of the soft foam in order to stabilize the hardness of the convex portion of the profiled wavy concave-convex structure. This is obtained by profile processing so as to straddle the upper and lower hard soft foams or semi-hard foams.
  • the fusion layer or the adhesive layer has a wavy uneven structure. It is not exposed to the surface to form a large number of annular linear patterns.
  • Patent Document 5 a wavy uneven structure continuous in the width direction is formed on the surface by profile processing, and a predetermined foam is arranged at a predetermined position of the wavy uneven structure to improve the design.
  • the foam mat to be used is described.
  • Patent Document 5 discloses a corrugated cardboard bed in which nearly 20 members can be assembled and the length of the bed can be expanded and contracted so that the bed can be assembled without using a fixture such as tape.
  • Patent Document 6 discloses a corrugated cardboard bed including a pedestal formed by assembling a plurality of corrugated cardboards of 10 or more and a top plate.
  • Patent Document 7 discloses a corrugated cardboard bed including a pedestal formed by assembling a plurality of corrugated cardboards of 10 or more and a top plate.
  • Patent Document 8 discloses an invention in which a corrugated cardboard partition plate is used to form an evacuation shelter section.
  • an assembling shelter section can be obtained by using a corrugated cardboard connecting member in the straight portion and the bent portion of the upper part and the lower part in order to connect the adjacent partition plates.
  • Patent Document 8 In Patent Document 9, a corrugated board plate material having creases having a constant width along the length direction of the corrugated cardboard is repeatedly bent in a wavy shape along the creases to bond partition units that ensure uprightness to each other.
  • a partition structure for evacuation shelters, which is characterized by joining with a corrugated cardboard, is disclosed.
  • Patent Document 10 is a partition material that can be bent at a predetermined angle using a foamed resin having a spindle-shaped closed cell and having a predetermined strength that can be used in an evacuation site in the event of a disaster, and a face material is attached to the surface thereof. Things are disclosed. (Patent Document 10)
  • a continuous periodic wavy uneven structure is formed on the surface of the mat material so as to cross the foam material in the width direction, and at that time, a multi-layer resin foam having different colors is formed.
  • a three-dimensional strip-shaped two- or three-row pattern is formed in the periodic structure of the unevenness, or instead of forming the pattern, different types are formed.
  • the invention of assembling the foaming agent of the above is disclosed, but in the invention of Patent Document 5, the fusion layer or the adhesive layer is exposed on a wavy uneven structure surface to form a large number of annular linear patterns. is not it.
  • the usage of a thin-walled foaming material such as an entrance mat, a bath mat, or a flooring mat for dining is described, and it cannot be used for a partition of an evacuation shelter because it does not have self-sustaining assembly.
  • corrugated cardboard beds and partitions are used for the flooring materials and partition members of evacuation centers as described in Patent Documents 6 to 9.
  • corrugated cardboard flooring it is not possible to maintain a comfortable living environment for evacuees who use evacuation shelters because it requires assembly work for a large number of members, has high moisture absorption and does not have cushioning properties.
  • partition partitions and floor mats that use plastic sheets, but in this case, the resin sheet for partition weighs about 10 kg, which requires joint parts and is not easy to assemble.
  • Patent Document 10 can be used as a floor material, but it cannot be used as a bed because it is not a cushion material or a laminated body having a thin thickness and excellent design and profile processing, and is a foam. It does not have a design in itself. An adhesive or fixing means is required at the time of assembly, but in the present invention, the laminates of the present invention can be assembled simply by abutting or fitting them to each other, which is different from the present invention and Patent Document 10.
  • a large number of annular linear patterns formed by a fusion layer or an adhesive layer are formed, which is lightweight and has excellent design and cushioning properties. It is also excellent in heat insulation and moisture resistance, and it can provide a mat material that eliminates the drawbacks of conventional corrugated cardboard flooring materials, and at the same time, it is also excellent in assembly independence at the time of assembly, so it is used for shelter compartments. It is possible to provide cushioning materials and laminates that can also be used for partitions, and it is easy to assemble and store.
  • Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 7-80874 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-054610 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-0593558 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 55-120813 Jikken Sho 44-013645 JP-A-2019-122644 JP-A-2019-122644 Registration Draft No. 3226650 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-129595 JP-A-2006-274740 JP-A-2006-274740 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-061827
  • Patent Documents 1 to 3 relate to resin foams having a periodic wavy uneven structure on the surface, but all of them are used for applications having cushioning properties without quality requirements for appearance. It is only used. For this reason, the resin foam has not been used with a design property. For example, when used as a cushioning material for packaging materials, design is not required, and when used for bedding mats, the cushioning material itself is not exposed, so until now, designs such as patterns have been used. Giving sex has never been considered.
  • Patent Document 4 is an invention in which foam materials having different hardness are arranged at predetermined positions on a wavy uneven structure surface by profile processing, and Patent Document 5 is continuous in the width direction on the surface by profile processing.
  • a corrugated concavo-convex structure is formed, and a predetermined foam is arranged at a predetermined position of the corrugated concavo-convex structure to improve the design.
  • the fusion layer or the adhesive layer is colored. By profiling the laminated foam with the fusion layer or the adhesive layer sandwiched between them, a large number of annular linear patterns are formed on the wavy uneven structure surface to improve the design. Furthermore, it does not impart functionality to the fusion layer or the adhesive layer.
  • Patent Documents 6 to 9 do not use a resin foam, are not excellent in design, require assembly work of a large number of members, have high hygroscopicity, and do not have cushioning properties. It is not possible to maintain a comfortable living environment for evacuees who use the.
  • the foam itself is not excellent in design, is not profiled, and cannot be used as a bed.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in order to improve the appearance of the cushion material, an annular layer or an adhesive layer is exposed on the surface of the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material.
  • a large number of linear patterns are formed to improve the design, and at the same time, it is lightweight and has excellent design, and at the same time, it has excellent moisture resistance by using a polyolefin resin foam for the cushion material, and vibration control is applied to the adhesive layer or the fusion layer.
  • the polyolefin resin foam forming the peak portion and the polyolefin resin foam forming the valley portion are laminated and formed on the laminated surface of the polyolefin resin foam.
  • a cushioning material made of a polyolefin resin foam comprising an adhesive layer or a fusional layer, wherein one surface of the cushioning material is a wave in which peaks and valleys are alternately arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions.
  • a profiled surface of a concave-convex structure having a shape, the other surface is a flat surface, and the adhesive layer or the adhesive layer formed substantially parallel to the other surface at a predetermined height portion of the surface of the wavy uneven structure.
  • a cushioning material characterized in that it is formed at a predetermined height between the mountain portion and the valley portion so as to surround each of the mountain portions.
  • the cushion material is not only used as a partition wall for evacuation shelters, but also has excellent design, heat insulation and moisture resistance, and can be used as a bed substitute because it is made of foam material and profiled. Can be suitably used as a mat for disasters.
  • a large number of two-dimensional annular linear patterns can be formed on the surface of the cushion material by coloring them at a predetermined height at predetermined intervals.
  • the position of forming the linear pattern formed in a ring shape at a predetermined height can be arbitrarily adjusted between the peak and the valley.
  • the linear pattern is formed by a fusion layer or an adhesive layer, and when the linear pattern is formed by the fusion layer, at least one fusion surface of the resin foam to be fused is painted in a different color. It may be formed by being fused using the resin foam, or when the linear pattern is formed by an adhesive layer, the adhesive layer is formed by using a colored adhesive. It may be one of the above.
  • the linear pattern can be colored by painting the fused surface, and the adhesive layer can be colored in any color by using a colored adhesive.
  • the fusion layer or the adhesion layer is a fusion layer, and the fusion layer crystallizes when the surface of the resin foam forming the fusion layer at the time of fusion crystallizes in the process of melting and solidifying. It may be selectively formed into different colors by superimposing changes in degree and molecular orientation, and in addition, a residual effect of ADCA (azodicarbonamide) on the foam surface. Specifically, in addition to the change in the crystallinity and molecular orientation of the fused layer in the recrystallization process of the surface of the uncolored white resin foam by fusion, the residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface is exhibited. It can be used to selectively discolor and color yellow.
  • the surface of the foam is easy for the foamed gas near the surface of the foam to escape, and it is possible to suppress the consumption of the foaming agent ADCA as compared with the inside of the foam.
  • the resin foam surface and the fusion portion are fused when the resin is fused. Since it is remelted and recrystallized, the fused portion can be colored yellow by superimposing the crystallization state, molecular orientation, residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface, and the like. In this way, the change in color of the fusion layer at the time of fusion may be utilized.
  • a resin foam whose surface is painted in a predetermined color may be adhered.
  • a similar linear pattern can be formed by including a pigment of a predetermined color, for example, a pigment such as yellow or red, in the adhesive.
  • the one surface of the cushioning material is formed by the mountain portion formed by the resin foam above the linear pattern, the linear pattern forming portion on which the linear pattern is formed, and the lower portion of the linear pattern. It is divided into three portions with the valley portion formed by the resin foam on the side, and the valley portions are continuously integrated with each other by adjacent valley portions, and the linear pattern forming portion is described as described above.
  • a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern may be formed by forming either the mountain portion or the valley portion in a different color.
  • the peaks or valleys and the adhesive are colored with a pigment to form a surface, or foaming to form a fusion layer.
  • the adherend surface of the body may be colored by painting before fusion.
  • both the peak portion and the valley portion of the wavy uneven structure are colored in different colors, whereby the linear pattern forming portion and the said A cushioning material having a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in which both the mountain portion and the valley portion are colored in different colors may be used.
  • the formation height of the linear pattern can be formed at an arbitrary height within the range of the wavy uneven structure, and the linear pattern is formed from the center of the height of the wavy uneven structure.
  • the linear pattern or the colored mountain pattern can be made smaller by forming the mountain side, or the linear pattern can be formed from the center of the wavy uneven structure. By forming on the valley side, it may be possible to form the linear pattern or the colored mountain pattern in a large size.
  • the wavy uneven structure can be formed by profile processing, and the size of the annular pattern of the linear pattern can be changed by adjusting the formation height of the wavy uneven structure.
  • the raw material resin of the resin foam may be at least one of polyethylene, low-density polyethylene, high-density polyethylene, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, or polypropylene resin, or a mixture of two or more thereof. Further, the resin foam is provided with a polyethylene resin or a polypropylene resin having a carboxy group such as maleic anhydride or a functional group having an acid anhydride structure in order to improve the fusion property of the raw material resin at the time of fusion. It may contain a fixed amount.
  • the predetermined amount is the compounding ratio of the polyethylene resin or polypropylene resin having a carboxy group such as maleic anhydride or a functional group having an acid anhydride structure when the total compounding amount of the raw material resin is 100 parts by mass.
  • the resin contains 0.5 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, but it is preferably 5 parts by mass or less.
  • the resin foam is a polyethylene resin foam
  • the polyethylene resin foam has a closed cell structure having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times, and further has a compression set of 3.0% to 7 based on JIS K6767. It is 4.4%, and the compressive stress at 25% compression at a test temperature of 25 ° C. may be 34 kPa to 56 kPa.
  • the corrugated uneven structure may be one in which functionality is imparted to the adhesive layer of the cushion material.
  • the adhesive layer is formed on the laminated surface of the resin foam by an adhesive, and at least one selected from the group consisting of urethane resin, vinyl acetate emulsion, acrylic resin, silicone resin and modified silicone resin is formed on the adhesive layer.
  • an adhesive containing a flexible resin as a main component, vibration damping properties are imparted, or an acrylic acid ester-based polymer, a halogen-containing phosphoric acid ester, and an inorganic flame retardant are contained as essential components. Flame retardancy and vibration damping properties may be imparted by using an adhesive.
  • the resin foam can be easily prepared by dispersing any of silica, zirconium phosphate, zeolite, zinc sulfate, and zirconium sulfate as a deodorant in a predetermined amount.
  • the resin foam is an amorphous calcium phosphate particle that adsorbs or carries silver ions as an antibacterial agent or an antiviral agent, titanium oxide particles having an anatase-type crystal structure having a photocatalytic action, or a metal of silver, copper, or zinc.
  • a predetermined amount of compound particles and metal fine particles of silver, copper, and zinc may be dispersed.
  • the content of these deodorants and antibacterial agents may be in the range of 0.5 parts by mass to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin component, but is in the range of 0.5 parts by mass to 5 parts by mass. Is preferable.
  • the cushion material may be used as a disaster mat material with the surface on which the corrugated uneven structure is formed as the upper surface and the other surface as the lower surface. Since the cushion material is formed of a profiled foam material, it can be used in place of a bed. Therefore, the evacuation shelter section can be effectively used without providing a space dedicated to the bed in each section of the evacuation shelter.
  • an adhesive layer or a fusion layer is exposed on a portion of a surface of a wavy uneven structure at a predetermined height, and a large number of linear patterns are formed in an annular shape separated from each other by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the design is high. Therefore, a cushion material suitable for exposed use can be obtained.
  • the cushion material of the first invention is cut in a straight line by connecting the inflection point positions of the profiled surface of the cushion material so that the cross-sectional area of the substantially parallel portion occupying the end surface of the cushion material is maximized. It is desirable to have.
  • the linear pattern is formed by the fusion layer or the adhesive layer exposed on the surface of the wavy uneven structure, thereby partitioning the peaks and valleys of the wavy uneven structure, and each peak is separated.
  • the design can be enhanced.
  • the wire is used.
  • the pattern can be colored in any color. For example, as a basic configuration of the linear pattern of the present invention, if the fused layer or the adhesive layer is colored, the foam bonded by sandwiching the fused layer or the adhesive layer may be uncolored white.
  • the fusion layer or the adhesive layer is colored blue or yellow, a large number of blue or yellow annular patterns are formed at predetermined positions in the mountainous portion of the wavy uneven structure, and the other parts are formed.
  • a white cushioning material can be obtained.
  • the linear pattern is formed by the fusion layer, the crystallinity, the change in molecular orientation, and the residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface due to the solidification and crystallization process after melting without coloring at the time of fusion. Since only the fused surface is selectively colored, it is not necessary to apply a pigment or paint to the surface of the foam to be fused.
  • one surface of the cushioning material is divided into three portions of a mountain portion, a linear pattern forming portion and a valley portion, and at least one or two of the peak portion or the valley portion is relative to the linear pattern forming portion. If two parts are formed in different colors, it becomes possible to form a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in addition to a large number of annular patterns formed on the same two-dimensional plane, resulting in higher design. Obtainable.
  • the resin foam is polyethylene, it is difficult to absorb water, so it is ideal for exposed use.
  • the resin foam is a urethane-based resin, it is hydrolyzable and is usually an open-cell resin foam, so that it is not suitable for exposure use. In this way, various polyolefin-based resins can be used for the resin foam, but if closed-cell foamed polyethylene is used, the cushioning material does not absorb moisture, providing a comfortable sleeping environment and living environment. Can be provided.
  • the resin foam contains a predetermined amount of a polyethylene resin or polypropylene resin having a carboxy group such as maleic anhydride or a functional group having an acid anhydride structure, the fusion property on the fusion surface is improved. More preferred.
  • the compression set has a compression set of 3.0% to 7.4% based on JIS K6767, and the compression is 25% at a test temperature of 25 ° C.
  • the compressive stress is 34 kPa to 56 kPa, appropriate cushioning and moisture resistance can be ensured.
  • the adhesive layer of the cushion material is provided with functionality, it is possible to impart vibration damping property, flame retardancy, etc. in addition to cushioning property as well as design property. It is desirable that the total occupancy ratio of the adhesive layers, which is the ratio of the total area of the adhesive layers arranged on substantially the same plane to the total area of the cushion material in a plan view, is high because the functionality can be enhanced.
  • an adhesive containing a specific flexible resin as a main component is used for the adhesive layer of the resin foam, or an adhesive containing an inorganic flame retardant in an acrylic resin or a halogen phosphate ester resin is used.
  • vibration damping and flame retardancy can be imparted to the adhesive layer. In this way, it is effective to impart these effects to the adhesive layer.
  • the resin foam used for the cushion material or the laminate adsorbs either silica, zirconium phosphate, zeolite, zinc sulfate, or zirconium sulfate as a deodorant, or silver ions as an antibacterial agent or an antiviral agent.
  • a predetermined amount of any of the supported amorphous calcium phosphate particles, titanium oxide particles having an anatase-type crystal structure having a photocatalytic action, metal compound particles such as silver, copper and zinc, and metal fine particles of silver, copper and zinc is contained. This makes it possible to impart a deodorant effect, an antibacterial effect, and an antiviral effect to the cushion material.
  • organic-derived materials and salts having excellent antiviral properties examples include alkylbenzene sulfonic acid compounds, alkali metal salts such as sodium salts and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and barium, and sulfonic acid surfactants. However, it is also considered effective to apply an aqueous emulsion of these compounds to the surface of the cushioning material. Alkylbenzene sulfonic acid compounds having excellent antiviral properties are more preferable.
  • the second invention is a laminate composed of the cushion material and the sheet-like resin foam according to the first invention, and is formed on the other flat surface of the back surface of the cushion material having the wavy concave-convex structure.
  • the laminated body is characterized in that a sheet-shaped resin foam made of yet another polyolefin resin is laminated and adhered or fused.
  • the average thickness of the laminate is 20 mm or more and 50 mm or less, but preferably 20 mm or more and 40 mm or less. This is because if the average thickness of the laminate is 20 mm or less, the heat insulating property and the moisture proof property are insufficient and it is not suitable for use as a bed.
  • the weight of the laminate having a foaming ratio of 30 times and the dimensions of the laminate being 1800 mm in length ⁇ 880 mm in height ⁇ 30 mm in peak thickness is 1.25 kg, which is an average.
  • the thickness is 50 mm, the weight of the laminate is 2.5 kg.
  • the other sheet-shaped resin foam of the laminated body may have a higher strength or the same strength as the resin foam having the wavy uneven structure.
  • Hard means reducing the amount of deformation with respect to the same compressive load
  • equivalent strength means the strength of a material having the same amount of deformation with respect to the same compressive load.
  • the resin foam can be made hard by setting the foaming ratio low.
  • the description of the resin foam is a laminate in which the cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which the linear pattern is formed and another sheet-like resin foam are adhered or fused to the flat surface of the cushion material. It shall refer to the resin foam used for both bodies.
  • the laminate can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a partition side wall or a bed for a shelter in the event of a disaster, and can normally be used as a wall panel material for shock absorption.
  • the partition for division can be used as a partition for household division that divides evacuees for each household at the time of evacuation.
  • the laminate uses a resin foam having a foaming ratio of 40 times or less, and the back surface of the laminate with respect to the height (Hv) from the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate to the valley portion of the laminate.
  • the ratio of the height from the flat surface of the sheet-shaped foam to the center line height (Hc) of the wavy uneven structure surface is R, if R satisfies 50% or more, the lamination is excellent in assembly independence. It can also be a body.
  • (HC) is the height (Hm) from the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate to the mountain portion of the laminate, which will be described later, and the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate. It is the average height from the height (Hv) from the height to the valley of the laminated body. That is, it is the ratio of the average height of the profiled surface to the valley of the profiled surface from the back surface of the laminate, which is the average height (center line height) of the profiled surface and the profile non-processed surface. Corresponds to the height ratio of.
  • assembling independence means that the length of the long side of a predetermined dimension is twice the length of the short side, and the side end of the short side and the side of the short side of the back surface of the laminated body are fixed ends.
  • the free end which is the end face of the short side on the opposite side of the laminate, does not bend or bend when assembled by a simple fixing means by abutting at a substantially right angle, which makes it easy to assemble the partition for partitioning. It means that it can be done stably.
  • a hook-and-loop fastener can be used, but in addition to the hook-and-loop fastener, a simple fixing means such as a button-shaped fastener (also referred to as a snap fastener) or a tape-shaped member to which a magnet is fixed is also used. Is possible.
  • the simple fixing means will be described as the fixing means.
  • the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive
  • the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached the tape-like member is laminated with an adhesive or an adhesive.
  • the thickness of the resin foam can be increased by forming a laminate of the resin foam in which another sheet-like resin foam is laminated on the other surface of the resin foam of the cushion material. Therefore, the cushioning property of the laminated body and the moisture-proof property of the cushioning material can be improved. Furthermore, the assembly independence when used as a partition can be enhanced.
  • the other sheet-shaped resin foam has a hardness equal to or harder than that of the resin foam having a wavy uneven structure, thereby preventing excessive sinking of the cushion material while maintaining the cushioning property. can do.
  • the cushion material in this way, by forming the cushion material into a laminated body, it can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a partition side wall of an evacuation shelter or a bed in the event of a disaster, and normally as a wall panel material for shock absorption. Can be used. Since the same cushion material can be used for various purposes in this way, it is extremely convenient.
  • the laminate As the laminate, a resin foam having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times or less is used, and the height (Hv) from the flat surface of the sheet-shaped foam on the back surface of the laminate to the valley portion of the laminate. ), The ratio R of the height from the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminated body to the center line height (Hc) of the corrugated uneven structure surface is 50% or more.
  • the laminate of the second invention is cut in a straight line by connecting the inflection point positions of the profile processed surface of the laminate so that the cross-sectional area of the substantially parallel portion occupying the end surface of the laminate is maximized. It is desirable to have.
  • the laminate of the second invention it is possible to obtain a disaster mat material and a shock absorbing wall panel material that can be used as a partition or a bed for a shelter having excellent design and assembly independence. Can be done.
  • Such a cushion material or laminate can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a bed. Further, the cushion material can also be used as a partition material or a wall panel material for shock absorption, depending on the case.
  • evacuation mat materials, partition materials, or shock absorbing wall panel materials that can be used as beds with deodorant, antibacterial, and antiviral effects on cushioning materials or laminates. It can be used for both, and it is possible to improve the sanitary condition of the evacuation center.
  • the pressing force of the upper and lower rolls immediately after passing through the profile roll does not completely recover the elasticity of the sheet-shaped resin foam having a predetermined thickness facing the colored adhesive layer or the fusional layer.
  • the resin foam cut and separated so as to cross the adhesive layer or the fusional layer curved in the above is elastically recovered, and the adhesive layer or the fusional layer is flat with a predetermined length and a predetermined shape.
  • a large number of cyclic rings are formed as exposed portions of the flat surface at a predetermined height portion between the peaks and valleys of the surface of the corrugated uneven structure of the resin foam.
  • This is a method for manufacturing a cushioning material, characterized in that a linear pattern is formed as a two-dimensional pattern on the same plane.
  • the sheet-shaped resin foam facing the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer may be an uncolored white resin foam.
  • the resin foam is combined with the mountain side of the corrugated uneven structure.
  • a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern may be formed in which the valley side is colored in a different color.
  • the third invention it is possible to easily manufacture a cushion material having a large number of linear patterns having excellent design. Further, by using resin foams of different colors for the sheet-shaped resin foams, it is possible to convert from a linear pattern to a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern.
  • the position of forming the adhesive layer or the fusion layer of the material before the profile roll processing is shifted or the roll is formed so as not to exceed the width of the curvature formed on the adhesion layer or the fusion layer of the resin foam by the profile roll.
  • the height at which the slicing process is performed on the outlet side of the resin foam the size of the linear pattern or the three-dimensional pattern formed on the resin foam can be adjusted.
  • laminating the sheet-shaped resin foam on the flat surface of the back surface of the cushion material not only the design property but also the assembly independence of the laminated body can be improved. Further, it is possible to improve the basic performance as a foam material such as heat insulation, shock absorption and moisture resistance.
  • the pattern on the mountain side formed by the linear pattern or the resin foam can be made smaller, or conversely, the mountain portion formed by the linear pattern or the resin foam. It is possible to form a large pattern of. This makes it possible to emphasize the mountain side more and the valley side more.
  • the fourth invention is a sheet-like resin foam having a predetermined thickness facing the colored adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer, which is opposite to the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer.
  • a laminated body can be obtained by slicing the four-layer sheet-shaped resin foam at the time of profile roll processing under predetermined conditions. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the laminate of the present application without sticking the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the cushion material.
  • the fourth invention it is possible to easily manufacture a cushion material having excellent design and a laminate in which a sheet-shaped resin foam is fused or adhered to a flat surface of the cushion material.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention is a method of using a cushioning material in which flat surfaces of the cushioning material are opposed to each other according to the first aspect of the invention, and the surface of the cushioning material having a wavy uneven structure is directed toward an outer surface.
  • a stilt with design and shock absorption a large number of the linear patterns are formed side by side on the outer surface, which is used by standing upright by stacking flat surfaces facing each other and supporting them with a support member. How to use.
  • the surfaces of the corrugated uneven structure of the pair of cushioning materials are directed outward in opposite directions, and the flat surfaces that are the back surfaces of the corrugated uneven structure are brought into contact with each other.
  • the mountain portion formed on one of the cushion materials and the valley portion formed on the other cushion material are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the valley portion formed on one of the cushion materials.
  • a cushioning material characterized in that the surfaces of the pair of cushioning materials have a wavy shape substantially parallel to each other by arranging the mountain portions formed on the other cushioning material at a predetermined distance. Can be used as. By directing the wavy concave-convex structure outward, both sides of the laminated body can be made excellent in design, so that it can be optimally used for a tsuitate.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention is a method of using a cushioning material in which two cushioning materials according to the first invention are stacked and a cushioning material imparted with functionality is laminated, and the wave of the cushioning material is used.
  • a method of using the cushion material may be characterized in that the linear patterns are formed side by side on substantially the same plane by overlapping the forming surfaces of the uneven structure of the shape with each other. It is desirable that the linear patterns are formed side by side on substantially the same plane, and the occupancy rate of the total area of the adhesive layer with respect to the plane is 80% or more.
  • the mountain portions formed on one cushion material and the valley portions formed on the other cushion material face each other with the surfaces of the wavy uneven structure of the pair of cushion materials facing each other.
  • the bonded surfaces, which are shaped like a pattern, adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane.
  • the outer surface of the stacked cushion materials is made into a flat shape, and many islands are formed in the stacked surface. Functionality can be imparted to the adhesive layer formed by exposure.
  • the laminate may be used as a partition material or a shock absorbing wall panel material.
  • the corrugated concavo-convex structure is directed outward, the design is excellent, and when the corrugated concavo-convex structure is opposed to the inside, the surface is flat and it is possible to impart functionality.
  • the adhesive surfaces arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane may form a plane having functionality.
  • the present invention by combining the corrugated shapes of two cushioning materials, it can be used as a partition material or a wall panel material inside a public facility.
  • the adhesive surfaces of the two cushioning materials can be arranged in a substantially flat shape at predetermined positions in a wavy shape, for example, if the adhesive surfaces are provided with vibration damping properties and flame retardancy, the resin
  • the vibration damping property and flame retardancy of the adhesive layer can be superimposed.
  • the adhesive surface of the overlapped cushioning materials has a continuous curved surface shape folded by a profile roll before slicing, but after slicing into two cushioning materials, the cushioning material has a flat shape.
  • the sliced surface becomes a wavy uneven structure surface, and the area of the cushion material wavy uneven structure surface increases apparently. Therefore, the cushion material with respect to the total area of the two cushion materials in the plane direction.
  • the total area of the adhesive surfaces formed at the predetermined heights of the sliced surfaces of the above is not 100%.
  • the apparent total occupancy ratio of the adhesive surfaces of the two cushioning materials arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane is high with respect to the total area. If the total area occupied by the total area including the adhesive surface with respect to the total area of the adhesive surfaces formed by superimposing the cushioning materials is 80% or more, when the adhesive surface is provided with functionality, It becomes possible to exert its functionality more reliably. Further, it is more desirable if the total apparent occupancy of the adhesive surface is 90% or more.
  • functionality can be imparted to the adhesive surfaces arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane.
  • vibration damping property, flame retardancy, design property and the like can be imparted.
  • one sheet it is possible to improve the decorativeness by utilizing the design, and when using two sheets, the functionality and assembly independence can be improved, but with two sheets. It is also possible to make a laminated body that emphasizes design even when it is used.
  • Such a laminate can be used as both a partition material and a wall panel material.
  • the assembly independence can be improved when used as a partition material for a partition material or a wall surface panel material. Can be improved.
  • the fifth invention by combining the corrugated shapes of the two cushion materials, it can be used as a partition material or a wall panel material inside a public facility. Further, when the surface of the cushion material having a wavy uneven structure is used toward the outer surface, the design can be improved. Further, when the corrugated concavo-convex structures are used facing each other, the two cushioning materials can arrange the adhesive surfaces in a substantially flat shape at a predetermined position of the corrugated surface, so that the adhesive surface has functionality. If it is given, it becomes possible to express the functionality.
  • the adhesive layer is provided with quietness and vibration damping properties
  • the quietness and vibration damping properties of the adhesive layer can be superimposed in addition to the cushioning and vibration damping properties of the resin foam. It will be possible.
  • the function to be imparted to the adhesive layer or the fusional layer since it is premised that the two sheets are used in combination with each other, the effect can be obtained even if it is not the outermost surface of the resin foam. Physical functions that are easy to exert are desirable.
  • the sixth invention is a structure of a shelter section using the laminate according to the second invention, and the laminate has a substantially rectangular shape having a long side twice the short side and the substantially rectangular shape.
  • Two of the laminates are arranged on the floor surface as a disaster mat that can be used as a bed so as to form a substantially square section by contacting the long sides of the laminates with each other, and the laminates are further arranged in the short side direction.
  • the long side of the laminated body is used as a contact surface with the floor surface so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material, and the back surface of the erected laminated body.
  • connection structure in which the fixing means fixed to the short side end surface of the flat surface and the flat portion of the short side end surface are repeatedly connected and fixed abutting or fitting at substantially right angles to each other. It is a connection structure of a shelter section, which includes at least a section in which a U-shaped side wall having one side of a substantially square opening is formed.
  • connection fixing of the laminate is a button fixed to a tape-shaped member attached to the surface of the laminate as a fixing means attached to the surface of the laminate, which can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly.
  • It may be a connection structure of a shelter section which is connected and fixed by any of a shape fastener, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed.
  • the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive
  • the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached the tape-like member is laminated with an adhesive or an adhesive.
  • This laminate is as light as 5 kg or less, usually 2 kg or less, it can be fixed by a simple fixing means.
  • the inflection point position of the profiled surface of the laminate is set so that the cross-sectional area of the substantially parallel portion of the cut surface of the end surface of the laminate is maximized.
  • the fixing means may be attached to the flat portion of the short side end face formed by cutting in a substantially rectangular shape.
  • the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes the profiled surface of the laminated body through the mountain tops and the valley tops that are arranged adjacent to each other is defined as one pitch.
  • a position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley that is, connecting a plurality of inflection point positions between the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley or between the bottom of the valley and the top of the mountain.
  • the mountain and valleys in the curve that alternately passes through the peaks and valleys that are arranged adjacent to each other are staggered so as to be orthogonal to each other, the mountain and valleys are arranged in a staggered manner.
  • the periodic structure will have a similar periodic structure in the direction orthogonal to the curve. Therefore, in the direction orthogonal to the above curve, the position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, the middle from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain.
  • the flat portion to which the fixing means is bonded depends on the cutting position. The area is different. Therefore, if the cross section having the largest parallel portion area on the side end surface is selected and that portion is used as the cutting portion, the area to which the fixing means such as the surface fastener is attached can be maximized.
  • a cushioning material may be used instead of the laminated body.
  • a seventh invention is a method for forming an evacuation shelter section using the laminate according to the second invention, wherein the laminate has a substantially rectangular shape with a long side twice the short side.
  • Two of the laminated bodies are arranged on the floor surface as a disaster mat that can be used as a bed so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are in contact with each other to form a substantially square-shaped section, and the laminated bodies are further arranged on the short sides.
  • the erected laminate with the long side of the laminate as the contact surface with the floor so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material in a state of being erected in the direction.
  • the fixing means fixed to the short side end of the flat surface on the back surface and the flat end of the short side end surface are connected and fixed by abutting or fitting at substantially right angles to each other several times to form a substantially square shape.
  • the laminated body is used adjacent to the disaster mat as the floor material of the substantially square first section, and the same size of the substantially square shape is used.
  • the opening is continuous in the opposite direction to the first section.
  • the substantially square openings are sequentially formed in a U shape in which the opening direction of the openings is opened in the opposite direction, and the side wall portions for partitioning are sequentially and repeatedly formed.
  • a large number of sections may be formed by repeatedly forming the disaster mat as a substantially square floor material corresponding to the portions.
  • the floor material is formed by arranging either the flat surface or the corrugated uneven structure surface of the laminated body toward the floor surface.
  • the side wall portion of the character shape has a wavy uneven structure surface, which is a pattern forming surface of the laminate, directed outward, inward, and outward in order along each side of the U-shaped section. It is desirable that they are arranged alternately, or that they are arranged alternately toward the inside, the outside, or the inside.
  • the floor material is arranged so that either the flat surface or the corrugated uneven structure surface of the laminate faces the floor surface, because the floor material can also be used as a bed, depending on the preference of the user.
  • Which surface should be used as the upper surface may be selected by the user at the time of use. For example, during the daytime, the corrugated uneven structure surface of the laminated body is used facing downward, and when the bed is at night, the wave is used. It may be used as a bed with the uneven structure surface of the shape facing upward.
  • the connection and fixing of the laminated body as a partition material for the compartment are not particularly limited as long as they can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly.
  • it may be connected by a button-shaped fastener fixed to a tape-shaped member attached to the surface of the laminate, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed.
  • the surface fastener the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive
  • the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached the tape-like member is laminated with an adhesive or an adhesive. Can be fixed to.
  • the fixing means is a predetermined position from the upper end to the lower end of the flat surface of the laminated body in the direction of the end, or the flat portion of the short side of the laminated body.
  • the fixing means which is attached to a predetermined position from above to below the portion corresponding to the above, and is attached to a predetermined position on the flat surface, and the fixing means, which is attached to the flat portion of the end surface, face each other. They may be connected by touching or facing each other.
  • the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes through the profiled surface of the laminated body at the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is defined as 1 pitch.
  • a straight line is connected so as to connect a position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, an intermediate position from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or an intermediate position from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. It is cut, or when these intermediate positions are inflection points, it is cut in a substantially straight line so as to connect the inflection point positions, thereby cutting the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the laminated body.
  • the fixing means may be attached to the cut surface of the short side end face formed in a substantially long shape so as to maximize the area.
  • a fixing means such as a hook-and-loop fastener is fixed to the cut surface having the maximum parallel portion area on the side end surface, the laminated body can be firmly fixed.
  • a cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface according to the first invention may be used.
  • the evacuation shelter section can be formed by using the laminate of the second invention. Further, if the size and shape of the entire outer surface of the cushion material is the same as that of the laminated body, it can be used in the same manner as the laminated body. Further, according to the method of forming the shelter compartment of the present invention, when assembling the shelter compartment, the laminate or the cushioning material of the present invention is lightweight, and the position of the hook-and-loop fastener is only visually recognized without using a special tool. Therefore, even children can easily and intuitively assemble it.
  • An eighth invention is a method of disassembling and storing an evacuation shelter compartment formed by the method of forming an evacuation shelter compartment according to the seventh invention, in which fixing means are attached to predetermined positions on both sides of a flat surface of the laminated body. Then, the fixing means is arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the position of the fixing means on the flat surface, and after disassembling the laminated body forming the evacuation center section, the flat surface of the laminated body is directed toward the wall surface.
  • the second layer is stacked on the surface of the wavy uneven structure by aligning the end face with the first layer and overlapping the surface of the wavy uneven structure.
  • the 3rd and 4th sheets are erected with the flat surface and the wavy uneven structure surface, which are the respective laminated surfaces, in the same order as the 1st and 2nd sheets, with the respective laminated surfaces and end faces aligned.
  • the laminated bodies are sequentially and repeatedly stacked and erected according to the number of stacked bodies in the same procedure, and fixed at a predetermined position on the end face of each of the erected laminated bodies. It is a method of disassembling and storing a shelter section, characterized in that the means are bonded and the fixing means of the end face of the laminated body is fixed by the fixing means having a predetermined length fixed to another wall surface.
  • the fixing means used for disassembling and storing the laminated body is the same as the fixing means used for assembling the laminated body, and the fixing means that can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly.
  • the fixing means may be any of a button-shaped fastener fixed to the tape-shaped member, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed.
  • the surface fastener the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to.
  • the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes through the profiled surface of the laminated body at the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is set to 1 pitch.
  • a straight line is connected so as to connect a position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, an intermediate position from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or an intermediate position from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. It is cut, or when these intermediate positions are inflection points, it is cut in a substantially straight line so as to connect the inflection point positions, thereby cutting the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the laminated body.
  • the fixing means may be attached to the cut surface of the short side end surface formed so as to maximize the area.
  • a fixing means such as a hook-and-loop fastener
  • the fixing means for the end face of the laminated body can be changed to a fixing means having a predetermined length fixed to another wall surface. Can be firmly fixed.
  • a cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface according to the first invention may be used instead of the laminated body.
  • the shelter section formed by the seventh invention can be disassembled and stored. Further, in the method of disassembling and storing the laminated body of the evacuation center section, even if a cushion material is used instead of the laminated body, if the dimensions and shape of the entire outer surface of the cushion material are the same as those of the laminated body, the laminated body It can be used in the same way. Further, also in the method of disassembling and storing the laminated body of the evacuation shelter section of the eighth invention, the laminated body or the cushioning material of the present invention is lightweight, and the position of the hook-and-loop fastener is only visually recognized without using a special tool. Even children can easily and intuitively disassemble and store it.
  • a ninth invention is a method for forming a shock absorbing wall surface panel of an evacuation center using the laminate used in the method for forming an evacuation shelter section according to the seventh invention, and both sides of a flat surface of the laminate.
  • the flatness of the laminated body when the fixing means is laminated at a predetermined position and the laminated bodies are continuously arranged so that the short sides of the laminated body are vertical surfaces parallel to the wall surface and the long sides are adjacent to each other.
  • Fixing means is arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the arrangement position of the fixing means on the surface, and after disassembling the laminate forming the evacuation center section, the flat surface of the laminate is directed to the wall surface, and the above.
  • the wavy uneven structure surface of the laminated body is fixed toward the indoor side by the fixing means arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the arrangement position of the fixing means of the laminated body, and yet another laminated body is fixed.
  • another laminated body is formed on the wall surface by a fixing means similarly arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface, and a wavy uneven structure surface is formed so as to be continuous with the first laminated body.
  • An evacuation center characterized in that a shock absorbing wall panel is formed by fixing the laminated body toward the indoor side and then fixing another laminated body to the wall surface so as to be continuous with the laminated body fixed to the wall surface immediately before. This is a method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel.
  • the same fixing means used for assembling the laminated body is a fixing means that can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly, and the fixing means is a button-shaped fastener, a magnet, or a minute piece fixed to a tape-shaped member. It may be any of the hook-and-loop fasteners on which a large number of protrusions are formed.
  • the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive
  • the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive.
  • a cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface according to the first invention may be used.
  • the ninth invention it is possible to obtain a method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation shelter. Further, in the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel using the laminated body of the evacuation center section, even if a cushioning material is used instead of the laminated body, the same effect as when the laminated body is used can be obtained.
  • the fourth to ninth inventions it is possible to assemble a partition for a shelter with excellent design using a cushion material or a laminate without using tools or assembly parts. is there.
  • the cushion material and the laminate are lightweight, even elderly people and children can easily assemble them.
  • a shock absorbing wall panel can be easily formed on the wall surface of the evacuation shelter.
  • it can be used as a shock absorbing wall panel on the wall surface of the evacuation shelter in normal times, and can be used as a partition for partitioning in the evacuation shelter or as a floor material in an emergency.
  • the cushioning material and the laminate used in these inventions are made of polyolefin resin foam, and have succeeded in forming a linear pattern on a wavy uneven structure surface by coloring the fused surface or the adhesive surface. It is lightweight, has excellent design, and has excellent heat insulation, shock cushioning, and moisture resistance. It is also possible to give the adhesive layer or the fusion layer functionality such as vibration damping property and sound insulation property. Further, if a predetermined size and shape are given to the laminated body, the assembly workability of the partition partition becomes excellent, and a partition partition that can be easily assembled without using assembly tools or assembly parts can be obtained. be able to.
  • a connection structure of the evacuation shelter section using the laminate a method of forming the evacuation shelter section using the laminate, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation shelter section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation shelter section. Can be obtained.
  • a linear pattern is formed on a wavy uneven structure surface made of a polyolefin resin foam which is lightweight, has excellent designability, and can give vibration damping and quietness to an adhesive layer or a fusion layer.
  • connection structure of a place section a method of forming an evacuation center section using a laminated body, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation center section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation center section.
  • FIG. 6A is an enlarged view of part C. Sectional drawing of the laminated body 1a. The figure which shows the state which the cushion material 1 is arranged facing each other.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the laminated structure 40.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the laminated structure 40a. It is sectional drawing of the laminated structure 40, and is the sectional drawing taken on line FF of FIG.
  • FIG. 1A is a front perspective view of the cushion material 1
  • FIG. 1B is a back perspective view of the cushion material
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view of the cushion material 1.
  • the cushion material 1 is formed of a polyolefin resin foam.
  • a mountain portion 5 and a valley portion 7 are formed on one surface (surface 3) of the cushion material 1.
  • the peaks 5 and valleys 7 are periodically arranged vertically and horizontally alternately. That is, the surface 3 of the cushion material 1 has a wavy uneven structure, the peaks 5 are formed at predetermined intervals, valleys 7 are formed between the peaks 5, and the peaks 5 and 7 are formed. However, each is provided in a so-called staggered arrangement. Therefore, a valley portion 7 is formed in a portion vertically and horizontally adjacent to the mountain portion 5, and a mountain portion 5 is formed in a portion vertically and horizontally adjacent to the valley portion 7.
  • the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7 are not formed on the other surface (back surface 9) of the cushion material 1 and are flat. That is, the cushion material 1 has peaks 5 and valleys 7 formed only on the surface 3.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG.
  • the mountain portion 5 is a thick portion
  • the valley portion 7 is a thin portion.
  • a ridge having a thickness substantially intermediate between the thicknesses of the mountain portions 5 and the valley portions 7 is formed between the mountain portions 5 adjacent to each other in the diagonal direction (between the valley portions 7 adjacent to each other in the diagonal direction).
  • the wavy uneven structure on the surface of the cushion material 1 is formed smoothly and continuously in this way.
  • the cushion material 1 includes an adhesive layer 17 formed on the laminated surface of the resin foams 15a and 15b by laminating the resin foam 15a forming the peak portion 5 and the resin foam 15b forming the valley portion 7. ..
  • an adhesive layer 17 is formed on the laminated surface of the resin foams 15a and 15b will be described, but a fusion layer may be used instead of the adhesive layer 17.
  • the adhesive layer is not colored, it is recognized as white, which is substantially the same color as the resin foams 15a and 15b, like the fusion layer. Since the cross section of the cushion material is usually invisible, the colored adhesive layer or fusion layer is observed as a large number of annular linear patterns as described later.
  • the adhesive layer 17 is formed by an adhesive on the laminated surface of the resin foams 15a and 15b
  • at least one kind of flexible resin such as urethane resin, vinyl acetate emulsion, acrylic resin, silicone resin and modified silicone resin
  • An adhesive contained as a main component can be used.
  • vibration damping property is imparted to the cushion material 1.
  • an adhesive containing an acrylic acid ester-based polymer, a halogen-containing phosphoric acid ester, and an inorganic flame retardant as essential components can also be used in the adhesive layer 17. By doing so, it is possible to impart flame retardancy and vibration damping property to the cushion material 1.
  • the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material 1 may be one in which the adhesive layer 17 (or the fusion layer) is provided with functionality.
  • An adhesive layer 17 formed substantially parallel to the back surface 9 is exposed at a predetermined height portion of the front surface 3 of the wavy uneven structure.
  • the adhesive layer 17 forms a large number of annular linear patterns 11 at predetermined intervals from each other in a plan view.
  • the linear pattern 11 partitions the peaks 5 and valleys 7 having a wavy uneven structure, and is formed in an annular shape at a predetermined height between the peaks 5 and the valleys 7 so as to surround the respective peaks 5.
  • the valley portions 7 are continuously integrated with each other in the adjacent valley portions 7.
  • the resin foams 15a and 15b are preferably at least one of polyethylene, low-density polyethylene, high-density polyethylene, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, or polypropylene resin, or a mixture of two or more thereof. At this time, it is desirable that the foaming ratios of the resin foams 15a and 15b are 20 to 40 times. In particular, it is desirable that the resin foams 15a and 15b are polyethylene resins. It is desirable that this polyethylene resin has a compression set of 3.0% to 7.4% and a compressive stress of 34 kPa to 56 kPa at 25% compression at a test temperature of 25 ° C. based on JIS K6767.
  • the compressive stress of the resin foams 15a and 15b is measured by the compressive stress test by the compressive stress strain ISO3386-1 in JIS K6767: 1999. At this time, the moving speed of the compression plate of the testing machine is about 50% of the material thickness per minute, the test temperature is 25 ° C., and the compressive stress at the time of 25% compression of the material thickness is measured.
  • the compression set of the resin foams 15a and 15b is measured by a test according to ISO1856 in JIS K6767: 1999.
  • a permanent compression strain can be obtained by compressing the test piece into a state of being distorted by 25%, leaving it at a temperature of 23 ° C. ⁇ 2 ° C. for 22 hours, and measuring the thickness 24 hours after the completion of compression.
  • the hygroscopicity (water absorption rate) of the cushion material 1 can be lowered.
  • the water absorption rates of the resin foams 15a and 15b are measured by the ISO2896 B method. In the case of a sample in which a skin layer is formed on both sides or one side, the water absorption rate can be calculated by the following formula.
  • Qs (W1-W2) / A
  • Qs Water absorption rate (g / cm 2 )
  • W2 Mass (g) of test piece after drying at 60 ° C. for 24 hours
  • A Area of test piece (cm 2 )
  • the water absorption rate of polyethylene is preferably 0.03 mg / cm 2 or less.
  • the tensile strengths of the resin foams 15a and 15b in the MD direction are 273 kPa to 495 kPa and the tensile strength in the TD direction is 201 kPa to 333 kPa. Further, it is desirable that the elongation values of the resin foams 15a and 15b in the MD direction are 92% to 100% and the elongation values in the TD direction are 114% to 120%.
  • the tensile strength and elongation value are obtained from the tensile strength and elongation value at break of the test conducted at a test speed of 500 mm / min according to ISO1798.
  • any one of silica, zirconium phosphate, zeolite, zinc sulfate, or zirconium sulfate is added as a deodorant to 100 parts by mass of the resin component from 0.5 parts by mass to 5 parts by mass. It may be included in the range of parts by mass. In this way, a deodorant can be contained to impart a deodorizing function.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a resin foam manufacturing apparatus 20.
  • the resin foam manufacturing apparatus 20 is mainly composed of an extrusion machine 21, a roll forming machine 23, a heating furnace 25, a winding machine 27, and the like.
  • a master batch containing a raw material resin for example, polyethylene resin
  • a pigment for example, polyethylene resin
  • a chemical foaming agent for example, polyethylene foam
  • a cross-linking agent for example, polyethylene foam
  • the material thickness and width are adjusted by passing through the roll forming machine 23.
  • the inside of the furnace is set so that the temperature gradually rises toward the inner side of the furnace within a predetermined temperature (for example, 190 ° C. to 240 ° C.) on a wire mesh conveyor.
  • a predetermined temperature for example, 190 ° C. to 240 ° C.
  • the cross-linking agent is first thermally decomposed, the polyethylene resin is cross-linked, and then the chemical foaming agent is thermally decomposed to obtain a predetermined sheet thickness (preferably 15 mm or more) at a predetermined foaming ratio (for example, 30 times). 20 mm) resin foams 15a and 15b can be obtained.
  • DCP dicumyl peroxide
  • ADCA can be used as a chemical foaming agent without using a bubble nucleating agent.
  • carbon dioxide gas may be used as a physical nucleating material such as mono-Na citrate, a surfactant, and silicone oil.
  • the resin foams 15a and 15b are laminated by fusion or adhesion.
  • the resin foams 15a and 15b to be adhered or fused may have the same thickness or different thicknesses.
  • an adhesive is applied to the respective surfaces of the resin foams 15a and 15b, and the opposite surface to which the adhesive is not applied is pressed with a press, or one of the resin foams 15a and 15b is foamed.
  • the adhesive By passing a roll coated with an adhesive, the adhesive is applied to the resin foam, and the surface to which the adhesive is applied is used as the bonding surface, and the other resin foam is overlapped. Then, the two resin foams can be adhered by passing through different rolls.
  • the adhesive can be colored with an organic dye, dye, pigment or the like, or at least one adhesive surface can be colored with an organic dye, dye, pigment or the like.
  • the fused surface can be colored with an organic dye, a dye, a pigment, or the like, as in the case of bonding. Further, since the resin is remelted and recrystallized when the surface of the resin foam and the fused portion are fused, the change in the crystallized state and the molecular weight at that time and the residual of ADCA are likely to remain on the surface. By superimposing the effects and the like, the fused portion can be colored yellow.
  • FIG. 5A is a front view showing rolls 31a and 31b which are profile rolls used for profile processing of the cushion material 1
  • FIG. 5B is a side view showing rolls 31a and 31b. Since the roll 31b has the same configuration as the roll 31a, the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the roll 31a has a plurality of convex portions 33 formed on the surface of a cylindrical roll.
  • the convex portions 33 are arranged in a staggered pattern on the surface of the roll 31a. That is, the convex portions 33 are formed at predetermined intervals (predetermined pitch) in the longitudinal direction of the roll 31a, and the convex portions 33 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction are formed at positions shifted by half a pitch with respect to the above-mentioned installation pitch.
  • the portion surrounded by the convex portion 33 is the concave portion 35.
  • the concave portion 35 is slightly larger than the convex portion 33, and the convex portion 33 and the concave portion 35 facing each other can mesh with each other.
  • the rolls 31a and 31b are arranged at predetermined intervals so as to face each other.
  • the spacing between the rolls 31a and 31b can be adjusted.
  • the rolls 31a and 31b are arranged at circumferential positions so that the positions of the convex portions 33 and the concave portions 35 of the rolls 31a and 31b facing each other do not match.
  • the convex portion 33 of the upper roll 31a is located at the lowermost end (the side facing the roll 31b) at a certain circumferential cross-sectional position (for example, FIG. 5B).
  • the recess 35 is located at the uppermost end (roll 31a side) of the lower roll 31b.
  • the convex portions 33 and the concave portions 35 in the longitudinal direction of the rolls 31a and 31b are also installed so as to be staggered so as not to coincide with each other.
  • FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the cushion material 1 is manufactured using the rolls 31a and 31b.
  • the rolls 31a and 31b are installed at predetermined intervals.
  • the rolls 31a and 31b rotate in opposite directions (in the direction of arrow D in the figure), and bite the laminated resin foam 39 from one side.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 is obtained by laminating the above-mentioned resin foams 15a and 15b and adhering or fusing them together.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 is a resin foam 15a and 15b having the same foaming ratio and sheet thickness, laminated and bonded or fused as described above.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 is bitten by the rolls 31a and 31b and sequentially sent backward (in the direction of arrow E in the figure).
  • a cutting blade 37 is provided on the slightly rear side of the biting portion of the rolls 31a and 31b. The cutting blade 37 cuts the laminated resin foam 39 perpendicularly in the thickness direction, and has a width at least equal to or larger than the width of the laminated resin foam 39.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 is sent to the rear of the rolls 31a and 31b while being crushed (deformed) by the rolls 31a and 31b, and is perpendicular to the thickness direction by the cutting blade 37 in a state of being deformed by the rolls 31a and 31b. Will be disconnected.
  • FIG. 6B is an enlarged view of part C of FIG. 6A.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 is elastically deformed by the convex portions 33 and the concave portions 35 of the rolls 31a and 31b. As described above, the rolls 31a and 31b rotate so that the convex portion 33 (concave portion 35) of the roll 31a and the concave portion 35 (convex portion 33) of the roll 31b are in alternate positions. Therefore, the laminated resin foam 39 has a corrugated shape so as to sew between the convex portion 33 and the concave portion 35 of the upper roll 31a and the convex portion 33 and the concave portion 35 of the lower roll 31b.
  • the cutting blade 37 cuts the laminated resin foam 39 in a state where the laminated resin foam 39 has a wavy shape.
  • the cutting blade 37 is installed at substantially the center of the laminated resin foam 39 in the thickness direction (intermediate between the rolls 31a and 31b).
  • the laminated resin foam 39 is deformed into a corrugated shape. Therefore, the center of the laminated resin foam 39 in the thickness direction is not cut straight, but the laminated resin foam 39 is cut in a corrugated manner with respect to the thickness direction.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 has an adhesive layer 17 formed inside. Therefore, when the laminated resin foam 39 is deformed into a corrugated shape, the adhesive layer 17 is in a state of being repeatedly deformed into a corrugated shape up and down while forming the center line of the laminated resin foam 39.
  • the cutting blade 37 cuts the laminated resin foam 39 so as to cross the corrugated adhesive layer 17.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 after cutting is sent to the rear of the rolls 31a and 31b while the deformation caused by the rolls 31a and 31b (convex portion 33 and concave portion 35) returns to the original state.
  • the portion cut by the cutting blade 37 returns to the waveform. Therefore, peaks 5 and valleys 7 are formed on the cut surface of the laminated resin foam 39. That is, the portion deformed in the concave portion 35 of the roll centering on the cutting blade 37 becomes the peak portion 5 of the cushion material 1, and the portion crushed by the convex portion 33 of the roll becomes the valley portion 7 of the cushion material 1. ..
  • the contact surface with the rolls 31a and 31b has a flat shape, and conversely, the cut surface is a wave in which peaks and valleys are alternately arranged vertically and horizontally according to the uneven pitch of the rolls 31a and 31b. An uneven structure of shape can be obtained.
  • the laminated resin foam 39 immediately after passing through the rolls 31a and 31b, which are the profile rolls, has the adhesive layer 17 (the adhesive layer 17 () before the pressing force by the upper and lower rolls 31a and 31b is completely elastically recovered.
  • it is sliced and cut at a position including a fused layer (the same applies hereinafter).
  • the adhesive layer 17 is cut so as to cross the curved adhesive layer 17 in a curved state, the cut and separated laminated resin foam 39 elastically recovers, and the adhesive layer 17 has a predetermined length and a predetermined length.
  • the adhesive layer 17 is exposed at a predetermined height on the surface between the peaks 5 and the valleys 7 of the corrugated uneven structure of the laminated resin foam 39, and the flat surface.
  • a periodic linear pattern 11 is formed in a staggered manner corresponding to the longitudinal direction and the width direction of the roll.
  • a pair of cushioning materials 1 having a wavy uneven structure formed by profile processing are formed.
  • the cushion material 1 thus obtained is a disaster mat material that can be used as a bed, for example, with the surface (front surface 3) for forming a wavy uneven structure as the upper surface and the other surface (back surface 9) as the lower surface. It can be used as.
  • the design is excellent.
  • such a cushion material 1 can be obtained by profile-processing the laminated resin foam 39, the manufacturability is good.
  • the linear pattern 11 (by making at least one of the laminated resin foams 15a and 15b colored, or by making both resin foams 15a and 15b different colors, With the position of the adhesive layer 17) as the interface, the mountain portion 5 side and the valley portion 7 side (including the bottom portion) of the wavy uneven structure are colored in different colors with respect to the linear pattern forming portion 13. 3D pattern can be formed.
  • the cutting blade 37 is installed at substantially the center of the rolls 31a and 31b (approximately the center of the laminated resin foam 39 to be cut in the thickness direction), but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the cutting position may be moved in a predetermined amount in the vertical direction so as not to exceed the width (height) of the curvature formed in the roll, and the height at which the slicing process is performed on the outlet side of the roll may be adjusted.
  • the position where the adhesive layer 17 of the laminated resin foam 39 is formed can be determined. It may be shifted from the center of the thickness.
  • the resin foams 15a and 15b are made of polyethylene, the hygroscopicity is low, so that the moistureproof property of a mat or the like using the cushion material 1 can be enhanced. Therefore, when the cushion material 1 is used as a mat in the event of a disaster, the cushion material 1 does not absorb moisture and is made of a profiled foam material, so that it can also be used as a bed for a comfortable sleep. It can provide an environment and a living environment.
  • the adhesive layer 17 can be imparted to the adhesive layer 17.
  • the resin foams 15a and 15b may be provided with a deodorizing function.
  • the laminate is formed by laminating flat resin foams 15c and 15d after roll molding on the cushion material 1 formed by slicing two layers of resin foam as described later. You may.
  • FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing a laminated body 1a in which a sheet-shaped resin foam is fused or adhered to the back surface of a cushion material.
  • the same configurations as those of the cushion material 1 are designated by the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 1A to 6B, and duplicate description will be omitted.
  • the laminated body 1a has substantially the same structure as the cushion material 1, but differs in that the resin foam 15c is laminated by fusing or adhering the sheet-shaped resin foam 15c to the back surface of the cushion material 1.
  • another sheet-shaped resin foam 15c is laminated and adhered or fused to the other flat surface of the back surface of the corrugated uneven structure forming surface of the cushion material 1.
  • another sheet-shaped resin foam may be laminated on the back surface 9 of the laminated body 1a and bonded or fused, the sheet-shaped resin foam is usually fused or bonded. Is enough.
  • another sheet-shaped resin foam 15c for fusing or adhering the sheet-shaped resin foam to the back surface of the cushion material has a hardness equal to or harder than that of the resin foams 15a and 15b having a wavy uneven structure. It is desirable to have.
  • the sheet-shaped resin foam 15c to be attached to the back surface of the cushion material as a resin having a lower foaming ratio than the resin foams 15a and 15b, assembly independence when used for a partition for partitioning described later Can be improved.
  • the method for producing the laminated body 1a is not particularly limited, but for example, the four-layer laminated resin foam may be cut using the rolls 31a and 31b shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.
  • First, another sheet-shaped resin foam layer is formed on the outside of each of the sheet-shaped resin foams having a predetermined thickness facing each other with the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer on the opposite side of the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer.
  • the roll spacing between the rolls 31a and 31b is adjusted, and slicing is performed between the intermediate second and third layers excluding the upper and lower surface layers (first and fourth layers).
  • the flat resin foams 15c or 15c and 15d are laminated on the flat back surface of the resin foam 15b having a wavy uneven structure on the surface on which the periodic linear pattern 11 is formed.
  • the bodies 1a and 1b can be obtained.
  • the effect of enhancing the design can be obtained as in the first embodiment. Further, by laminating the resin foam 15c or the like, a thicker laminated body 1a and 1b can be obtained, so that a larger cushioning property can be obtained. Further, since the thickness is increased, the assembly independence of the laminated body can be enhanced in addition to the moisture resistance.
  • the laminated bodies 1a and 1b can impart the heat insulating property, cushioning property and moisture proofing property required for the partition members of the evacuation center, and also have a periodic pattern of a corrugated uneven structure on the surface, so that the design is provided.
  • the thickness is increased by the sheet-shaped resin foams 15c and 15d, so that the assembly independence is also improved. Therefore, as will be described later, when it is used as a partition wall for a partition in an evacuation shelter, it can be easily made independent.
  • the laminates 1a and 1b are lightweight, and at the same time, the side surfaces of the ends of the laminates 1a and 1b and the flat portions of the laminates 1a and 1b can be fixed by, for example, a hook-and-loop fastener, so that tools and assembly parts can be used. It is possible to easily form a partition wall for a partition of an evacuation center without using it. Therefore, it can be suitably used as a partition member of an evacuation shelter.
  • the design can be further improved by fusing the corrugated uneven structure of the laminated bodies 1a and 1b or changing the coloring of the foams above and below the adhesive surface.
  • the floor mat when used as a partition member or floor mat for the partition wall of a shelter, the floor mat can also be used as a bed because it has functionality such as heat insulation, cushioning, and moisture resistance. Not only does it keep the living environment in the shelter of the victims comfortable, but it also has the effect of keeping the victims feeling bright.
  • the laminated bodies 1a and 1b are used as a mat by making the sheet-shaped resin foam 15c or the like to be laminated harder or the same strength as the resin foams 15a and 15b having a wavy uneven structure.
  • excessive sinking can be suppressed while maintaining cushioning properties. That is, taking a mat material as an example, it is possible to obtain a mat material that is lightweight, has excellent design, and has excellent moisture resistance and heat insulation, so that it can be exposed and used on the floor of a gymnasium such as a disaster area. ..
  • the laminated bodies 1a and 1b can be used as a bed because they have excellent moisture resistance and can suppress excessive sinking while maintaining the cushioning property, and also serve as a bed for an evacuation center. It can be suitably used as a mat material.
  • the laminated bodies 1a and 1b are laminated bodies having a predetermined size and shape, they can be used as a partition for a partition having excellent assembly independence as described later.
  • FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a state in which the cushion members 1 are arranged so as to face each other.
  • the surfaces of the wave-shaped uneven structure of the pair of cushioning materials 1 are arranged so as to face each other.
  • the present embodiment relates to a method of using a cushion material in which two cushion materials 1 are stacked and used as a laminated structure of the cushion material 1.
  • the laminated structure means a structure in which cushion materials are used by overlapping them, and the laminated portions do not necessarily have to be bonded or bonded to each other, and the flat surfaces of the cushion materials are fixed to each other by a hook-and-loop fastener.
  • the structure may be such that the corrugated uneven structure surfaces of the cushion material are arranged so as to face each other.
  • FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a laminated structure 40 in which the peaks and valleys of the pair of cushioning materials 1 are combined and laminated with each other. That is, FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a method of using a cushion material in which two cushion materials 1 are stacked and the cushion material 1 is laminated and used.
  • the mountain portion 5a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the valley portion 7b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are arranged so as to face each other.
  • the valley portion 7a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the mountain portion 5b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are arranged to face each other.
  • the corrugated concave and convex structures mesh with each other, and the linear patterns 11 are formed side by side on substantially the same plane.
  • the sheet-like laminated structure 40 is formed.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a state in which the peaks 5 and valleys 7 of the pair of cushioning materials 1 face each other with the flat portions facing each other
  • FIG. 9B shows the pair of cushioning materials 1
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a method of using the cushion material 1 in which the flat surfaces of the cushion material 1 are used so as to face each other.
  • the surfaces of the wave-shaped uneven structure of the pair of cushioning materials 1 are directed outward in opposite directions, and the flat surfaces that are the back surfaces of the wave-shaped uneven structure are brought into contact with each other, and the contact surfaces are hook-and-loop fasteners as necessary. They may be fixed to each other by fixing means such as.
  • the mountain portion 5a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the valley portion 7b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are separated from each other by a predetermined distance toward the outside. Is placed.
  • the valley portion 7a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the mountain portion 5b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are separated from each other by a predetermined distance toward the outside. Is placed.
  • the valley portion 7b of the other cushion material 1 is located on the back surface of the mountain portion 5a of one cushion material 1, and the mountain portion 7a of the other cushion material 1 is located on the back surface of the valley portion 7a of the other cushion material 1.
  • the portion 5b is located.
  • FIG. 10 is a sectional view taken along line FF of FIG. 8B.
  • the adhesive layer 17a and the adhesive layer 17b of each cushion material 1 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. That is, the linear patterns 11 (adhesive surfaces or fusion surfaces) arranged between the peaks and valleys of the cushion material 1 constituting the laminated structure 40 are arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane. Will be done. In this way, by overlapping the forming surfaces of the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material 1 with each other, the linear patterns 11 can be formed so as to be lined up on substantially the same plane.
  • the appearance of the adhesive layers 17a and 17b (adhesive surface or fused surface) arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane with respect to the apparent total area of the plane including the adhesive surface.
  • the total occupancy rate of is preferably 80% or more, and more preferably 90% or more.
  • the adhesive layers 17a and 17b can be arranged on the same plane over substantially the entire surface. Therefore, when the adhesive layers 17a and 17b are provided with functionality such as vibration damping property and flame retardancy, the function can be exhibited on substantially the entire surface of the laminated structure 40. In this way, a functional plane can be formed by the adhesive surface or the fusion surface arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane.
  • such a laminated structure in which cushioning materials are laminated is suitable as, for example, a partition material for an evacuation center or a shock absorbing wall panel material.
  • a laminated structure of corrugated concavo-convex structure is arranged on the outer surface, and when functionality is used, the corrugated concavo-convex structure is arranged so as to face each other to impart functionality. Arrange the surface in a substantially straight line.
  • a laminated structure having a wavy uneven structure is arranged on the outer surface, it can be used as it is, but a dedicated stand may be provided. In this case, it is desirable that the two cushioning materials are fixed by using a hook-and-loop fastener or the like on the side surface of the end portion of the cushioning material.
  • the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.
  • a laminated structure can be used as a counter or wall panel material at a disaster prevention site.
  • the conventional corrugated cardboard mats and partitioning materials are provided with functionality such as heat insulation, cushioning, and moisture resistance, which has forced evacuation life at the evacuation site. It is possible to provide the victims with a clean and comfortable living environment as much as possible.
  • the positions where the periodic linear pattern 11 appearing on the corrugated surface is formed are substantially matched.
  • the linear pattern 11 adheresive surface or fusion surface
  • the linear pattern 11 is formed so as to penetrate the inside of the combined resin foams 15a and 15b and be arranged in a substantially planar shape.
  • the adhesive layer (or fusion layer) constituting the linear pattern 11 in addition to design and cushioning properties, quietness and vibration damping properties are imparted. It becomes possible to do.
  • the resin foams 15a and 15b sandwiching the resin foams 15a and 15b can also be provided with deodorant property, antibacterial property, antiviral property and the like.
  • the thickness of the laminated structure is about twice the thickness of the cushion material, so when used as a partition material for partitions, etc., the assembly independence should be improved. Can be done. Further, it goes without saying that there is no problem in assembly independence even when the wavy uneven structure is arranged on the outer surface.
  • FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cushion material 1c.
  • the cushion material 1c has substantially the same configuration as the cushion material 1, but differs in that the cushion material 1c is composed of a plurality of colors.
  • the surface 3 of the cushion material 1c has a mountain portion 5 formed by the resin foam 15b above the linear pattern 11, a linear pattern forming portion 13 on which the linear pattern 11 is formed, and a line. It is divided into three portions with a valley portion 7 formed by the resin foam 15a below the pattern 11. In the present embodiment, at least one or two portions of the peak portion 5, the linear pattern forming portion 13 and the valley portion 7 are formed in a color different from that of the other portions.
  • the linear pattern forming portion 13 is colored differently from the peaks 5 and the valleys 7, or only the linear pattern forming portion 13 is colored, so that the linear pattern forming portion 13 is colored differently from other portions. It is also possible to form the linear pattern 11. Further, by coloring either the mountain portion 5 or the valley portion 7 of the wavy uneven structure in a different color, a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in which either the mountain portion 5 or the valley portion 7 is colored is formed. can do.
  • the linear pattern 11 when the linear pattern 11 is formed by the fusion layer, when the surface of the resin foam forming the fusion layer crystallizes in the process of solidification after melting, the degree of crystallinity and the change in molecular orientation, in addition to this, different colors may be formed by superimposing the residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface.
  • one of the fused surfaces of the resin foam to be fused may be fused using a resin foam coated with a different color. Even in this way, the linear pattern forming portion 13 can be colored in a color different from that of the peak portion 5 and the valley portion 7.
  • the adhesive layer formed by using the colored adhesive may be obtained by adding a pigment to the adhesive forming the adhesive layer. Even in this way, the linear pattern forming portion 13 can be colored in a color different from that of the peak portion 5 and the valley portion 7.
  • resin foams 15a and resin foams 15b of different colors may be used. As shown in FIG. 6A, the resin foams 15a and the resin foams 15b of different colors are bonded to each other to form a laminated resin foam 39, and profile processing is performed to change the color of the peak 5 or the valley 7 to another. It can be different from the color of the part. That is, in addition to the two-dimensional pattern of the linear pattern forming portion 13, both the peak portion 5 and the valley portion 7 of the wavy uneven structure are colored in different colors, so that the linear pattern forming portion 13 , Each of the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7 can form a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern colored in different colors.
  • FIG. 12A is a plan view of the cushion material 1d
  • FIG. 12B is a side view of the cushion material 1d.
  • the cushion material 1d has substantially the same structure as the cushion material 1c, but differs from the cushion material 1c in that the area of the mountain portion surrounded by the linear pattern 11 is formed to be small.
  • the surface 3 of the cushion material 1d includes a mountain portion 5 formed by the resin foam 15b above the linear pattern 11 and a linear pattern forming portion 13 on which the linear pattern 11 is formed. , It is divided into three portions with a valley portion 7 formed by the resin foam 15a below the linear pattern 11.
  • the cushion material 1d is similar to the cushion material 1c in that at least one or two portions of the peak portion 5, the linear pattern forming portion 13 and the valley portion 7 are formed in a color different from that of the other portions.
  • the cushion material 1d when the slice position at the time of profile processing shown in FIG. 6B is offset upward, or when the resin foam 15a and the resin foam 15b form the laminated resin foam 39, the upper side is formed.
  • the thickness of the resin foam 15b thicker than that of the lower resin foam 15a, the area of the mountain portion surrounded by the linear pattern 11 can be made smaller. As a result, a cushion material as shown in FIG. 12B can be obtained.
  • the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained. Further, by making at least a part of the mountain portion 5, the valley portion 7, and the linear pattern 11 a color different from other portions, higher designability can be obtained. In particular, higher design can be obtained by changing the colors of the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7 and the mutual area ratio.
  • the formation height of the linear pattern 11 is an arbitrary height within the wavy uneven structure. It is possible to form in. For example, by forming the linear pattern 11 on the mountain portion 5 side from the center of the height of the wavy uneven structure, it is possible to form the linear pattern 11 or the colored mountain portion 5 in a smaller pattern. is there. Further, by forming the linear pattern 11 on the valley portion 7 side from the center of the height of the wavy uneven structure, it is possible to form a large pattern of the linear pattern 11 or the colored mountain portion 5. .. In this way, the design can be changed by changing the colored areas of the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a shelter section 50. This will explain the structure of the partition for the shelter.
  • the laminated body 1a is substantially rectangular in which the length of the long side is twice the length of the short side.
  • the shelter compartment 50 is composed of a plurality of laminated bodies 1a, and has a floor portion 52 (disaster mat material) and a wall portion 54 (partition side wall for division). Two laminated bodies 1a are arranged on the floor 52 with a disaster mat that can also be used as a bed on the floor so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are brought into contact with each other to form a substantially square section.
  • the laminated body 1a erected in the short side direction, the long side of the laminated body 1a is placed on the floor surface so as to surround the outer circumference of the floor portion 52 formed of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material.
  • the laminate 1a is connected and fixed by connecting the vicinity of the end of the short side of the flat surface on the back surface of the laminate 1a and the side end surfaces on the short side at substantially right angles to each other by repeating the process a plurality of times.
  • It is a connection structure in which a wall portion 54 is formed, and is a connection structure including at least a section in which a U-shaped side wall having a substantially square opening is formed.
  • a hook-and-loop fastener is used as the fixing means used to form the connection structure of the partition for the shelter, but a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to a tape-shaped member can be used instead of the hook-and-loop fastener.
  • the fixing means is attached to the vicinity of the end portion of the short side of the laminated body 1a and at predetermined positions on the side surface of the end portion.
  • the fixing means since the fixing means is attached to the laminate, the laminates face each other and come into contact with each other without requiring a separate fixing component.
  • the biggest feature is that a partition for partitioning can be formed by fitting.
  • the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive
  • the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive.
  • the side surface of the end on the short side of the disaster mat is oriented in either a direction substantially parallel to the plan view or a direction substantially perpendicular to the adjacent mountain portion of the profile processing surface and the curve passing through the mountain portion. , Cut in a substantially straight line at a position (1/4) pitch-shifted from the top of the mountain or the top of the valley. As a result, a substantially rectangular cut surface can be obtained as the cut surface on the side surface of the end on the short side.
  • the fixing means By fixing the fixing means to the side surface of the end having such a flat substantially long cross section, the fixing means can be fixed efficiently, and there is no need to process a tape-shaped fixing means such as a hook-and-loop fastener. become.
  • the connection structure of the evacuation center section may use a cushion material instead of the laminated body.
  • the cushion material 1 to which the sheet-like foam is attached to the back surface may be used instead of the laminate 1a as the partition material for the section.
  • the cushion material 1 has a height (Hv) from the flat surface of the cushion material 1 to the valley portion and a height (Hc) from the flat surface of the cushion material 1 to the center line height (Hc) of the valley portion 7a and the mountain portion 5a. It is desirable to secure a ratio R of 50% or more.
  • the profile is replaced with the laminate 1a having a large number of annular linear patterns between the peaks and valleys. Even if a laminated body without a linear pattern is used on the processed surface, the connection structure of the evacuation center section using the laminated body that can be easily assembled and disassembled without using tools or special parts, and the evacuation center using the laminated body. A method of forming a section, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation center section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation center section can be obtained.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a shelter section 50.
  • the shelter compartment 50 is composed of a plurality of laminated bodies 1a, and has a floor portion 52 (disaster mat material) and a wall portion 54 (partition side wall for division).
  • the laminated body 1a can be obtained by laminating another sheet-shaped resin foam on a surface opposite to the surface of the cushion material 1 having a corrugated uneven structure and adhering or fusing it.
  • the laminate 1a used in the structure of the evacuation center section 50 is, for example, a substantially rectangular resin foam sheet having a long side length of 1800 mm ⁇ a short side length of 880 mm ⁇ a thickness of 30 mm (average thickness is 25 mm). That is, the laminated body 1a is substantially rectangular in which the length of the long side is twice the length of the short side. A wavy uneven structure having a linear pattern is formed on one surface of the laminated body 1a, and a flat surface is formed on the other surface. For the laminate 1a, a resin foam having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times is used.
  • the weight of the laminate is about 1.25 kg. Even if the foaming ratio is 20 times, it is about 1.9 kg, which is 2 kg or less. Further, although the average thickness is allowed up to 50 mm, it is preferable that the thickness of the laminated body is thin, and 40 mm or less is sufficient, considering the storability in normal times other than in the event of a disaster. Therefore, the weight of the laminated body is 5 kg or less at the maximum and does not exceed 4 kg.
  • the floor 52 of the evacuation center section 50 is formed.
  • the floor portion 52 can be formed on the floor surface.
  • a substantially square floor portion 52 is formed, and a floor portion 52 having an area of about 2 tatami mats is formed. That is, the laminated body 1a is arranged on the floor surface as a disaster mat that can also be used for a bed so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are brought into contact with each other to form a substantially square section.
  • the laminated body 1a forms a floor portion 52 having cushioning properties and excellent moisture-proof and heat-insulating properties.
  • a wall portion 54 for dividing the division is formed with respect to the floor portion 52 of the evacuation center division 50.
  • the wall portion 54 is arranged so as to surround three sides of a substantially square-shaped region having an area of about 2 tatami mats formed by the two laminated bodies 1a. That is, in a state where the laminated body 1a is erected in the short side direction, the long side of the laminated body 1a is covered with the disaster so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat that can be used as a bed as a substantially square floor material. As a contact surface with the mat, the ends of the short sides are connected to each other at a substantially right angle.
  • the laminated body 1a is erected on the floor portion 52 so that the long side of the laminated body 1a is in contact with the floor portion 52 having a substantially square shape.
  • a substantially U-shaped wall portion 54 in which one of the substantially square sections is open. it can.
  • partitioned which is an evacuation center section, which is one section of the evacuation center. 50 can be formed.
  • the side surface of the end on the short side of the disaster mat is oriented in either a direction substantially parallel to the plan view or a direction substantially perpendicular to the adjacent mountain portion of the profile processing surface and the curve passing through the mountain portion.
  • a substantially rectangular cut surface can be obtained as the cut surface on the side surface of the end on the short side.
  • the notated square-shaped section obtained in this way which is surrounded by the laminated body 1a on three sides, is used as the basic section, and the first section is formed.
  • a substantially square second section is formed adjacent to the first section. More specifically, the floor portion 52 of the second compartment is formed consecutively from the floor portion 52 of the first compartment in the same manner as the first compartment. That is, adjacent to the disaster mat that can also be used as the floor material of the first compartment, the bed as the floor material of the second compartment having a substantially square shape and the same size using the laminated body 1a. Form a disaster mat that can also be used.
  • a U-shaped wall portion 54 that opens in the direction opposite to the first section is arranged to form a second section.
  • the laminated body 1a is continuously opened in the direction opposite to the first section in succession with the first section formed in a U shape, and shares a U-shaped end piece.
  • the U-shaped side wall as the second compartment, at least two U-shaped compartments can be formed.
  • the portion 54 can be arranged to form a third compartment. That is, the openings of the substantially square compartments are sequentially formed in a U shape so as to open in the opposite directions, and the side wall portions of the compartments are sequentially and repeatedly formed, and corresponding to the side wall portions, substantially A large number of compartments can be formed by repeatedly forming a disaster mat that can also be used as a bed as a square floor material.
  • a substantially square floor portion 52 is formed, and the long sides of the laminated body 1a are brought into contact with each other on the floor portion 52 to form the wall portion 54, thereby forming a substantially U-shaped section. be able to.
  • at least two or three substantially square-shaped sections are formed by forming a continuous U-shaped wall portion 54 between adjacent sections so as to open in opposite directions to form a partition for the section.
  • the including shelter compartment 50 can be formed.
  • a plurality of substantially square floor portions 52 are formed so as to be adjacent to each other, and a U-shaped wall portion 54 is formed so that the opening directions of the adjacent floor portions 52 are opposite to each other. This may be repeated sequentially. By doing so, it is possible to form a shelter compartment 50 in which a large number of compartments are continuously arranged.
  • the flat surface of the laminated body 1a may be arranged toward the floor surface. That is, as the floor material, either the flat surface of the laminated body 1a or the corrugated uneven structure surface may be arranged toward the floor surface. Further, the U-shaped wall portion 54 formed by the laminated body 1a may be arranged so that the flat surface on the opposite side to the wave-shaped uneven structure surface which is the pattern forming surface of the laminated body 1a is alternately arranged. .. For example, with respect to the side wall portion arranged in a U shape formed by the laminated body 1a, a wavy uneven structure surface which is a pattern forming surface of the laminated body 1a of the laminated body 1a is formed along each side of the partition.
  • the shelter compartment 50 may be formed by alternately arranging them in the order of outer, inner, and outer, or by arranging them alternately in the order of inner, outer, and inner. With such an arrangement, the design of the criticized place can be enhanced. At the same time, it can be excellent in soundproofing, moistureproofing and heat insulating properties. Therefore, the evacuation center user can spend comfortably in the predetermined section. As described above, when forming the section, the direction of the corrugated uneven structure surface may be appropriately selected in consideration of the design, which direction should be directed along each side of the section.
  • the laminated bodies 1a when assembling the laminated body 1a as a partition for partitioning, may be connected to each other by a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections attached to the surface of the laminated body 1a are formed.
  • the evacuation shelter section 50 can be easily assembled by simply connecting the laminated bodies 1a to each other with a hook-and-loop fastener.
  • the laminated body 1a is as light as about 1.5 kg per sheet, it is also excellent in transportability during assembly.
  • the laminated body 1a for the evacuation center section 50 is formed by laminating another sheet-shaped resin foam on the surface opposite to the wavy uneven structure of one cushion material 1 having a pattern on the surface. Therefore, it is also excellent in assembly independence when used as a wall portion 54.
  • excellent assembly independence means that the laminated bodies 1a are connected to each other when the laminated bodies 1a are fixed to each other by, for example, a hook-and-loop fastener, in order to form a shelter section 50 by the laminated body 1a. Since the center of gravity of the laminated body 1a is stable even on the opposite end surface other than the portion fixed by the hook-and-loop fastener, the upper part of the short side of the erected laminated body 1a is assembled in a self-supporting manner without tilting or bending. Is possible.
  • the end portion of the flat surface of one laminated body 1a in the width direction and the end surface of the other laminated body 1a are brought into contact with each other and connected by a hook-and-loop fastener.
  • the hook-and-loop fastener is attached to a predetermined position from the upper end to the lower end in the long side direction of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, or from the upper side to the lower predetermined position of the portion corresponding to the flat portion of the end surface of the laminated body. Will be done. More specifically, it is desirable that the hook-and-loop fasteners be attached to at least three places in the height direction: upper part, middle part, and lower part.
  • a hook-and-loop fastener is attached to one of the laminated bodies 1a at predetermined positions of the upper end portion, the middle portion and the lower end portion in the width direction of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, and above the end surface of the other laminated body 1a. , Attach the hook-and-loop fastener to the middle part and the lower part at the predetermined position.
  • the fixing positions of the fixing means such as the hook-and-loop fastener may be arranged as described above, but may be evenly arranged from the upper end portion to the lower end portion, as long as the laminated bodies can be stably connected and supported. There is no particular problem.
  • the surface fasteners attached to the flat surface of one laminate 1a and the other laminate 1a correspond to each other, the surface fasteners attached to the flat surface of one laminate 1a and the other laminate 1a
  • the laminated bodies 1a can be connected to each other by facing each other with the hook-and-loop fasteners attached to the end faces. In this way, the surface fasteners attached to the predetermined positions on the flat surface and the surface fasteners attached to the end surfaces are opposed to each other to connect the two.
  • the laminated body 1a having excellent assembly independence is used, unnecessary gaps are not generated in the assembled partition for partitioning, and the assembling property is also excellent.
  • the fixing means used for forming the partition for the shelter a hook-and-loop fastener has been described, but a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member can be used instead of the hook-and-loop fastener. ..
  • the effect is the same as in the case of the connection structure of the partition for the shelter.
  • the surface fastener the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to.
  • the laminated body 1a having excellent assembly independence includes the height (Hv) from the flat surface of the laminated body 1a to the valley portion 7a and the valley portion 7a and the mountain portion from the flat surface of the laminated body 1a. It is desirable that the ratio of the height to the center line height (Hc) of 5a is 50% or more. More preferably, it is 60% or more.
  • the cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure having a linear pattern formed on the surface may be used as the partition material for the section.
  • the height (Hv) from the flat surface to the valley portion of the cushion material 1 and the valley portion 7a and the mountain portion 5a from the flat surface of the cushion material 1 Similarly, it is desirable that the ratio of the height to the center line height (Hc) is 50% or more.
  • FIGS. 14A to 14C show the cutting position of the laminated body and the cut surface.
  • the relationship between the shapes of the cross sections of the side surfaces of the ends is shown.
  • FIG. 14A shows the cutting position as seen from the profiled surface of the laminate.
  • FIG. 14B shows a cut surface (cut surface 71 connecting the tops of the peaks) when cut on a curve that alternately passes through the tops of the peaks and the bottoms of the valleys.
  • FIG. 14C shows a cut surface (cut surface 70 connecting the inflection points) when the inflection point positions separated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain portion and the bottom of the valley portion are cut so as to linearly connect them. ..
  • the unevenness of the cut surface becomes the largest as shown in FIG. 14B.
  • the cross-sectional area of the parallel portion of the end face of the laminated body is the smallest.
  • a cut surface having a substantially long shape with the least unevenness of the cut surface can be obtained, and the cross-sectional area of the parallel portion of the end surface of the laminated body becomes the largest.
  • the unevenness of the cut surface is the smallest, a substantially long cut surface is obtained, and the cross-sectional area of the parallel portion of the end surface of the laminated body is the largest. growing.
  • the inflection point of the curve from the apex of the mountain portion to the bottom of the valley portion of the adhesive layer or the fusion layer and the profile processed surface which is the boundary between the resin foam 15a and the resin foam 15b forming the peak and the valley.
  • a linear pattern of a predetermined length is formed periodically at the upper end of the cut substantially parallel cross section.
  • the linear pattern does not appear on the cut surface.
  • the line connecting the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is not curved but straight, connect the intermediate position between the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley or the intermediate position between the bottom of the valley and the top of the valley.
  • mountainous valleys of this profiled surface have the same periodic structure in the directions orthogonal to each other, from the tops of the mountainous portions in either of the two orthogonal directions, which are substantially parallel to the plan view or substantially perpendicular to each other. It is possible to cut in a substantially straight line so as to connect the positions of the turning points in the middle to the bottom of the valley or in the middle from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain.
  • an inflection point position is located from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top on the profile machined surface, or from the valley bottom to the valley. Assuming that the distance to the bottom is 1 pitch, it is understood from the drawing showing the cutting position in FIG.
  • the area of the flat portion to which the fixing means is attached differs depending on the cutting position of the laminated body. Therefore, if the cross section having the largest parallel portion area on the side end surface is selected and that portion is used as the cutting portion, the area to which the fixing means such as the surface fastener is attached can be maximized. Cut so as to connect the position shifted by (1/4) pitch from the line connecting the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley, and the bottom of the valley and the top of the mountain, that is, the inflection point position of the curve connecting the mountain and the valley.
  • the side end face can be formed in a substantially rectangular shape having the largest parallel portion area on the side end face by reducing the narrow portion of the width of the side end face, which is a periodic uneven structure of the cut side end face.
  • the width of the tape-shaped member of the fixing means to be bonded to the side end surface can be maximized, and therefore a strong connection structure can be obtained.
  • FIG. 15A and 15B are views showing a storage state of the shelter section 50 formed by the method described above, FIG. 15A is a front view, and FIG. 15B is a plan view.
  • the evacuation center section 50 is stored, the end face of the laminated body 1a is fixed and stored on the wall surface 51.
  • the laminated body 1a forming the evacuation center section 50 is disassembled. After disassembling the laminated body 1a, one laminated body 1a is fixed to the wall surface 51 by arranging the flat surface toward the wall surface 51. At this time, as the fixing means used for fixing, there are other fixing means, but here, the case of the hook-and-loop fastener 53 will be described.
  • the hook-and-loop fasteners 53d are arranged at predetermined positions on both sides of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, and the hook-and-loop fasteners 53c are arranged at positions on the wall surface 51 corresponding to the arrangement positions of the hook-and-loop fasteners 53d.
  • the laminated body 1a can be fixed to the wall surface 51 by the surface fasteners 53c and 53d. That is, by bringing the surface fastener 53d of the first laminated body 1a into contact with the surface fastener 53d of the wall surface 51, the laminated body 1a is erected and fixed to the wall surface 51.
  • the corrugated concave-convex structure surface of the back surface of the flat surface of the laminate 1a erected and fixed to the wall surface 51 is superposed on the corrugated concave-convex structure surface of the second laminate 1a, and the first laminate is formed.
  • the end faces of 1a are aligned to form a stack of two sheets.
  • the third and fourth laminated bodies 1a which are new laminated bodies 1a, are subjected to the flat surface, which is the respective laminated surface, and the wavy uneven structure surface, which is the first and second laminated body 1a.
  • Each laminated surface and end surface are aligned and erected in the same order as in the case of. That is, the flat surfaces and the wavy concave-convex structure surfaces are sequentially opposed to each other, and the end surfaces of the respective end surfaces are aligned and erected repeatedly.
  • the laminated body 1a is stacked in the same procedure.
  • the final stacking surface is a flat surface
  • the outermost surface is a wavy uneven structure surface
  • the number of stacked sheets is an even number.
  • the final stacking surface is a wavy uneven structure surface
  • the outermost surface is a flat surface.
  • the surface fastener 53c is attached to a predetermined position on the end surface of the laminated body 1a. Therefore, by arranging another surface fastener 53b having a length corresponding to the total thickness of the laminated layers 1a so as to straddle the surface fastener 53a on the end surface of each of the erected laminated bodies 1a, all the layers are laminated. The end faces of the body 1a can be fixed together.
  • the fixing means used for the method of disassembling and storing the shelter compartment of the partition for the shelter the surface fastener has been described, but the button-shaped fastener or the magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member is used as the surface fastener. It can be used instead.
  • the partition for the shelter can be easily disassembled and stored by using a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member as the fixing means.
  • the surface fastener the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to.
  • the fixing means used for the method of disassembling and storing the shelter section of the partition for the shelter section is the same as the fixing means used for assembling the laminate used for assembling the shelter section.
  • the laminated body 1a used in the evacuation center section 50 can be disassembled and stored.
  • the surface of the wavy uneven structure in which the linear pattern is formed on the surface of the laminated body 1a is arranged so as to be the outermost surface, and can be stored compactly.
  • the end face shape of the laminated body 1a is used by assembling the evacuation center section 50, the end face of the laminated body 1a to be attached and fixed at the time of assembly has a mountain portion and a mountain portion adjacent to the profile processed surface as described above.
  • the cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure having a linear pattern formed on the surface may be used instead of the laminated body 1a.
  • FIG. 16A and 16B are views showing the impact absorbing wall panel 60 of the evacuation center section
  • FIG. 16A is a front view
  • FIG. 16B is a plan view
  • FIG. 16C is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the hook-and-loop fasteners 53c and 53d of FIG. 16B.
  • the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel 60 is as follows. First, as described above, the shelter compartment 50 formed in the method of forming the shelter compartment using the laminated body 1a is disassembled. Here, as in the case described above, the surface fastener will be used as the fixing means.
  • the flat surface of the disassembled laminated body 1a is arranged toward the wall surface 51.
  • the surface fasteners 53d are arranged at predetermined positions on both sides of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, and the surface fasteners 53c are arranged at predetermined positions on the wall surface 51 corresponding to the arrangement positions of the surface fasteners 53d. That is, when the short side of the laminated body 1a is continuously arranged as an upright surface parallel to the wall surface 51, the surface fastener is placed at a predetermined position on the wall surface 51 in accordance with the arrangement position of the surface fastener 53d on the flat surface of the laminated body 1a. 53c is arranged. Therefore, the laminated body 1a can be fixed to the wall surface 51 with the uneven surface facing the indoor side by the surface fasteners 53c and 53d.
  • the flat surface of the other laminated body 1a is directed toward the wall surface 51, and the corrugated uneven structure surface is arranged toward the indoor side so as to be continuous with the initially fixed laminated body 1a, and the predetermined position of the wall surface 51 is arranged. It is fixed to the wall surface 51 by the surface fastener 53c arranged in. Further, by fixing the laminated body 1a to the wall surface 51 one after another so as to be continuous with the laminated body 1a fixed to the wall surface 51 immediately before, the shock absorbing wall panel 60 of the evacuation shelter section can be formed.
  • the uneven surface of the laminated body 1a is fixed to the wall surface 51 toward the indoor side when it is not used as the floor portion 52 or the wall portion 54 of the evacuation center section 50 or as a tsuitate.
  • a shock absorbing wall panel 60 having a predetermined size and excellent design can be formed on the wall surface 51.
  • the laminated body 1a instead of the laminated body 1a, a cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface may be used. Even in this case, the cushioning material 1 constituting the evacuation center section 50 can be disassembled to form the shock absorbing wall panel 60.
  • the laminated body 1a can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a partition side wall for a shelter or a bed in the event of a disaster, and is usually used as a wall panel material for shock absorption. It is possible to do.
  • the fixing means used for the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation shelter section the surface fastener has been described, but a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member is used instead of the surface fastener. Can be done.
  • the same fixing means can be used as the fixing means.
  • the fixing means used for the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation center section is the same as the fixing means used for assembling the laminate used for assembling the evacuation center section.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an explanatory view of an assembly independence test of a partition partition
  • FIG. 18A is a diagram showing the dimensions of each part of the laminate 1a used for evaluating the assembly independence of the partition.
  • the evaluation of the independence during the assembly work is performed by imitating the partition for the side wall section, that is, the long side length direction (I in the figure) 1800 mm ⁇ height direction (J: short side direction) 880 mm of the laminated body 1a.
  • a laminated body 1a', 1a'' was prepared.
  • the two laminated bodies 1a ′ and 1a'' that were cut were arranged so as to be orthogonal to each other so that the lengthwise portions of the two laminated bodies 1a ′ and 1a ′′ were laid horizontally and in contact with the floor surface, respectively. ..
  • the end portion of the flat surface of one laminate 1a ′′ in the length direction and the side end surface of the other laminate 1a ′′ in the length direction were connected to each other by a hook-and-loop fastener.
  • the laminated bodies 1a'and 1a' are connected at three positions in the height direction, with the upper surface fastener attaching portion 61a, the intermediate surface fastener attaching portion 61b, and the lower surface fastener attaching portion 61c. , Both were connected. That is, on one of the laminated bodies 1a', surface fasteners are attached to the upper, middle and lower portions of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a'in the length direction, respectively. Further, a hook-and-loop fastener is attached to the other laminated body 1a ′′ at predetermined positions above, in the middle, and below in the height direction, which is the side end surface of the laminated body 1a ′′ in the length direction.
  • the laminate By connecting the surface fasteners attached to the flat surface of one laminate 1a'and the surface fasteners attached to the side end surfaces of the other laminate 1a'' so as to face each other, the laminate can be formed. It is possible to create a connection structure that is connected orthogonally to each other. The assembly independence was evaluated using the connection structure of this laminated body.
  • the laminated body is cut in a straight line at a position that is (1/4) pitch-shifted substantially parallel to the plan view from the position where the surface unevenness is the largest, which is a curve connecting the peaks of the profiled surface of the laminated body. Since it was used, it is possible to obtain a substantially parallel cut surface corresponding to the sheet thickness before profile processing on the side end surface of the laminated body.
  • the average thickness of the laminate used in the examples is 20 mm to 30 mm. Since the laminate used in the examples was cut so as to obtain a substantially parallel cut surface having a thickness corresponding to the average thickness of the laminate, a hook-and-loop fastener having a size of 150 mm ⁇ 20 mm could be used on the end surface of the laminate without any problem. It can be pasted, and the bearing capacity of the hook-and-loop fastener can be effectively used.
  • the laminate 1a used in the test was formed by slicing with a profile processing machine using a polyethylene foam sheet having a foaming ratio of 40 times. At this time, in order to evaluate the influence of the dimensional shape of the wavy uneven structure on the surface of the laminated body on the assembly independence, the wavy uneven structure portion such as the flat portion in the thickness direction and the mountain part valley portion of the laminated body is evaluated. Laminates of various dimensions and shapes were prepared in which the ratio of the thickness to the total thickness was different. It has a wavy uneven structure obtained in this way, a periodic linear pattern is formed on the front surface, and a laminated body in which a sheet-like resin foam is laminated on the back surface is used as a test material for assembly independence. Evaluation was performed. The results of the evaluation of assembly independence are shown in Tables 1 and 2.
  • the height (Hm) from the flat surface to the mountain portion corresponds to the sheet thickness (maximum thickness) of the laminated body as shown in FIG. 18A.
  • the height from the flat surface to the ridge (Hm) corresponds to the sum of the thickness of the sheet-like foam and the height of the cushioning material to the ridge.
  • the height (Hv) from the flat surface to the valley portion corresponds to the thickness (minimum thickness) of the laminated body at the bottom of the valley portion 7a as shown in FIG. 18A.
  • the height from the flat surface to the valley (Hv) corresponds to the sum of the thickness of the sheet-like foam and the height of the cushion material to the valley. Further, as shown in FIG.
  • the wave-shaped processing height (half-value width of the uneven structure) in Tables 1 and 2 corresponds to (Hm-Hv) / 2.
  • the relationship between assembly independence and R was evaluated for the following test materials, where R was used as a percentage of the ratio of heights up to.
  • the test materials 1 to 4 have a case where the R value is changed from 44% to 62% by changing the wave shape processing height while keeping the mountain portion height of the laminated body constant at 40 mm. Shown.
  • test materials 5 to 8 test materials 9 to 11, and test materials 12 to 15
  • the average thickness of the laminated body is kept constant at 30 mm, 25 mm, and 20 mm, respectively, and the corrugated processing height (half width of the uneven structure).
  • “not enough” is the one that is slightly deformed
  • "good” is the one that has no problem in assembly independence, and the decrease in assembly independence is prevented even after long-term storage. Those that could be evaluated were evaluated as "excellent”.
  • the R of the test material 1, the test material 5, and the test material 12 in the test material 1 to the test material 15 in which the wave shape processing height is variously changed in the range of the average height of the above laminated body of 20 mm to 30 mm is 50% or less.
  • R is 50% or more
  • a laminated body having excellent assembly independence could be obtained without such slight bending or bending.
  • I was able to confirm that.
  • R is 60% or more. It is desirable to have.
  • a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to a tape-shaped member may be attached to the laminate instead of the hook-and-loop fastener. Similar confirmations were made using button fasteners and magnets as fixing means, but similar results were obtained in this case as well.
  • the reason for this is thought to be as follows.
  • the cross-sectional area of the mountain region above the center line K and the cross-sectional area of the valley region below the center line K are equivalent.
  • the mountain portion 5a is shifted to the valley portion 7a side and inverted, and a fictitious sheet-like foam having a thickness of the center line height (Hc) of the wavy uneven structure surface from the flat surface which is the back surface of the laminated body.
  • Hc center line height
  • the sheet-like foam provided on the back surface is more than the cushion material 1.
  • a hard resin foam may be used. Even in this case, the position of the center of gravity of the laminated body is slightly moved toward the hard sheet-like foam side, so that the assembly independence is further improved. Therefore, a more stable state can be obtained if at least the same relationship as when the laminate is made of the same material is satisfied.
  • the cushion material 1 may be used instead of the laminated body 1a. Also in this case, as the cushion material 1, the percentage display R of the ratio of both the height Hv from the flat surface to the valley and the center line height Hc of the wavy uneven structure surface from the flat surface on the back surface of the cushion material 1. However, if the cushion material 1 satisfying the relationship of 50% or more is used, the same assembly independence as the laminated body 1a can be obtained even if the cushion material is not provided with the sheet-like foam on the back surface.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Civil Engineering (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Mattresses And Other Support Structures For Chairs And Beds (AREA)
  • Buffer Packaging (AREA)

Abstract

According to the present invention, peak sections 5 and valley sections 7 are formed on one surface (front surface 3) in a cushion material 1. The peak sections 5 and the valley sections 7 are periodically arranged alternately in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, the peak sections 5 and the valley sections 7 are not formed on the other surface (rear surface 5) of the cushion material 1 and the other surface is flat. The cushion material 1 is provided with resin foams 15a, 15b and an adhesive layer 17 formed on a lamination surface of the resin foams 15a, 15b. The adhesive layer 17 formed approximately parallel to the rear surface 9 is exposed in a predetermined-height portion of the surface 3 having a wave-like surface relief structure. The adhesive layer 17 forms a plurality of linear patterns 11 when viewed in a plan view.

Description

クッション材、クッション材の製造方法、積層体、積層体の製造方法、クッション材の使用方法、避難所区画の接続構造、避難所の区画の形成方法、避難所区画の分解収納方法、及び避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法Cushion material, manufacturing method of cushion material, laminate, manufacturing method of laminate, usage of cushion material, connection structure of shelter compartment, formation method of shelter compartment, disassembly and storage method of shelter compartment, and shelter How to form a shock absorbing wall panel
 本発明は、マット材やパーテーション材などに使用することが可能なポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体からなる波形状の凹凸構造面に融着層または接着層を露出させることで線状模様を有する軽量で意匠性に優れるクッション材、これを用いた積層体、クッション材及び積層体の製造方法、クッション材の使用方法、さらに、組立工具や組立部品を使用せずに簡単に組立が可能な積層体を用いた避難所区画の接続構造、積層体を用いた避難所区画の形成方法、避難所区画の分解収納方法、及び避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法に関するものである。 The present invention is lightweight and has a linear pattern by exposing a fusion layer or an adhesive layer on a wavy uneven structure surface made of a polyolefin resin foam that can be used as a mat material or partition material. An excellent cushion material, a laminate using this, a method for manufacturing the cushion material and the laminate, a method for using the cushion material, and a laminate that can be easily assembled without using an assembly tool or an assembly part are used. The present invention relates to a connection structure of evacuation shelters, a method of forming an evacuation shelter section using a laminate, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation shelter section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation shelter.
 従来、樹脂発泡体を用いたクッション材は、包装材料やマット等に使用されている。例えば、このような樹脂発泡体を用いたクッション材には、表面に山谷の凹凸形状が形成されたものが使用されている。 Conventionally, cushioning materials using resin foam have been used as packaging materials, mats, and the like. For example, as a cushioning material using such a resin foam, a cushioning material having a mountain valley uneven shape formed on the surface is used.
 このような、クッション材としては、例えば、緩衝材、建材、断熱材、消音材等各種産業用品の素材として、或いは、日用品雑貨、スポーツレジャー用品等各種家庭用品、スポーツ用品の素材として汎用されている、表皮付き凹凸面を有する熱可塑性樹脂発泡シートがある(特許文献1)。 Such cushioning materials are widely used, for example, as materials for various industrial products such as cushioning materials, building materials, heat insulating materials, and sound deadening materials, or as materials for various household products such as daily necessities, sports and leisure products, and sports products. There is a thermoplastic resin foam sheet having an uneven surface with a skin (Patent Document 1).
 特許文献1の熱可塑性樹脂発泡シートの製造方法は、まず、均一な厚みを持つ帯状の熱可塑性樹脂発泡シートの上下方向中程を凹凸状に切断して上下2層に分割するか、もしくは均一な厚みを持つ帯状の熱可塑性樹脂発泡シートを凹凸状に保持し、その上下方向中程を水平状に切断して上下2層に分割する。これにより片面に凹凸面を有する発泡シートを二枚成形する。次に、該発泡シートの凹凸面に熱エネルギーを放射してその表面を溶融し冷却する。以上により、表皮付き凹凸面を有する熱可塑性樹脂発泡シートが形成される。 In the method for producing a thermoplastic resin foam sheet of Patent Document 1, first, a strip-shaped thermoplastic resin foam sheet having a uniform thickness is cut in a concave-convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction and divided into two upper and lower layers, or uniformly. A strip-shaped thermoplastic resin foam sheet having a large thickness is held in an uneven shape, and the middle part in the vertical direction is cut horizontally to divide the sheet into two upper and lower layers. As a result, two foam sheets having an uneven surface on one side are molded. Next, heat energy is radiated to the uneven surface of the foamed sheet to melt and cool the surface. As described above, a thermoplastic resin foam sheet having an uneven surface with a skin is formed.
 また、特にマンションなどの集合住宅の床材などの、各種住宅や倉庫などの床材として好適に使用することが可能な、プラスチック発泡体に硬質板を積層した防音床構造体が提案されている(特許文献2)。 Further, a soundproof floor structure in which a hard plate is laminated on a plastic foam, which can be suitably used as a floor material for various houses and warehouses, such as a floor material for an apartment house such as an apartment, has been proposed. (Patent Document 2).
 通常、コンクリートスラブ等の床基体に仕上げ材として比較的硬質な材料を使用すると、生活騒音が階下に固体音として伝わり、環境の悪化の問題となる。これらに対する防音手段としては、従来、ポリウレタンフォーム、合成繊維不織布、及びポリエチレンフォーム等各種下地材が開発され、床下地材として使用されている。 Normally, if a relatively hard material is used as a finishing material for a floor substrate such as a concrete slab, daily noise is transmitted downstairs as solid sound, which causes a problem of environmental deterioration. As soundproofing means for these, various base materials such as polyurethane foam, synthetic fiber non-woven fabric, and polyethylene foam have been conventionally developed and used as floor base materials.
 これに対して、特許文献2は、表面に谷部及び/または山部を有する発泡体からなる床下地材に、硬質板を積層させた床下地材を用いた防音床構造体である。特許文献2では、圧縮硬さが0.5~1.5kg/cm、見掛け密度が0.05~0.12g/cm、硬度が5~35のプラスチック発泡体に硬質板を積層させた床下地材を用いたもので、本願のように意匠性を付与するものではなく、さらにクッション材または積層体に本願のように発泡樹脂のみを用いたものではない。 On the other hand, Patent Document 2 is a soundproof floor structure using a floor base material in which a hard plate is laminated on a floor base material made of a foam having valleys and / or peaks on the surface. In Patent Document 2, a hard plate is laminated on a plastic foam having a compressive hardness of 0.5 to 1.5 kg / cm 2 , an apparent density of 0.05 to 0.12 g / cm 3 , and a hardness of 5 to 35. It uses a floor base material, does not impart designability as in the present application, and does not use only foamed resin as the cushion material or laminate as in the present application.
 また、マットレスや枕等のクッション材は、医療用材料等の分野に幅広く利用され、体圧分散性に優れる積層発泡体及びその製造方法が提案されている(特許文献3)。 In addition, cushioning materials such as mattresses and pillows are widely used in fields such as medical materials, and laminated foams having excellent body pressure dispersibility and methods for producing them have been proposed (Patent Document 3).
 特許文献3では、山谷面を備える高反発性発泡体と、該高反発性発泡体の山谷面に密着接合されており、且つ反発弾性率が10%以下のポリウレタン発泡体からなる低反発性発泡体とをインサート成形により高反発性発泡体に一体化することで、十分な性能を確保するものである。特許文献3は、低反発性発泡体と高反発性発泡体の山谷面を組み合わせた状態で使用し、上面の低反発性発泡体の応力を高反発性発泡体の山谷面で支持することにより応力を分散させることを目的としている。特許文献3の防音床構造体は、意匠面の線状模様により、意匠性を向上させることを目的としたものではない。 In Patent Document 3, a high-resilience foam having a mountain-valley surface and a polyurethane foam having a rebound resilience of 10% or less, which is closely bonded to the mountain-valley surface of the high-resilience foam, are low-resilience foam. Sufficient performance is ensured by integrating the body with the high-resilience foam by insert molding. Patent Document 3 is used in a state where a low-resilience foam and a high-resilience foam have mountain and valley surfaces in combination, and the stress of the low-resilience foam on the upper surface is supported by the high-resilience foam. The purpose is to disperse the stress. The soundproof floor structure of Patent Document 3 is not intended to improve the design property by the linear pattern on the design surface.
 また、特許文献4は、島状にプロファイル加工することにより多数の波形状の凹凸構造を周期的に形成して、凸部に硬さの硬い発泡材を配置するクッション材の製造方法に関する発明が提案されている。(特許文献4) Further, Patent Document 4 discloses an invention relating to a method for manufacturing a cushion material in which a large number of corrugated uneven structures are periodically formed by profile processing in an island shape, and a foam material having a high hardness is arranged in a convex portion. Proposed. (Patent Document 4)
 特許文献4は、プロファイル加工した波形状の凹凸構造の凸部の硬さを安定させるために、軟質フォームの上下に硬めの軟質フォームまたは半硬質フォームを接着した3層発泡樹脂積層体を用意して、これを上下の硬めの軟質フォームまたは半硬質フォームをまたぐようにプロファイル加工を行うことで得るものであるが、特許文献4の製造方法では、融着層または接着層を波形状の凹凸構造面に露出させて、環状の線状模様を多数形成するものではない。 Patent Document 4 prepares a three-layer foamed resin laminate in which a hard soft foam or a semi-hard foam is bonded to the upper and lower sides of the soft foam in order to stabilize the hardness of the convex portion of the profiled wavy concave-convex structure. This is obtained by profile processing so as to straddle the upper and lower hard soft foams or semi-hard foams. However, in the manufacturing method of Patent Document 4, the fusion layer or the adhesive layer has a wavy uneven structure. It is not exposed to the surface to form a large number of annular linear patterns.
 さらに、特許文献5には、プロファイル加工により、表面に幅方向に連続した波形状の凹凸構造を形成し、その波形状の凹凸構造の所定位置に所定の発泡体を配置して意匠性を向上させるフォームマットが記載されている。(特許文献5)
 また、特許文献6には、20近い部材を組み立てベッドの長さが伸縮可能でテープ等の固定具を使用せずに組立可能な段ボールベッドが開示されている。(特許文献6)
 特許文献7には、10個以上の複数の段ボールを組み立てて形成する台座と、天板とからなる段ボールベッドが開示されている。(特許文献7)
Further, in Patent Document 5, a wavy uneven structure continuous in the width direction is formed on the surface by profile processing, and a predetermined foam is arranged at a predetermined position of the wavy uneven structure to improve the design. The foam mat to be used is described. (Patent Document 5)
Further, Patent Document 6 discloses a corrugated cardboard bed in which nearly 20 members can be assembled and the length of the bed can be expanded and contracted so that the bed can be assembled without using a fixture such as tape. (Patent Document 6)
Patent Document 7 discloses a corrugated cardboard bed including a pedestal formed by assembling a plurality of corrugated cardboards of 10 or more and a top plate. (Patent Document 7)
 特許文献8には、段ボール製仕切り板を用いて避難所区画を構成する発明が開示されている。この発明では、隣接する仕切り板同士を接続するために、上部、下部の直線状部及び曲がり部に段ボール製の接続部材を使用することで組立可能な避難所区画を得ることができる。(特許文献8)
 特許文献9には、段ボールの長さ方向に沿って一定幅で折り目が設けられた段ボール板材を折り目に沿って波状に繰り返し折り曲げることで、立設性を確保した間仕切りユニット体を相互に接着テープで接合することを特徴とする避難所用間仕切り構造が開示されている。(特許文献9)
Patent Document 8 discloses an invention in which a corrugated cardboard partition plate is used to form an evacuation shelter section. In the present invention, an assembling shelter section can be obtained by using a corrugated cardboard connecting member in the straight portion and the bent portion of the upper part and the lower part in order to connect the adjacent partition plates. (Patent Document 8)
In Patent Document 9, a corrugated board plate material having creases having a constant width along the length direction of the corrugated cardboard is repeatedly bent in a wavy shape along the creases to bond partition units that ensure uprightness to each other. A partition structure for evacuation shelters, which is characterized by joining with a corrugated cardboard, is disclosed. (Patent Document 9)
 特許文献10には、災害時の避難場所で使用可能な紡錘型の独立気泡を有する所定強度を有する発泡樹脂を用いる所定角度に折り曲げ可能な間仕切り材で、表面に面材が貼り付けられているものが開示されている。(特許文献10) Patent Document 10 is a partition material that can be bent at a predetermined angle using a foamed resin having a spindle-shaped closed cell and having a predetermined strength that can be used in an evacuation site in the event of a disaster, and a face material is attached to the surface thereof. Things are disclosed. (Patent Document 10)
 特許文献5のマット材では、発泡材を幅方向に横断するように連続した周期な波形状の凹凸構造をマット材の表面に形成するものであり、その際に、色の異なる多層の樹脂発泡体を積層した多層樹脂発泡体または積層体をプロファイル加工することにより、これにより凹凸の周期構造に立体的な帯状の2列または3列の模様を形成したり、あるいは模様を形成する代わりに異種の発泡剤を組わせる発明が開示されているが、特許文献5の発明では、融着層または接着層を波形状の凹凸構造面に露出させて、環状の線状模様を多数形成するものではない。さらに、使用用途として、玄関マット、バスマットあるいはダイニング用フロアリングマットなど薄肉発泡材の用途が記載されていて、避難所のパーテーション等には、組立自立性がなく使用できないものである。 In the mat material of Patent Document 5, a continuous periodic wavy uneven structure is formed on the surface of the mat material so as to cross the foam material in the width direction, and at that time, a multi-layer resin foam having different colors is formed. By profiling the multilayer resin foam or laminate in which the bodies are laminated, a three-dimensional strip-shaped two- or three-row pattern is formed in the periodic structure of the unevenness, or instead of forming the pattern, different types are formed. The invention of assembling the foaming agent of the above is disclosed, but in the invention of Patent Document 5, the fusion layer or the adhesive layer is exposed on a wavy uneven structure surface to form a large number of annular linear patterns. is not it. Further, as the usage, the usage of a thin-walled foaming material such as an entrance mat, a bath mat, or a flooring mat for dining is described, and it cannot be used for a partition of an evacuation shelter because it does not have self-sustaining assembly.
 また、以上のクッション材や床材などの他、避難所の床材や区画部材には、特許文献6~特許文献9に記載のように、段ボール製のベッドやパーテーションが使用されているが、段ボール製の床材の場合には、多数の部材の組立作業が必要で、吸湿性が高くクッション性もないことから、避難所を利用する避難生活者の生活環境を快適に保つことができない。また、プラスチックシートを使用した区画用パーテーションや床マットもあるが、この場合には、パーテーション用樹脂シートは、重量が10kg前後あり、ジョイントパーツを必要とすると同時に組立が容易でない。以上のように、これまでは、ベッド代わりに使用可能な床マットやパーテーションの両方に使用可能な軽量で、組立自立性や防湿性に優れ、十分なクッション性を有する製品は存在しなかった。 In addition to the above cushioning materials and flooring materials, corrugated cardboard beds and partitions are used for the flooring materials and partition members of evacuation centers as described in Patent Documents 6 to 9. In the case of corrugated cardboard flooring, it is not possible to maintain a comfortable living environment for evacuees who use evacuation shelters because it requires assembly work for a large number of members, has high moisture absorption and does not have cushioning properties. In addition, there are partition partitions and floor mats that use plastic sheets, but in this case, the resin sheet for partition weighs about 10 kg, which requires joint parts and is not easy to assemble. As described above, until now, there has been no product that is lightweight, can be used as both a floor mat and a partition that can be used instead of a bed, has excellent assembly independence and moisture resistance, and has sufficient cushioning properties.
 特許文献10の間仕切り材は、床材としても使用できるが、厚さが薄くプロファイル加工がされた意匠性に優れるクッション材や積層体でもないため、ベッドとしては使用することができないし、発泡体そのものが意匠性を有するものでもない。組立時に接着剤や固定手段を必要とするが、本願発明では、本発明の積層体を相互に当接または嵌合させるだけで組立ができるものであり、本願発明と特許文献10とは異なる。 The partition material of Patent Document 10 can be used as a floor material, but it cannot be used as a bed because it is not a cushion material or a laminated body having a thin thickness and excellent design and profile processing, and is a foam. It does not have a design in itself. An adhesive or fixing means is required at the time of assembly, but in the present invention, the laminates of the present invention can be assembled simply by abutting or fitting them to each other, which is different from the present invention and Patent Document 10.
 本発明のクッション材やそれを用いた積層体によれば、軽量で融着層あるいは接着層により形成された多数の環状の線状模様が形成されることで意匠性に優れると同時に、クッション性にも優れ、さらに断熱性と防湿性に優れ、従来の段ボール製の床材の欠点を解消するマット材を提供できると同時に、さらに組立時の組立自立性にも優れるため、避難所の区画用パーテーションにも使用可能なクッション材や積層体を提供可能なものであり、組立や収納が容易である。 According to the cushioning material of the present invention and the laminated body using the same, a large number of annular linear patterns formed by a fusion layer or an adhesive layer are formed, which is lightweight and has excellent design and cushioning properties. It is also excellent in heat insulation and moisture resistance, and it can provide a mat material that eliminates the drawbacks of conventional corrugated cardboard flooring materials, and at the same time, it is also excellent in assembly independence at the time of assembly, so it is used for shelter compartments. It is possible to provide cushioning materials and laminates that can also be used for partitions, and it is easy to assemble and store.
特開平7-80874号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 7-80874 特開2000-054610号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-054610 特開2005-059358号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-0593558 特開昭55-120813号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 55-120813 実公昭44-013645号公報Jikken Sho 44-013645 特開2019-122644号公報特開2019-122644JP-A-2019-122644 JP-A-2019-122644 登録実案第3226650号公報Registration Draft No. 3226650 特開2003-129593号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-129595 特開2006-274740特開2006-274740号公報JP-A-2006-274740 JP-A-2006-274740 特開2017-061827号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-061827
 しかし、特許文献1~特許文献3は、表面に周期的な波形状の凹凸構造を有する樹脂発泡体に関するものであるが、いずれも何らかの形で、外観に対する品質要求なしにクッション性を有する用途に使用されているに過ぎない。このため、樹脂発泡体に意匠性を持たせて使用することは行われていなかった。例えば、包装材料のクッション材に使用される場合は、意匠性は必要でないし、寝具用マットなどに使用される場合には、クッション材自体が露出使用されないため、これまでは、模様などの意匠性を付与することはこれまで考えられていなかった。 However, Patent Documents 1 to 3 relate to resin foams having a periodic wavy uneven structure on the surface, but all of them are used for applications having cushioning properties without quality requirements for appearance. It is only used. For this reason, the resin foam has not been used with a design property. For example, when used as a cushioning material for packaging materials, design is not required, and when used for bedding mats, the cushioning material itself is not exposed, so until now, designs such as patterns have been used. Giving sex has never been considered.
 また、特許文献4は、プロファイル加工により、波形状の凹凸構造面の所定位置に硬さの異なる発泡材を配置する発明であり、特許文献5は、プロファイル加工により、表面に幅方向に連続した波形状の凹凸構造を形成し、その波形状の凹凸構造の所定位置に所定の発泡体を配置して意匠性を向上させるものであるが、いずれの発明も、融着層または接着層が着色された積層発泡体を、融着層または接着層を挟んでプロファイル加工を行うことで、波形状の凹凸構造面に環状の線状の模様を多数形成して意匠性を向上させるものでもなく、さらに融着層または接着層に機能性を付与するものでもない。特許文献6から特許文献9は、樹脂発泡体を使用したものでもなく、意匠性に優れるものではなく、多数の部材の組立作業が必要で、吸湿性が高くクッション性もないことから、避難所を利用する避難生活者の生活環境を快適に保つことができない。特許文献10は、発泡体そのものが意匠性に優れるものではなく、プロファイル加工されておらず、ベッドとしては使用できない。 Further, Patent Document 4 is an invention in which foam materials having different hardness are arranged at predetermined positions on a wavy uneven structure surface by profile processing, and Patent Document 5 is continuous in the width direction on the surface by profile processing. A corrugated concavo-convex structure is formed, and a predetermined foam is arranged at a predetermined position of the corrugated concavo-convex structure to improve the design. In both inventions, the fusion layer or the adhesive layer is colored. By profiling the laminated foam with the fusion layer or the adhesive layer sandwiched between them, a large number of annular linear patterns are formed on the wavy uneven structure surface to improve the design. Furthermore, it does not impart functionality to the fusion layer or the adhesive layer. Patent Documents 6 to 9 do not use a resin foam, are not excellent in design, require assembly work of a large number of members, have high hygroscopicity, and do not have cushioning properties. It is not possible to maintain a comfortable living environment for evacuees who use the. In Patent Document 10, the foam itself is not excellent in design, is not profiled, and cannot be used as a bed.
 本発明は、このような問題に鑑みてなされたもので、クッション材の外観を改善するためにクッション材の波形状の凹凸構造の表面に融着層または接着層を露出させることで、環状の線状模様を多数形成して意匠性を向上させ、軽量で意匠性に優れると同時に、クッション材にポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体を採用することで防湿性にも優れ、接着層または融着層に制振性や遮音性等の機能性を持たせることが可能なクッション材、積層体、クッション材と積層体の製造方法、クッション材の使用方法、積層体を用いた避難所区画の接続構造、積層体を用いた避難所区画の形成方法、避難所区画の分解収納方法及び避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法を提供することを目的とするものである。 The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in order to improve the appearance of the cushion material, an annular layer or an adhesive layer is exposed on the surface of the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material. A large number of linear patterns are formed to improve the design, and at the same time, it is lightweight and has excellent design, and at the same time, it has excellent moisture resistance by using a polyolefin resin foam for the cushion material, and vibration control is applied to the adhesive layer or the fusion layer. Cushion material, laminate, manufacturing method of cushion material and laminate, usage of cushion material, connection structure of evacuation shelter section using laminate, laminate, which can have functionality such as property and sound insulation It is an object of the present invention to provide a method for forming an evacuation shelter section, a method for disassembling and storing the evacuation shelter section, and a method for forming an impact cushioning wall panel of the evacuation shelter.
 前述した目的を達するために第1の発明は、山部を形成するポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体と、谷部を形成するポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体とが積層され、それらのポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体の積層面に形成される接着層又は融着層と、を具備するポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体からなるクッション材であって、前記クッション材は、一方の面が縦横に山部と谷部が交互に周期的に配置された波形状の凹凸構造のプロファイル加工面で、他方の面が平坦面であり、前記波形状の凹凸構造の表面の所定高さの部分に、前記他方の面に略平行に形成された前記接着層又は前記融着層が露出して、多数の環状の線状模様が相互に所定間隔離間して形成され、前記線状模様は、前記波形状の凹凸構造の前記山部と前記谷部とを仕切り、それぞれの前記山部を囲むように前記山部と前記谷部の間に所定高さで形成されることを特徴とするクッション材である。特に、前記クッション材は、避難所の仕切り壁として使用されるだけでなく、意匠性と断熱性及び防湿性に優れ、発泡材で形成されプロファイル加工されていることで、ベッド代わりにも使用可能な災害用マットとして、好適に使用できる。 In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, in the first invention, the polyolefin resin foam forming the peak portion and the polyolefin resin foam forming the valley portion are laminated and formed on the laminated surface of the polyolefin resin foam. A cushioning material made of a polyolefin resin foam comprising an adhesive layer or a fusional layer, wherein one surface of the cushioning material is a wave in which peaks and valleys are alternately arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. A profiled surface of a concave-convex structure having a shape, the other surface is a flat surface, and the adhesive layer or the adhesive layer formed substantially parallel to the other surface at a predetermined height portion of the surface of the wavy uneven structure. The fused layer is exposed, and a large number of annular linear patterns are formed at predetermined intervals from each other, and the linear pattern partitions the peak portion and the valley portion of the wavy uneven structure. , A cushioning material characterized in that it is formed at a predetermined height between the mountain portion and the valley portion so as to surround each of the mountain portions. In particular, the cushion material is not only used as a partition wall for evacuation shelters, but also has excellent design, heat insulation and moisture resistance, and can be used as a bed substitute because it is made of foam material and profiled. Can be suitably used as a mat for disasters.
 このようにすることで、クッション材の表面に、2次元的な環状の線状模様を多数所定間隔離間して、所定高さで着色して形成することができる。なお、所定高さで環状に形成される線状模様の形成位置は、山部と谷部の間で、任意に調整することが可能である。 By doing so, a large number of two-dimensional annular linear patterns can be formed on the surface of the cushion material by coloring them at a predetermined height at predetermined intervals. The position of forming the linear pattern formed in a ring shape at a predetermined height can be arbitrarily adjusted between the peak and the valley.
 前記線状模様は、融着層または接着層により形成され、前記線状模様が融着層により形成される場合には、融着する樹脂発泡体の少なくとも一方の融着面を異なる色に塗装した樹脂発泡体を用いて融着されることで形成されたものでもよいし、前記線状模様が接着層により形成される場合には、前記接着層は、着色された接着剤を用いて形成されたものであるかのいずれかであってもよい。前記線状模様は、融着面を塗装により着色したり、接着層は、着色された接着剤を用いることで任意の色に着色することができる。 The linear pattern is formed by a fusion layer or an adhesive layer, and when the linear pattern is formed by the fusion layer, at least one fusion surface of the resin foam to be fused is painted in a different color. It may be formed by being fused using the resin foam, or when the linear pattern is formed by an adhesive layer, the adhesive layer is formed by using a colored adhesive. It may be one of the above. The linear pattern can be colored by painting the fused surface, and the adhesive layer can be colored in any color by using a colored adhesive.
 前記融着層または前記接着層が融着層であり、前記融着層は、融着時に融着層を形成する樹脂発泡体の表面が溶融後固化する過程で結晶化する際に、結晶化度と分子配向の変化、これに加えてADCA(アゾジカルボンアミド)の発泡体表面への残留効果などを重畳させることにより選択的に異なる色に形成されてもよい。具体的には、無着色の白色の樹脂発泡体の表面を融着による再結晶化過程で融着層の結晶化度と分子配向の変化に加えて、ADCAの発泡体表面への残留効果を利用して、選択的に変色させて黄色く着色することが可能になる。ここで、発泡体の表面は、発泡体の表面近傍の発泡した気体が抜けやすく、発泡体の内部に比べて、発泡剤であるADCAの消費を抑制することが可能になる。 The fusion layer or the adhesion layer is a fusion layer, and the fusion layer crystallizes when the surface of the resin foam forming the fusion layer at the time of fusion crystallizes in the process of melting and solidifying. It may be selectively formed into different colors by superimposing changes in degree and molecular orientation, and in addition, a residual effect of ADCA (azodicarbonamide) on the foam surface. Specifically, in addition to the change in the crystallinity and molecular orientation of the fused layer in the recrystallization process of the surface of the uncolored white resin foam by fusion, the residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface is exhibited. It can be used to selectively discolor and color yellow. Here, the surface of the foam is easy for the foamed gas near the surface of the foam to escape, and it is possible to suppress the consumption of the foaming agent ADCA as compared with the inside of the foam.
 この際、融着層の溶融固化時の結晶化により着色する場合には、例えば、無着色の白色の樹脂発泡体を溶融させることで、樹脂発泡体表面および融着部が融着時に樹脂が再溶融して再結晶化するので、その際の結晶化状態、分子配向、ADCAの発泡体表面への残留効果などを重畳させることにより、融着部を黄色に着色することができる。このように融着時の融着層の色の変化を利用しても良い。あるいは、表面が所定の色に塗装された樹脂発泡体を接着してもよい。また、接着により、クッション材を形成する場合には、接着剤に所定の色の顔料、例えば、黄色や赤色などの顔料を含有させることで、同様の線状模様を形成することができる。 At this time, in the case of coloring by crystallization during fusion solidification of the fusion layer, for example, by melting an uncolored white resin foam, the resin foam surface and the fusion portion are fused when the resin is fused. Since it is remelted and recrystallized, the fused portion can be colored yellow by superimposing the crystallization state, molecular orientation, residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface, and the like. In this way, the change in color of the fusion layer at the time of fusion may be utilized. Alternatively, a resin foam whose surface is painted in a predetermined color may be adhered. Further, when the cushion material is formed by adhesion, a similar linear pattern can be formed by including a pigment of a predetermined color, for example, a pigment such as yellow or red, in the adhesive.
 前記クッション材の前記一方の面は、前記線状模様より上側の樹脂発泡体により形成される前記山部と、前記線状模様が形成される線状模様形成部と、前記線状模様より下側の樹脂発泡体により形成される前記谷部との3つの部分に区画され、前記谷部は隣接する谷部同志で相互に連続して一体になり、前記線状模様形成部に対して前記山部あるいは前記谷部のいずれかが異なる色に形成されることで、3次元的な立体模様が形成されていてもよい。 The one surface of the cushioning material is formed by the mountain portion formed by the resin foam above the linear pattern, the linear pattern forming portion on which the linear pattern is formed, and the lower portion of the linear pattern. It is divided into three portions with the valley portion formed by the resin foam on the side, and the valley portions are continuously integrated with each other by adjacent valley portions, and the linear pattern forming portion is described as described above. A three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern may be formed by forming either the mountain portion or the valley portion in a different color.
 この際、山部、谷部と線状模様を異なる色に形成する場合には、山部または谷部と接着剤を顔料などで着色して表面を形成するとか、融着層を形成する発泡体の被着面を融着前に塗装により着色しておくなどしておけばよい。 At this time, when forming a linear pattern with different colors from the peaks and valleys, the peaks or valleys and the adhesive are colored with a pigment to form a surface, or foaming to form a fusion layer. The adherend surface of the body may be colored by painting before fusion.
 前記線状模様形成部の2次元的な模様に加えて前記波形状の凹凸構造の前記山部と前記谷部のいずれもが異なる色に着色されることで、前記線状模様形成部と前記山部、前記谷部のいずれもが異なる色に着色された3次元的な立体模様が形成されたクッション材であっても良い。 In addition to the two-dimensional pattern of the linear pattern forming portion, both the peak portion and the valley portion of the wavy uneven structure are colored in different colors, whereby the linear pattern forming portion and the said A cushioning material having a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in which both the mountain portion and the valley portion are colored in different colors may be used.
 前記線状模様の形成高さは、前記波形状の凹凸構造の範囲内の任意の高さに形成することが可能であり、前記線状模様を前記波形状の凹凸構造の高さの中心より、前記山部側に形成することで、前記線状模様あるいは着色された前記山部の模様を小さく形成することが可能であるか、又は前記線状模様を前記波形状の凹凸構造の中心より前記谷部側に形成することで、前記線状模様あるいは着色された前記山部の模様を大きく形成することが可能であってもよい。前記波形状の凹凸構造は、プロファイル加工により形成することができ、波形状の凹凸構造の形成高さを調整することで、線状模様の環状の模様の大きさを変更することができる。 The formation height of the linear pattern can be formed at an arbitrary height within the range of the wavy uneven structure, and the linear pattern is formed from the center of the height of the wavy uneven structure. , The linear pattern or the colored mountain pattern can be made smaller by forming the mountain side, or the linear pattern can be formed from the center of the wavy uneven structure. By forming on the valley side, it may be possible to form the linear pattern or the colored mountain pattern in a large size. The wavy uneven structure can be formed by profile processing, and the size of the annular pattern of the linear pattern can be changed by adjusting the formation height of the wavy uneven structure.
 前記樹脂発泡体の原料樹脂は、ポリエチレン、低密度ポリエチレン、高密度ポリエチレン、エチレン酢酸ビニルコポリマー、又はポリプロピレン樹脂の少なくともいずれか、あるいはこれらの2種以上の混合物であってもよい。さらに、前記樹脂発泡体は、前記原料樹脂の融着時の融着性を向上させるために、無水マレン酸などのカルボキシ基または酸無水物構造を有する官能基を有するポリエチレン樹脂またはポリプロピレン樹脂を所定量含んでいてもよい。ここで、所定量とは、前記原料樹脂の総配合量を100質量部とした場合の無水マレン酸などのカルボキシ基または酸無水物構造を有する官能基を有するポリエチレン樹脂またはポリプロピレン樹脂の配合割合は0.5質量部以上10質量部以下含有する樹脂であるが、5質量部以下とすることが好ましい。 The raw material resin of the resin foam may be at least one of polyethylene, low-density polyethylene, high-density polyethylene, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, or polypropylene resin, or a mixture of two or more thereof. Further, the resin foam is provided with a polyethylene resin or a polypropylene resin having a carboxy group such as maleic anhydride or a functional group having an acid anhydride structure in order to improve the fusion property of the raw material resin at the time of fusion. It may contain a fixed amount. Here, the predetermined amount is the compounding ratio of the polyethylene resin or polypropylene resin having a carboxy group such as maleic anhydride or a functional group having an acid anhydride structure when the total compounding amount of the raw material resin is 100 parts by mass. The resin contains 0.5 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, but it is preferably 5 parts by mass or less.
 前記樹脂発泡体はポリエチレン樹脂発泡体であり、前記ポリエチレン樹脂発泡体は発泡倍率が20倍から40倍の独立気泡構造を有し、さらにJIS K6767に基づく、圧縮永久歪みが3.0%~7.4%であり、試験温度25℃における25%圧縮時の圧縮応力が34kPa~56kPaであってもよい。 The resin foam is a polyethylene resin foam, and the polyethylene resin foam has a closed cell structure having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times, and further has a compression set of 3.0% to 7 based on JIS K6767. It is 4.4%, and the compressive stress at 25% compression at a test temperature of 25 ° C. may be 34 kPa to 56 kPa.
 前記波形状の凹凸構造は、前記クッション材の前記接着層に機能性を付与したものであってもよい。 The corrugated uneven structure may be one in which functionality is imparted to the adhesive layer of the cushion material.
 前記樹脂発泡体の積層面は、接着剤により前記接着層が形成され、前記接着層に、ウレタン樹脂、酢酸ビニルエマルジョン、アクリル樹脂、シリコーン樹脂及び変性シリコーン樹脂からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも一種の可撓性樹脂を主成分として含有する接着剤を使用することで、制振性を付与するか、あるいはアクリル酸エステル系重合体と含ハロゲンリン酸エステルと無機系難燃剤を必須成分として含有する接着剤を使用することで、難燃性と制振性を付与してもよい。 The adhesive layer is formed on the laminated surface of the resin foam by an adhesive, and at least one selected from the group consisting of urethane resin, vinyl acetate emulsion, acrylic resin, silicone resin and modified silicone resin is formed on the adhesive layer. By using an adhesive containing a flexible resin as a main component, vibration damping properties are imparted, or an acrylic acid ester-based polymer, a halogen-containing phosphoric acid ester, and an inorganic flame retardant are contained as essential components. Flame retardancy and vibration damping properties may be imparted by using an adhesive.
 前記樹脂発泡体は、消臭剤としてシリカ、リン酸ジルコニウム、ゼオライト、硫酸亜鉛、又は硫酸ジルコニウムのいずれかを、所定量分散させたものでも容易い。また、前記樹脂発泡体は、抗菌剤あるいは抗ウィルス剤として銀イオンを吸着または担持した非晶性リン酸カルシウム粒子、あるいは光触媒作用を有するアナターゼ型結晶構造の酸化チタン粒子、あるいは銀、銅、亜鉛の金属化合物粒子、銀、銅、亜鉛の金属微粒子を所定量分散させたものでもよい。これらの消臭剤や抗菌剤の含有量は、樹脂成分100質量部に対して、0.5質量部から10質量部の範囲で含んでもよいが、0.5質量部から5質量部の範囲が好ましい。 The resin foam can be easily prepared by dispersing any of silica, zirconium phosphate, zeolite, zinc sulfate, and zirconium sulfate as a deodorant in a predetermined amount. Further, the resin foam is an amorphous calcium phosphate particle that adsorbs or carries silver ions as an antibacterial agent or an antiviral agent, titanium oxide particles having an anatase-type crystal structure having a photocatalytic action, or a metal of silver, copper, or zinc. A predetermined amount of compound particles and metal fine particles of silver, copper, and zinc may be dispersed. The content of these deodorants and antibacterial agents may be in the range of 0.5 parts by mass to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin component, but is in the range of 0.5 parts by mass to 5 parts by mass. Is preferable.
 前記クッション材は、前記波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を上面として、他方の面を下面として、災害用マット材として使用することが可能であってもよい。前記クッション材は、プロファイル加工された発泡材により形成されているため、ベッド代わりに使用可能である。そのため、避難所の各区画をベッド専用の空間を設けることなく、避難所区画を有効に利用することができる。 The cushion material may be used as a disaster mat material with the surface on which the corrugated uneven structure is formed as the upper surface and the other surface as the lower surface. Since the cushion material is formed of a profiled foam material, it can be used in place of a bed. Therefore, the evacuation shelter section can be effectively used without providing a space dedicated to the bed in each section of the evacuation shelter.
 第1の発明によれば、波形状の凹凸構造の表面の所定高さの部分に、接着層又は融着層が露出して、多数の線状模様が相互に所定距離離間して環状に形成されるため、意匠性が高い。このため、露出使用に適したクッション材を得ることができる。第1の発明のクッション材は、クッション材の端面に占める略平行な部分の断面積が最大になるようにクッション材のプロファイル加工面の変曲点位置を結んで直線状に切断されたものであることが望ましい。 According to the first invention, an adhesive layer or a fusion layer is exposed on a portion of a surface of a wavy uneven structure at a predetermined height, and a large number of linear patterns are formed in an annular shape separated from each other by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the design is high. Therefore, a cushion material suitable for exposed use can be obtained. The cushion material of the first invention is cut in a straight line by connecting the inflection point positions of the profiled surface of the cushion material so that the cross-sectional area of the substantially parallel portion occupying the end surface of the cushion material is maximized. It is desirable to have.
 また、線状模様が、波形状の凹凸構造の表面に露出した融着層または接着層により形成されることで、波形状の凹凸構造の山部と谷部とを仕切り、それぞれの山部を囲むように所定高さで環状に形成することで、意匠性を高めることができる。また、融着させる樹脂発泡体の融着面である表面を塗装した樹脂発泡体を融着させるか、あるいは顔料や塗料などで着色した接着層を形成する樹脂発泡体を利用することで、線状模様を任意の色に着色することができる。例えば、本発明の線状模様の基本的な構成として、融着層または接着層が着色されていれば、融着層または接着層を挟んで接合される発泡体は無着色の白色でよく、この場合に融着層または接着層が青色や黄色などに着色されていれば、波形状の凹凸構造の山部の所定位置に多数の青色や黄色の環状模様が形成されて、その他の部分が白色のクッション材を得ることができる。 Further, the linear pattern is formed by the fusion layer or the adhesive layer exposed on the surface of the wavy uneven structure, thereby partitioning the peaks and valleys of the wavy uneven structure, and each peak is separated. By forming the ring at a predetermined height so as to surround it, the design can be enhanced. Further, by fusing the resin foam whose surface is the fusion surface of the resin foam to be fused, or by using the resin foam that forms an adhesive layer colored with a pigment or paint, the wire is used. The pattern can be colored in any color. For example, as a basic configuration of the linear pattern of the present invention, if the fused layer or the adhesive layer is colored, the foam bonded by sandwiching the fused layer or the adhesive layer may be uncolored white. In this case, if the fusion layer or the adhesive layer is colored blue or yellow, a large number of blue or yellow annular patterns are formed at predetermined positions in the mountainous portion of the wavy uneven structure, and the other parts are formed. A white cushioning material can be obtained.
 ここで、線状模様が融着層により形成される場合には、融着時に無着色の溶融後の固化結晶化過程による結晶化度、分子配向の変化、ADCAの発泡体表面への残留効果により融着面のみを選択的に着色させるため、融着させる発泡体表面への顔料や塗料の塗布などが不要である。 Here, when the linear pattern is formed by the fusion layer, the crystallinity, the change in molecular orientation, and the residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface due to the solidification and crystallization process after melting without coloring at the time of fusion. Since only the fused surface is selectively colored, it is not necessary to apply a pigment or paint to the surface of the foam to be fused.
 また、クッション材の一方の面が、山部と線状模様形成部と谷部との3つの部分に区画され、線状模様形成部に対して、山部あるいは谷部の少なくとも一つ又は2つの部分が異なる色に形成されれば、2次元的な同一平面上に形成される多数の環状模様に加えて、3次元的な立体模様を形成させることが可能になり、より高い意匠性を得ることができる。 Further, one surface of the cushioning material is divided into three portions of a mountain portion, a linear pattern forming portion and a valley portion, and at least one or two of the peak portion or the valley portion is relative to the linear pattern forming portion. If two parts are formed in different colors, it becomes possible to form a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in addition to a large number of annular patterns formed on the same two-dimensional plane, resulting in higher design. Obtainable.
  また、クッション材の線状模様が形成される高さを変えることで、線状模様の大きさや山部あるいは谷部の着色部の表面積を変えることが可能になり、意匠性に変化をもたらすことができる。 In addition, by changing the height at which the linear pattern of the cushion material is formed, it is possible to change the size of the linear pattern and the surface area of the colored portion in the mountain or valley portion, which changes the design. Can be done.
 また、樹脂発泡体がポリエチレンであれば、吸水しにくいので、露出使用に最適である。これに対し、樹脂発泡体がウレタン系樹脂であれば加水分解性があり、さらに通常連続気泡の樹脂発泡体であるため、露出使用には適さない。このように、樹脂発泡体には、ポリオレフィン系の種々の樹脂の使用が可能であるが、特に独立気泡の発泡ポリエチレンを使用すれば、クッション材が吸湿せず、快適な睡眠環境や生活環境を提供することができる。また、前記樹脂発泡体が、無水マレン酸などのカルボキシ基または酸無水物構造を有する官能基を有するポリエチレン樹脂またはポリプロピレン樹脂を所定量含んでいれば、融着面における融着性が向上するのでさらに好ましい。 Also, if the resin foam is polyethylene, it is difficult to absorb water, so it is ideal for exposed use. On the other hand, if the resin foam is a urethane-based resin, it is hydrolyzable and is usually an open-cell resin foam, so that it is not suitable for exposure use. In this way, various polyolefin-based resins can be used for the resin foam, but if closed-cell foamed polyethylene is used, the cushioning material does not absorb moisture, providing a comfortable sleeping environment and living environment. Can be provided. Further, if the resin foam contains a predetermined amount of a polyethylene resin or polypropylene resin having a carboxy group such as maleic anhydride or a functional group having an acid anhydride structure, the fusion property on the fusion surface is improved. More preferred.
 また、樹脂発泡体が、独立気泡構造のポリエチレン樹脂発泡体であれば、JIS K6767に基づく、圧縮永久歪みが3.0%~7.4%であり、試験温度25℃における25%圧縮時の圧縮応力が34kPa~56kPaであれば、適度なクッション性と防湿性を確保することができる。 If the resin foam is a polyethylene resin foam having a closed cell structure, the compression set has a compression set of 3.0% to 7.4% based on JIS K6767, and the compression is 25% at a test temperature of 25 ° C. When the compressive stress is 34 kPa to 56 kPa, appropriate cushioning and moisture resistance can be ensured.
 また、クッション材の接着層に機能性が付与されれば、意匠性と同時に、クッション性の他、制振性や難燃性等を付与することが可能になる。クッション材の平面視における総面積に対する、略同一平面上に配置される接着層の合計の面積が占める割合である接着層の合計の占有率が高い方が機能性を高めることができるので望ましい。 Further, if the adhesive layer of the cushion material is provided with functionality, it is possible to impart vibration damping property, flame retardancy, etc. in addition to cushioning property as well as design property. It is desirable that the total occupancy ratio of the adhesive layers, which is the ratio of the total area of the adhesive layers arranged on substantially the same plane to the total area of the cushion material in a plan view, is high because the functionality can be enhanced.
 特に、樹脂発泡体の接着層に、特定の可撓性樹脂を主成分とした接着剤を使用したり、アクリル系樹脂やハロゲンリン酸エステル系樹脂に無機系難燃剤を含有する接着剤として用いることで、接着層に制振性や難燃性を付与することができる。このように、接着層にこれらの効果を付与することは有効である。 In particular, an adhesive containing a specific flexible resin as a main component is used for the adhesive layer of the resin foam, or an adhesive containing an inorganic flame retardant in an acrylic resin or a halogen phosphate ester resin is used. As a result, vibration damping and flame retardancy can be imparted to the adhesive layer. In this way, it is effective to impart these effects to the adhesive layer.
 また、クッション材や積層体に用いる樹脂発泡体が、消臭剤としてシリカ、リン酸ジルコニウム、ゼオライト、硫酸亜鉛、又は硫酸ジルコニウムのいずれかを、あるいは、抗菌剤あるいは抗ウィルス剤として銀イオンを吸着または担持した非晶性リン酸カルシウム粒子、あるいは光触媒作用を有するアナターゼ型結晶構造の酸化チタン粒子、あるいは銀、銅、亜鉛などの金属化合物粒子、銀、銅、亜鉛の金属微粒子のいずれかが所定量含まれることにより、クッション材に消臭効果や抗菌効果及び抗ウィルス効果を付与することが可能になる。 Further, the resin foam used for the cushion material or the laminate adsorbs either silica, zirconium phosphate, zeolite, zinc sulfate, or zirconium sulfate as a deodorant, or silver ions as an antibacterial agent or an antiviral agent. Alternatively, a predetermined amount of any of the supported amorphous calcium phosphate particles, titanium oxide particles having an anatase-type crystal structure having a photocatalytic action, metal compound particles such as silver, copper and zinc, and metal fine particles of silver, copper and zinc is contained. This makes it possible to impart a deodorant effect, an antibacterial effect, and an antiviral effect to the cushion material.
 また、抗ウィルス性に優れる有機物由来材料や塩類としては、アルキルベンゼンスルホン酸系化合物やナトリウム塩、カリウム塩などのアルカリ金属塩、カルシウム、バリウム等のアルカリ土類金属塩あるいはスルホン酸系界面活性剤などが考えられるが、これらの化合物の水性エマルジョンなどをクッション材の表面に塗布する方法も有効と考えられる。抗ウイルス性に優れるアルキルベンゼンスルホン酸系化合物がより好ましい。 Examples of organic-derived materials and salts having excellent antiviral properties include alkylbenzene sulfonic acid compounds, alkali metal salts such as sodium salts and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and barium, and sulfonic acid surfactants. However, it is also considered effective to apply an aqueous emulsion of these compounds to the surface of the cushioning material. Alkylbenzene sulfonic acid compounds having excellent antiviral properties are more preferable.
 第2の発明は、第1の発明にかかるクッション材とシート状樹脂発泡体からなる積層体であって、前記クッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の形成面の裏面の平坦な他方の面に、さらに別のポリオレフィン樹脂からなるシート状樹脂発泡体が積層されて接着または融着されていることを特徴とする積層体である。例えば、積層体の平均厚さは20mm以上50mm以下であるが、好ましくは20mm以上40mm以下が望ましい。積層体の平均厚さが20mm以下では、断熱性や防湿性が不足しベッドとして使用するには適さないからである。また、40mmを超えると積層体が重くなり組立性が低下すると同時にコストが増加するためである。ここで、例えば、発泡倍率が30倍で積層体の寸法が長さ1800mm×高さ880mm×山部厚さ30mm(平均厚さ:25mm)である積層体の重量は、1.25kgで、平均厚さが50mmの場合の積層体の重量は2.5kgである。 The second invention is a laminate composed of the cushion material and the sheet-like resin foam according to the first invention, and is formed on the other flat surface of the back surface of the cushion material having the wavy concave-convex structure. The laminated body is characterized in that a sheet-shaped resin foam made of yet another polyolefin resin is laminated and adhered or fused. For example, the average thickness of the laminate is 20 mm or more and 50 mm or less, but preferably 20 mm or more and 40 mm or less. This is because if the average thickness of the laminate is 20 mm or less, the heat insulating property and the moisture proof property are insufficient and it is not suitable for use as a bed. Further, if it exceeds 40 mm, the laminated body becomes heavy, the assembling property is lowered, and the cost is increased at the same time. Here, for example, the weight of the laminate having a foaming ratio of 30 times and the dimensions of the laminate being 1800 mm in length × 880 mm in height × 30 mm in peak thickness (average thickness: 25 mm) is 1.25 kg, which is an average. When the thickness is 50 mm, the weight of the laminate is 2.5 kg.
 前記積層体の前記別のシート状樹脂発泡体は、前記波形状の凹凸構造を有する前記樹脂発泡体より硬質あるいは同等の強度を有してもよい。硬質とは、同一の圧縮荷重に対する変形量を少なくすることであり、同等の強度とは同一の圧縮荷重に対する変形量を同一にする材料の強度のことである。 The other sheet-shaped resin foam of the laminated body may have a higher strength or the same strength as the resin foam having the wavy uneven structure. Hard means reducing the amount of deformation with respect to the same compressive load, and equivalent strength means the strength of a material having the same amount of deformation with respect to the same compressive load.
 例えば、同一組成の樹脂発泡体であれば、発泡倍率を低く設定することで、樹脂発泡体を硬質にすることができる。以下、樹脂発泡体との記載は、前記線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材と前記クッション材の平坦面に別のシート状樹脂発泡体が接着または融着された積層体の両方に使用される樹脂発泡体を指すものとする。 For example, if the resin foam has the same composition, the resin foam can be made hard by setting the foaming ratio low. Hereinafter, the description of the resin foam is a laminate in which the cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which the linear pattern is formed and another sheet-like resin foam are adhered or fused to the flat surface of the cushion material. It shall refer to the resin foam used for both bodies.
 前記積層体は、災害時に避難所の区画用パーテーション側壁又はベッドとして使用可能な災害用マット材として使用することが可能であり、通常時には、衝撃吸収用壁面パネル材として使用することができる。ここで、区画用パーテーションは、避難時に避難者を世帯毎に区画する世帯区画用パーテーションとして用いることができる。 The laminate can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a partition side wall or a bed for a shelter in the event of a disaster, and can normally be used as a wall panel material for shock absorption. Here, the partition for division can be used as a partition for household division that divides evacuees for each household at the time of evacuation.
 前記積層体は、発泡倍率が40倍以下の樹脂発泡体を用い、前記積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から積層体の谷部までの高さ(Hv)に対する、積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造面の中心線高さ(Hc)までの高さの割合をRとすると、Rが50%以上を満足すれば、組立自立性に優れる積層体とすることもできる。 The laminate uses a resin foam having a foaming ratio of 40 times or less, and the back surface of the laminate with respect to the height (Hv) from the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate to the valley portion of the laminate. Assuming that the ratio of the height from the flat surface of the sheet-shaped foam to the center line height (Hc) of the wavy uneven structure surface is R, if R satisfies 50% or more, the lamination is excellent in assembly independence. It can also be a body.
 ここで、(HC)は、後述する前記積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から積層体の山部までの高さ(Hm)と前記積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から積層体の谷部までの高さ(Hv)との平均高さである。すなわち、積層体の裏面からプロファイル加工面の平均高さと、プロファイル加工面の谷部までの高さの比率であり、これはプロファイル加工面の平均高さ(中心線高さ)とプロファイル非加工面の高さの比率に相当する。 Here, (HC) is the height (Hm) from the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate to the mountain portion of the laminate, which will be described later, and the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate. It is the average height from the height (Hv) from the height to the valley of the laminated body. That is, it is the ratio of the average height of the profiled surface to the valley of the profiled surface from the back surface of the laminate, which is the average height (center line height) of the profiled surface and the profile non-processed surface. Corresponds to the height ratio of.
 本発明において、組立自立性とは、所定寸法の長辺の長さが短辺の2倍の略長方形の積層体の裏面の短辺の側端部と短辺側側面を固定端として、両者を略直角に当接して簡易固定手段で組み立てる場合に、積層体の反対側の短辺の端面である自由端に撓みや曲がりが生じないことを意味し、これにより区画用パーテーションの組立が容易に安定的にできることを意味する。ここで、簡易固定手段としては、面ファスナを用いることができるが、面ファスナの他、ボタン状ファスナ(スナップファスナともいう)や磁石が固定されたテープ状部材等などの簡易固定手段も用いることが可能である。以下簡単のため、簡易固定手段は固定手段と記載する。 In the present invention, assembling independence means that the length of the long side of a predetermined dimension is twice the length of the short side, and the side end of the short side and the side of the short side of the back surface of the laminated body are fixed ends. This means that the free end, which is the end face of the short side on the opposite side of the laminate, does not bend or bend when assembled by a simple fixing means by abutting at a substantially right angle, which makes it easy to assemble the partition for partitioning. It means that it can be done stably. Here, as the simple fixing means, a hook-and-loop fastener can be used, but in addition to the hook-and-loop fastener, a simple fixing means such as a button-shaped fastener (also referred to as a snap fastener) or a tape-shaped member to which a magnet is fixed is also used. Is possible. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the simple fixing means will be described as the fixing means.
 面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を積層体に粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。固定手段は、短辺の上端部から下端部まで全体に均等に設けることが望ましいが、上方、中間、下方に分けて支持しても、十分安定に支持できるようであれば、特に問題はない。 In the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is laminated with an adhesive or an adhesive. Can be fixed to. It is desirable that the fixing means be provided evenly over the entire area from the upper end to the lower end of the short side, but there is no particular problem as long as it can be supported sufficiently stably even if it is supported separately in the upper part, the middle part, and the lower part. ..
 また、クッション材の樹脂発泡体の他方の面に、さらに別のシート状樹脂発泡体を積層させた樹脂発泡体の積層体とすることで、樹脂発泡体の厚みを厚くすることができる。このため、積層体のクッション性と同時に、クッション材の防湿性が向上させることができる。さらにパーテーションとして利用する際の組立自立性を高めることができる。 Further, the thickness of the resin foam can be increased by forming a laminate of the resin foam in which another sheet-like resin foam is laminated on the other surface of the resin foam of the cushion material. Therefore, the cushioning property of the laminated body and the moisture-proof property of the cushioning material can be improved. Furthermore, the assembly independence when used as a partition can be enhanced.
 この際、この別のシート状樹脂発泡体が、波形状の凹凸構造を有する樹脂発泡体より硬質あるいは同等の強度を有することで、クッション性を維持したまま、クッション材の過度の沈み込みを防止することができる。 At this time, the other sheet-shaped resin foam has a hardness equal to or harder than that of the resin foam having a wavy uneven structure, thereby preventing excessive sinking of the cushion material while maintaining the cushioning property. can do.
 このように、クッション材を積層体とすることで、災害時に避難所の区画用パーテーション側壁やベッドとして使用可能な災害用マット材として使用できるものであり、通常時には、衝撃吸収用壁面パネル材として使用とすることができる。このように同一のクッション材を多様な用途に使用が可能になるため、非常に利便性が高いものとなる。 In this way, by forming the cushion material into a laminated body, it can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a partition side wall of an evacuation shelter or a bed in the event of a disaster, and normally as a wall panel material for shock absorption. Can be used. Since the same cushion material can be used for various purposes in this way, it is extremely convenient.
 前記積層体は、樹脂発泡体の発泡倍率が20倍~40倍以下の樹脂発泡体を用い、前記積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から積層体の谷部までの高さ(Hv)に対する、積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造面の中心線高さ(Hc)までの高さの割合をパーセント表示した両者の割合Rが、50%以上とすることで、積層体の重心を積層体の平坦部内に位置させることが可能になり、組立時に接続部の間に極わずかな撓みや曲がりを生じずに容易に組み立てることができる。そのため、積層体を避難所の区画用パーテーションを簡便に組み立てることが可能になる。第2の発明の積層体は、積層体の端面に占める略平行な部分の断面積が最大になるように積層体のプロファイル加工面の変曲点位置を結んで直線状に切断されたものであることが望ましい。 As the laminate, a resin foam having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times or less is used, and the height (Hv) from the flat surface of the sheet-shaped foam on the back surface of the laminate to the valley portion of the laminate. ), The ratio R of the height from the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminated body to the center line height (Hc) of the corrugated uneven structure surface is 50% or more. By doing so, the center of gravity of the laminated body can be positioned within the flat portion of the laminated body, and the laminated body can be easily assembled without causing slight bending or bending between the connecting portions during assembly. Therefore, it is possible to easily assemble the partition for the shelter compartment from the laminated body. The laminate of the second invention is cut in a straight line by connecting the inflection point positions of the profile processed surface of the laminate so that the cross-sectional area of the substantially parallel portion occupying the end surface of the laminate is maximized. It is desirable to have.
 以上のように第2の発明の積層体によれば、意匠性及び組立自立性に優れた避難所の区画用パーテーションやベッドとして使用可能な災害用マット材および衝撃吸収用壁面パネル材を得ることができる。 As described above, according to the laminate of the second invention, it is possible to obtain a disaster mat material and a shock absorbing wall panel material that can be used as a partition or a bed for a shelter having excellent design and assembly independence. Can be done.
 このようなクッション材あるいは積層体は、ベッドとして使用可能な災害用マット材として使用することができる。また、クッション材は、場合によりパーテーション材又は衝撃吸収用壁面パネル材としても使用可能である。また、避難所に使用する場合に、クッション材あるいは積層体に消臭効果や抗菌効果、抗ウィルス効果などを付与したベッドとして使用可能な避難用マット材、パーテーション材又は衝撃吸収用壁面パネル材のいずれにも用いることが可能であり、避難所の衛生状態を改善することが可能になる。 Such a cushion material or laminate can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a bed. Further, the cushion material can also be used as a partition material or a wall panel material for shock absorption, depending on the case. In addition, when used in evacuation shelters, evacuation mat materials, partition materials, or shock absorbing wall panel materials that can be used as beds with deodorant, antibacterial, and antiviral effects on cushioning materials or laminates. It can be used for both, and it is possible to improve the sanitary condition of the evacuation center.
 第3の発明は、着色された接着層又は融着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の樹脂発泡体を、プロファイルロール通過直後の、上下のロールによる押圧力が完全に弾性回復しないうちに、前記接着層又は前記融着層を含む位置で前記樹脂発泡体の厚さ方向に垂直な水平方向にスライス加工して切断することで、前記接着層又は前記融着層が湾曲した状態で湾曲した前記接着層又は前記融着層を横断するように切断され、さらに切断分離された前記樹脂発泡体が弾性回復し、前記接着層又は前記融着層が所定長さ、所定形状で平坦面状に形成されることで、前記樹脂発泡体の波形状の凹凸構造の表面の山部と谷部の間の所定高さの部分に前記平坦面の露出部として周期的な多数の環状の線状模様が同一平面に2次元的模様として形成されることを特徴とするクッション材の製造方法である。この場合、接着層又は融着層を挟んで対向するシート状の樹脂発泡体は無着色の白の樹脂発泡体であってもよい。 In the third invention, the pressing force of the upper and lower rolls immediately after passing through the profile roll does not completely recover the elasticity of the sheet-shaped resin foam having a predetermined thickness facing the colored adhesive layer or the fusional layer. A state in which the adhesive layer or the fusion layer is curved by slicing and cutting in the horizontal direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the resin foam at a position including the adhesive layer or the fusion layer. The resin foam cut and separated so as to cross the adhesive layer or the fusional layer curved in the above is elastically recovered, and the adhesive layer or the fusional layer is flat with a predetermined length and a predetermined shape. By being formed in a planar shape, a large number of cyclic rings are formed as exposed portions of the flat surface at a predetermined height portion between the peaks and valleys of the surface of the corrugated uneven structure of the resin foam. This is a method for manufacturing a cushioning material, characterized in that a linear pattern is formed as a two-dimensional pattern on the same plane. In this case, the sheet-shaped resin foam facing the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer may be an uncolored white resin foam.
 前記着色された接着層又は前記融着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の前記樹脂発泡体の少なくとも一方が着色されているか、又は両方の前記樹脂発泡体を異なる色とすることで、前記着色された接着層又は前記融着層を界面として、2次元的な同一平面状に形成される多数の環状模様に加えて前記樹脂発泡体の前記波形状の凹凸構造の山部側と谷部側が異なる色に着色された3次元的な立体模様が形成されてもよい。 By coloring at least one of the colored adhesive layer or the sheet-shaped resin foam having a predetermined thickness facing each other across the fusion layer, or by making both resin foams different colors. In addition to a large number of annular patterns formed in a two-dimensional coplanar shape with the colored adhesive layer or the fusion layer as an interface, the resin foam is combined with the mountain side of the corrugated uneven structure. A three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern may be formed in which the valley side is colored in a different color.
 上下の前記ロールにより前記樹脂発泡体の前記接着層又は前記融着層に形成される湾曲の幅を超えないように、前記樹脂発泡体の前記接着層又は前記融着層の形成位置をずらすか、あるいは前記ロールの出口側でのスライス加工を施す高さを変えることで、前記波形状の凹凸構造の前記山部及び谷部の形成位置を調整して、前記線状模様の大きさを調整して、前記線状模様の大きさが異なる2つのクッション材を得ることが可能であっても良い。このように、上下のロール間の中心高さに相当する位置からオフセットした位置をスライスすることで、線状模様の大きさの異なるクッション材を得ることができる。また、後述する積層体についても同様にスライス位置をオフセットすることで、線状模様の大きさが異なる2つの積層体を得ることが可能になる。 Whether to shift the formation position of the adhesive layer or the fusion layer of the resin foam so as not to exceed the width of the curvature formed on the adhesion layer or the fusion layer of the resin foam by the upper and lower rolls. Alternatively, by changing the height at which the slicing process is performed on the outlet side of the roll, the formation positions of the peaks and valleys of the corrugated uneven structure are adjusted, and the size of the linear pattern is adjusted. Then, it may be possible to obtain two cushioning materials having different sizes of the linear pattern. In this way, by slicing a position offset from a position corresponding to the center height between the upper and lower rolls, cushioning materials having different sizes of linear patterns can be obtained. Further, by similarly offsetting the slice position for the laminated body described later, it is possible to obtain two laminated bodies having different linear pattern sizes.
 第3の発明によれば、意匠性に優れた多数の線状模様を有するクッション材を容易に製造することができる。また、シート状の樹脂発泡体に異なる色の樹脂発泡体を使用することで、線状模様から立体的な3次元模様に変換をすることができる。 According to the third invention, it is possible to easily manufacture a cushion material having a large number of linear patterns having excellent design. Further, by using resin foams of different colors for the sheet-shaped resin foams, it is possible to convert from a linear pattern to a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern.
 また、プロファイルロールによる樹脂発泡体の接着層又は融着層に形成される湾曲の幅を超えないように、プロファイルロール加工前の材料の接着層または融着層の形成位置をずらすか、あるいはロールの出口側でのスライス加工を施す高さを調整することで、線状模様や樹脂発泡体に形成される立体模様の大きさを調整することができる。また、クッション材の裏面の平坦面にシート状樹脂発泡体を貼合することで、意匠性だけでなく、積層体の組立自立性を向上させることができる。さらに断熱性や衝撃吸収性や防湿性などの発泡材料としての基本性能を向上させることができる。 Further, the position of forming the adhesive layer or the fusion layer of the material before the profile roll processing is shifted or the roll is formed so as not to exceed the width of the curvature formed on the adhesion layer or the fusion layer of the resin foam by the profile roll. By adjusting the height at which the slicing process is performed on the outlet side of the resin foam, the size of the linear pattern or the three-dimensional pattern formed on the resin foam can be adjusted. Further, by laminating the sheet-shaped resin foam on the flat surface of the back surface of the cushion material, not only the design property but also the assembly independence of the laminated body can be improved. Further, it is possible to improve the basic performance as a foam material such as heat insulation, shock absorption and moisture resistance.
 上記のように、スライス加工することで、例えば、線状模様や樹脂発泡体により形成される山部側の模様を小さく形成したり、逆に線状模様あるいは樹脂発泡体により形成される山部の模様を大きく形成したりすることができる。これにより、山部側をより強調したり、谷部側を強調したりすることが可能になる。 As described above, by slicing, for example, the pattern on the mountain side formed by the linear pattern or the resin foam can be made smaller, or conversely, the mountain portion formed by the linear pattern or the resin foam. It is possible to form a large pattern of. This makes it possible to emphasize the mountain side more and the valley side more.
 また、第4の発明は、着色された接着層又は融着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の樹脂発泡体の、前記接着層又は融着層とは反対側のそれぞれのシート状の樹脂発泡体の外側に、別のシート状の樹脂発泡体層がさらに接着または融着された4層の樹脂発泡体を用いて、プロファイルロール加工による湾曲形状を維持した状態で、4層中の内層の2層の樹脂発泡体層間の接着層を横断するように前記樹脂発泡体の厚さ方向に垂直な水平方向にスライス加工を行うことで、内層樹脂層の2層のみに山部、谷部を形成して、内層樹脂層と外層樹脂層の樹脂発泡体が一体化することを特徴とする積層体の製造方法である。 Further, the fourth invention is a sheet-like resin foam having a predetermined thickness facing the colored adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer, which is opposite to the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer. Using four layers of resin foam to which another sheet-like resin foam layer is further adhered or fused to the outside of the resin foam of the above, among the four layers while maintaining the curved shape by profile roll processing. By performing slicing in the horizontal direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the resin foam so as to cross the adhesive layer between the two layers of the resin foam layer of the inner layer, only the two layers of the inner layer resin layer are mountainous. It is a method for producing a laminated body, characterized in that a valley portion is formed and a resin foam of an inner layer resin layer and an outer layer resin layer is integrated.
 また、4層のシート状樹脂発泡体を所定条件でプロファイルロール加工時にスライス加工を行うことで、積層体を得ることができる。このようにすることで、クッション材の裏面にシート状発泡体を貼り付けなくても、本願の積層体を得ることが可能となる。 Further, a laminated body can be obtained by slicing the four-layer sheet-shaped resin foam at the time of profile roll processing under predetermined conditions. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the laminate of the present application without sticking the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the cushion material.
 第4の発明によれば、意匠性に優れたクッション材とクッション材の平坦面にシート状樹脂発泡体を融着または接着した積層体を容易に製造することができる。 According to the fourth invention, it is possible to easily manufacture a cushion material having excellent design and a laminate in which a sheet-shaped resin foam is fused or adhered to a flat surface of the cushion material.
 第5の発明は、第1の発明にかかるクッション材の平坦面を対向させて使用するクッション材の使用方法であって、前記クッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を外表面に向け、平坦面を相互に対向させて重ねて支持部材で支持することで立設して使用する、前記線状模様が外表面に多数並んで形成される意匠性と衝撃吸収性を有する衝立としての使用方法である。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is a method of using a cushioning material in which flat surfaces of the cushioning material are opposed to each other according to the first aspect of the invention, and the surface of the cushioning material having a wavy uneven structure is directed toward an outer surface. As a stilt with design and shock absorption, a large number of the linear patterns are formed side by side on the outer surface, which is used by standing upright by stacking flat surfaces facing each other and supporting them with a support member. How to use.
 より具体的には、一対の前記クッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の面同志を相互に反対方向の外側に向け、前記波形状の凹凸構造の裏面である平坦面同士を接触させることで、一方の前記クッション材に形成される前記山部と、他方の前記クッション材に形成される前記谷部が所定距離離間して配置されるとともに、一方の前記クッション材に形成される前記谷部と、他方の前記クッション材に形成される前記山部が所定距離離間して配置されることで、一対の前記クッション材の表面が、相互に略平行な波形状となることを特徴とするクッション材の使用方法とすることができる。前記波形状の凹凸構造を外方に向けることで、積層体の両面が意匠性に優れたものとすることができるため、衝立には、最適に使用することができる。 More specifically, the surfaces of the corrugated uneven structure of the pair of cushioning materials are directed outward in opposite directions, and the flat surfaces that are the back surfaces of the corrugated uneven structure are brought into contact with each other. The mountain portion formed on one of the cushion materials and the valley portion formed on the other cushion material are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the valley portion formed on one of the cushion materials. A cushioning material characterized in that the surfaces of the pair of cushioning materials have a wavy shape substantially parallel to each other by arranging the mountain portions formed on the other cushioning material at a predetermined distance. Can be used as. By directing the wavy concave-convex structure outward, both sides of the laminated body can be made excellent in design, so that it can be optimally used for a tsuitate.
 また、第5の発明は、第1の発明にかかるクッション材を2枚重ねて、機能性を付与したクッション材を積層して使用するクッション材の使用方法であって、前記クッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を相互に重ねることで、前記線状模様が略同一平面上に並んで形成されることを特徴とするクッション材の使用方法であってもよい。前記線状模様が略同一平面上に並んで形成され、前記平面に対する接着層の合計面積の占有率が80%以上であることが望ましい。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is a method of using a cushioning material in which two cushioning materials according to the first invention are stacked and a cushioning material imparted with functionality is laminated, and the wave of the cushioning material is used. A method of using the cushion material may be characterized in that the linear patterns are formed side by side on substantially the same plane by overlapping the forming surfaces of the uneven structure of the shape with each other. It is desirable that the linear patterns are formed side by side on substantially the same plane, and the occupancy rate of the total area of the adhesive layer with respect to the plane is 80% or more.
 より具体的には、一対のクッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の面同志を対向させて、一方のクッション材に形成される前記山部と、他方のクッション材に形成される谷部が対向して配置されるとともに、一方のクッション材に形成される谷部と、他方のクッション材に形成される山部が対向して配置され、それぞれの山部と谷部の中間に配置される線状模様である接着面同士が、略同一平面上に隣接して配置することも可能である。クッション材の波形状の凹凸構造を相互に内方に向けてクッション材を対向配置して使用する使用方法では、積み重ねたクッション材の外表面を平坦な形状として、積み重ね面内に島状に多数露出して形成される接着層に機能性を付与することができる。 More specifically, the mountain portions formed on one cushion material and the valley portions formed on the other cushion material face each other with the surfaces of the wavy uneven structure of the pair of cushion materials facing each other. A line in which the valley portion formed on one cushion material and the mountain portion formed on the other cushion material are arranged so as to face each other and are arranged between the respective peaks and valleys. It is also possible to arrange the bonded surfaces, which are shaped like a pattern, adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane. In the usage method in which the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material is used by arranging the cushion materials facing each other inward, the outer surface of the stacked cushion materials is made into a flat shape, and many islands are formed in the stacked surface. Functionality can be imparted to the adhesive layer formed by exposure.
 前記積層体は、パーテーション材又は衝撃緩衝壁面パネル材として用いることが可能であってもよい。波形状の凹凸構造を外方に向けた場合は意匠性に優れ、波形状の凹凸構造を対向させて内側に向けた場合は表面が平坦で機能性を付与することが可能である。略同一平面上に隣接して配置される前記接着面が、機能性を有する平面を形成してもよい。 The laminate may be used as a partition material or a shock absorbing wall panel material. When the corrugated concavo-convex structure is directed outward, the design is excellent, and when the corrugated concavo-convex structure is opposed to the inside, the surface is flat and it is possible to impart functionality. The adhesive surfaces arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane may form a plane having functionality.
 この発明によれば、2枚のクッション材の波形状を組み合わせることで、パーテーション材あるいは公共施設の内部の壁面パネル材として使用することができる。この際、2枚のクッション材は、接着面を波形状の所定位置に略平面状に配列させることができるので、例えば、接着面に制振性や難燃性を付与しておけば、樹脂発泡体が有するクッション性や遮音性に加えて、接着層が有する制振性や難燃性を重畳することが可能になる。 According to the present invention, by combining the corrugated shapes of two cushioning materials, it can be used as a partition material or a wall panel material inside a public facility. At this time, since the adhesive surfaces of the two cushioning materials can be arranged in a substantially flat shape at predetermined positions in a wavy shape, for example, if the adhesive surfaces are provided with vibration damping properties and flame retardancy, the resin In addition to the cushioning property and sound insulation property of the foam, the vibration damping property and flame retardancy of the adhesive layer can be superimposed.
 また、重ね合わせられたクッション材の接着面は、スライス加工前は、プロファイルロールにより折り畳まれた連続的な曲面形状を有しているが、2つのクッション材にスライス加工後、クッション材が平面形状に展開されることで、スライス加工面が波形状の凹凸構造面となり、クッション材波形状の凹凸構造面の面積が見かけ上増加するため、2枚のクッション材の平面方向の総面積に対するクッション材のスライス加工面の所定高さの位置に形成される接着面の面積の総和は100%となることはない。 Further, the adhesive surface of the overlapped cushioning materials has a continuous curved surface shape folded by a profile roll before slicing, but after slicing into two cushioning materials, the cushioning material has a flat shape. As a result, the sliced surface becomes a wavy uneven structure surface, and the area of the cushion material wavy uneven structure surface increases apparently. Therefore, the cushion material with respect to the total area of the two cushion materials in the plane direction. The total area of the adhesive surfaces formed at the predetermined heights of the sliced surfaces of the above is not 100%.
 すなわち、平面視において、総面積に対する、略同一平面上に隣接して配置される2つのクッション材の接着面の見かけの総占有率が高い方が望ましい。クッション材が重ね合わせられて形成された接着面の合計面積に対する接着面を含む平面全体の面積に対する合計面積の総占有率が80%以上であれば、接着面へ機能性を付与した際に、その機能性をより確実に発揮させることが可能になる。また、接着面の見かけの総占有率が90%以上であれば、さらに望ましい。 That is, in a plan view, it is desirable that the apparent total occupancy ratio of the adhesive surfaces of the two cushioning materials arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane is high with respect to the total area. If the total area occupied by the total area including the adhesive surface with respect to the total area of the adhesive surfaces formed by superimposing the cushioning materials is 80% or more, when the adhesive surface is provided with functionality, It becomes possible to exert its functionality more reliably. Further, it is more desirable if the total apparent occupancy of the adhesive surface is 90% or more.
 また、略同一平面上に隣接して配置される接着面には、機能性を付与することができる。例えば、制振性、難燃性、意匠性などを付与することができる。このように、1枚で使用する場合には、意匠性を利用し装飾性を高め、2枚重ねで使用する場合には、機能性や組立自立性を向上させることができるが、2枚で使用する場合にも意匠性を重視する積層体とすることも可能である。 Further, functionality can be imparted to the adhesive surfaces arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane. For example, vibration damping property, flame retardancy, design property and the like can be imparted. In this way, when using one sheet, it is possible to improve the decorativeness by utilizing the design, and when using two sheets, the functionality and assembly independence can be improved, but with two sheets. It is also possible to make a laminated body that emphasizes design even when it is used.
 このような積層体は、パーテーション材と壁面パネル材のいずれにも用いることが可能である。この際、クッション材の波形状の凹凸構造を相互に反対方向に向けて組み合わせるか、あるいは対向させて組み合わせることで、パーテーション材または、壁面パネル材の仕切り材として使用する場合に、組立自立性を向上させることができる。 Such a laminate can be used as both a partition material and a wall panel material. At this time, by combining the corrugated uneven structures of the cushion materials in opposite directions or in opposition to each other, the assembly independence can be improved when used as a partition material for a partition material or a wall surface panel material. Can be improved.
 第5の発明によれば、2枚のクッション材の波形状を組み合わせることで、パーテーション材あるいは公共施設内部の壁面パネル材として使用することができる。また、クッション材の波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を外表面に向けて使用する場合には、意匠性を向上させることができる。また、波形状の凹凸構造同士を対向させて用いる場合には、2枚のクッション材は、接着面を波形状の所定位置に略平面状に配列させることができるので、接着面に機能性を付与しておけば、機能性を発現することが可能になる。 According to the fifth invention, by combining the corrugated shapes of the two cushion materials, it can be used as a partition material or a wall panel material inside a public facility. Further, when the surface of the cushion material having a wavy uneven structure is used toward the outer surface, the design can be improved. Further, when the corrugated concavo-convex structures are used facing each other, the two cushioning materials can arrange the adhesive surfaces in a substantially flat shape at a predetermined position of the corrugated surface, so that the adhesive surface has functionality. If it is given, it becomes possible to express the functionality.
 具体的には、接着層に静音性や制振性を付与しておけば、樹脂発泡体が有するクッション性や遮音性に加えて、接着層が有する静音性や制振性を重畳することが可能になる。ここで、接着層あるいは融着層に付与する機能としては、機能性の発現を、2枚を相互に組み合わせて使用することを前提としているため、樹脂発泡体の最表面でなくても効果を発揮しやすい物理的機能が望ましい。 Specifically, if the adhesive layer is provided with quietness and vibration damping properties, the quietness and vibration damping properties of the adhesive layer can be superimposed in addition to the cushioning and vibration damping properties of the resin foam. It will be possible. Here, as the function to be imparted to the adhesive layer or the fusional layer, since it is premised that the two sheets are used in combination with each other, the effect can be obtained even if it is not the outermost surface of the resin foam. Physical functions that are easy to exert are desirable.
第6の発明は、第2の発明にかかる積層体を用いた避難所区画の構造であり、前記積層体は、長辺の長さが短辺の2倍の略長方形であり、前記略長方形の長辺を相互に接触させて略正方形状の区画を形成するように床面にベッドとして使用可能な災害用マットとして前記積層体が2枚配置され、さらに前記積層体を、短辺方向に立設した状態で、前記略正方形状の床材としての災害用マットの外周を囲うように、前記積層体の長辺を床面との接触面として、前記立設された積層体の裏面の平坦面の短辺側の端部と短辺側端面の平坦部に固定された固定手段を相互に略直角に当接または嵌合させることを複数回繰り返しで接続固定された接続構造であり、略正方形の一方が開口したコの字型の側壁が形成される区画を少なくとも含むことを特徴とする避難所区画の接続構造である。 The sixth invention is a structure of a shelter section using the laminate according to the second invention, and the laminate has a substantially rectangular shape having a long side twice the short side and the substantially rectangular shape. Two of the laminates are arranged on the floor surface as a disaster mat that can be used as a bed so as to form a substantially square section by contacting the long sides of the laminates with each other, and the laminates are further arranged in the short side direction. In the erected state, the long side of the laminated body is used as a contact surface with the floor surface so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material, and the back surface of the erected laminated body. It is a connection structure in which the fixing means fixed to the short side end surface of the flat surface and the flat portion of the short side end surface are repeatedly connected and fixed abutting or fitting at substantially right angles to each other. It is a connection structure of a shelter section, which includes at least a section in which a U-shaped side wall having one side of a substantially square opening is formed.
 前記積層体の接続固定は、組立時の接続、分解時の分離が容易な積層体の表面に貼着された固定手段として、積層体の表面に貼着されたテープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナのいずれかにより接続固定される避難所区画の接続構造であってもよい。この際、面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。この積層体は、5kg以下通常2kg以下と軽量であるため、簡易な固定手段で固定することが可能になる。 The connection fixing of the laminate is a button fixed to a tape-shaped member attached to the surface of the laminate as a fixing means attached to the surface of the laminate, which can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly. It may be a connection structure of a shelter section which is connected and fixed by any of a shape fastener, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed. At this time, in the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is laminated with an adhesive or an adhesive. Can be fixed to. Since this laminate is as light as 5 kg or less, usually 2 kg or less, it can be fixed by a simple fixing means.
 前記積層体を使用する前記避難所区画の接続構造において、前記積層体の端面の切断面に占める略平行な部分の断面積が最大となるように積層体のプロファイル加工面の変曲点位置を結んで直線状に切断されることで、略長方形状に切断された形成された短辺側端面の平坦部に固定手段が貼合されてもよい。
 ここで、前記積層体のプロファイル加工面を、隣接して複数配置された山部頂部と谷部頂部を交互に通過する曲線の、隣接する山部頂部から山部頂部までの距離を1ピッチとすると、山部頂部あるいは谷部底部から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置すなわち山部頂部と谷部底部の中間あるいは谷部底部と山部頂部の中間の複数の変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断されることで、前記積層体の端面の切断面に占める平行部の断面積が最大となる略長方形状の切断面を得ることが可能になる。
In the connection structure of the evacuation center section using the laminate, the inflection point position of the profiled surface of the laminate is set so that the cross-sectional area of the substantially parallel portion of the cut surface of the end surface of the laminate is maximized. By tying and cutting in a straight line, the fixing means may be attached to the flat portion of the short side end face formed by cutting in a substantially rectangular shape.
Here, the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes the profiled surface of the laminated body through the mountain tops and the valley tops that are arranged adjacent to each other is defined as one pitch. Then, a position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, connecting a plurality of inflection point positions between the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley or between the bottom of the valley and the top of the mountain. By cutting in a substantially straight line, it is possible to obtain a substantially rectangular cut surface having the maximum cross-sectional area of the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the end surface of the laminated body.
 上記の、隣接して複数配置された山部頂部と谷部頂部を交互に通過する曲線における山部と谷部は相互に直交するように千鳥配置をしていることから、山部谷部の周期的構造は、前記の曲線に対して、直交する方向に同様の周期構造を有することになる。したがって、上記の曲線に対して直交する方向の、山部頂部あるいは谷部底部から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置すなわち山部頂部から谷部底部に至る中間あるいは谷部底部から山部頂部に至る中間の変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断することでも、前記積層体の端面の切断面に占める平行部の断面積が最大となる切断面を得ることが可能になる。その結果、前記積層体の端面の切断面に占める略平行な部分の断面積が最大となる略長方形状の切断面を得ることができる。 Since the peaks and valleys in the curve that alternately passes through the peaks and valleys that are arranged adjacent to each other are staggered so as to be orthogonal to each other, the mountain and valleys are arranged in a staggered manner. The periodic structure will have a similar periodic structure in the direction orthogonal to the curve. Therefore, in the direction orthogonal to the above curve, the position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, the middle from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. By cutting in a substantially straight line so as to connect the positions of the inflection points in the middle, it is possible to obtain a cut surface having the maximum cross-sectional area of the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the end surface of the laminated body. As a result, it is possible to obtain a substantially rectangular cut surface having a maximum cross-sectional area of a substantially parallel portion of the cut surface of the end surface of the laminated body.
 前記積層体及び前記クッション材における固定手段で接続固定する平坦面の端部と側端面を比較すると、側端面はプロファイル加工面を含むため、切断位置により、固定手段を貼合する平坦な部分の面積が異なる。そこで、側端面における平行部面積が最も大きい断面を選んでその部分を切断部位にすれば、面ファスナなどの固定手段を貼合する面積を最大化できる。 Comparing the end portion of the flat surface to be connected and fixed by the fixing means in the laminated body and the cushion material and the side end surface, since the side end surface includes the profile processed surface, the flat portion to which the fixing means is bonded depends on the cutting position. The area is different. Therefore, if the cross section having the largest parallel portion area on the side end surface is selected and that portion is used as the cutting portion, the area to which the fixing means such as the surface fastener is attached can be maximized.
 前記避難所区画の接続構造において、前記積層体に代えて、クッション材を使用する避難所区画の接続構造であってもよい。 In the connection structure of the evacuation shelter section, a cushioning material may be used instead of the laminated body.
 第7の発明は、第2の発明にかかる積層体を用いた避難所の区画の形成方法であり、前記積層体は、長辺の長さが短辺の2倍の略長方形であり、前記略長方形の長辺を相互に接触させて略正方形状の区画を形成するように床面にベッドとして使用可能な災害用マットとして前記積層体を2枚配置し、さらに前記積層体を、短辺方向に立設した状態で、前記略正方形状の床材としての前記災害用マットの外周を囲うように、前記積層体の長辺を床面との接触面として、前記立設された積層体の裏面の平坦面の短辺側の端部と短辺側端面の平坦部に固定された固定手段を相互に略直角に複数回当接または嵌合させることで接続固定させて、略正方形の一方が開口したコの字型の側壁を形成して区画することで、避難所の1区画を形成する避難所の区画の形成方法である。 A seventh invention is a method for forming an evacuation shelter section using the laminate according to the second invention, wherein the laminate has a substantially rectangular shape with a long side twice the short side. Two of the laminated bodies are arranged on the floor surface as a disaster mat that can be used as a bed so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are in contact with each other to form a substantially square-shaped section, and the laminated bodies are further arranged on the short sides. The erected laminate with the long side of the laminate as the contact surface with the floor so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material in a state of being erected in the direction. The fixing means fixed to the short side end of the flat surface on the back surface and the flat end of the short side end surface are connected and fixed by abutting or fitting at substantially right angles to each other several times to form a substantially square shape. This is a method of forming a section of an evacuation center that forms one section of the evacuation center by forming a U-shaped side wall that is open on one side.
 前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記略正方形状の第1の区画の床材としての前記災害用マットに隣接して、前記積層体を用いて前記略正方形状の同様の大きさの第2の区画の床材としてベッドとして使用可能な災害用マットを形成して、前記コの字型に形成した区画を第1の区画とすると、前記第1の区画と連続して反対方向に開口し、さらに前記積層体を用いて、コの字型の端部一辺を共有するコの字型の側壁を第2の区画として形成することで、少なくとも2つのコの字型の区画を形成することを含んでもよい。 In the method of forming the section of the shelter, the laminated body is used adjacent to the disaster mat as the floor material of the substantially square first section, and the same size of the substantially square shape is used. When a disaster mat that can be used as a bed as a floor material of the second section is formed and the U-shaped section is used as the first section, the opening is continuous in the opposite direction to the first section. Further, by using the laminated body to form a U-shaped side wall that shares one side of the U-shaped end portion as a second compartment, at least two U-shaped compartments are formed. May include that.
 前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記略正方形状の開口部を順次開口部の開口方向を反対方向に開口したコの字型に形成して区画する側壁部を順次繰り返し形成し、この側壁部に対応して、略正方形状の床材として前記災害用マットを繰り返して形成することで多数の区画を形成してもよい。 In the method of forming the partition of the evacuation center, the substantially square openings are sequentially formed in a U shape in which the opening direction of the openings is opened in the opposite direction, and the side wall portions for partitioning are sequentially and repeatedly formed. A large number of sections may be formed by repeatedly forming the disaster mat as a substantially square floor material corresponding to the portions.
 前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記床材は、前記積層体の平坦面あるいは波形状の凹凸構造面のいずれかを床面に向けて配置し、前記積層体により形成される前記コの字型の側壁部は、前記積層体の模様形成面である波形状の凹凸構造面をコの字型区画の各辺に沿って順に前記積層体を外方、内方、外方に向けて交互に配置されるか、あるいは、内方、外方、内方のいずれかに向けて交互に配置されることが望ましい。前記床材を、前記積層体の平坦面あるいは波形状の凹凸構造面のいずれかを床面に向けて配置するのは、前記床材はベッドとしても使用可能なため、使用者の好みに応じていずれの面を上面として使用するかは使用時に使用者が選択すればよく、例えば、日中は積層体の波形状の凹凸構造面を下側に向けて使用し、夜の就寝時には、波形状の凹凸構造面を上側に向けてベッドとして使用してもよい。 In the method of forming the section of the evacuation shelter, the floor material is formed by arranging either the flat surface or the corrugated uneven structure surface of the laminated body toward the floor surface. The side wall portion of the character shape has a wavy uneven structure surface, which is a pattern forming surface of the laminate, directed outward, inward, and outward in order along each side of the U-shaped section. It is desirable that they are arranged alternately, or that they are arranged alternately toward the inside, the outside, or the inside. The floor material is arranged so that either the flat surface or the corrugated uneven structure surface of the laminate faces the floor surface, because the floor material can also be used as a bed, depending on the preference of the user. Which surface should be used as the upper surface may be selected by the user at the time of use. For example, during the daytime, the corrugated uneven structure surface of the laminated body is used facing downward, and when the bed is at night, the wave is used. It may be used as a bed with the uneven structure surface of the shape facing upward.
 前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記積層体の区画用パーテーション材としての組立時の接続固定は、組立時の接続、分解時の分離が容易なものであれば、特に制限はないが、例えば積層体の表面に貼着されたテープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナにより接続されてもよい。ここで、面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。 In the method for forming the compartment of the evacuation shelter, the connection and fixing of the laminated body as a partition material for the compartment are not particularly limited as long as they can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly. For example, it may be connected by a button-shaped fastener fixed to a tape-shaped member attached to the surface of the laminate, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed. Here, in the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is laminated with an adhesive or an adhesive. Can be fixed to.
 前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記固定手段は、前記積層体の平坦面の端部の向の上方端部から下方端部の所定位置あるいは、前記積層体の短辺の端面の平坦部に対応する部分の上方から下方の所定位置に貼着され、前記平坦面の所定位置に貼着される前記固定手段と、前記端面の平坦部に貼着される前記固定手段を相互に対向当接させるか、あるいは対向嵌合させることで接続されてもよい。 In the method of forming the compartment of the shelter, the fixing means is a predetermined position from the upper end to the lower end of the flat surface of the laminated body in the direction of the end, or the flat portion of the short side of the laminated body. The fixing means, which is attached to a predetermined position from above to below the portion corresponding to the above, and is attached to a predetermined position on the flat surface, and the fixing means, which is attached to the flat portion of the end surface, face each other. They may be connected by touching or facing each other.
 前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記積層体のプロファイル加工面を、山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線の、隣接する山部頂部から山部頂部までの距離を1ピッチとすると、山部頂部あるいは谷部底部から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置すなわち山部頂部から谷部底部に至る中間位置あるいは谷部底部から山部頂部に至る中間位置を結ぶように直線状に切断されるか、またはこれらの中間位置が変曲点である場合には、変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断されることで、前記積層体の切断面に占める平行部の断面積が最大となるように略長形状に形成された短辺側端面の切断面に固定手段が貼合されてもよい。ここで、側端面における平行部面積が最大となる切断面に、面ファスナなどの固定手段を固定すれば、積層体をしっかり固定することができる。 In the method of forming the section of the evacuation center, the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes through the profiled surface of the laminated body at the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is defined as 1 pitch. Then, a straight line is connected so as to connect a position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, an intermediate position from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or an intermediate position from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. It is cut, or when these intermediate positions are inflection points, it is cut in a substantially straight line so as to connect the inflection point positions, thereby cutting the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the laminated body. The fixing means may be attached to the cut surface of the short side end face formed in a substantially long shape so as to maximize the area. Here, if a fixing means such as a hook-and-loop fastener is fixed to the cut surface having the maximum parallel portion area on the side end surface, the laminated body can be firmly fixed.
 前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記積層体に代えて、第1の発明にかかる表面に線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材を使用してもよい。 In the method of forming the section of the shelter, instead of the laminated body, a cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface according to the first invention may be used.
 第7の発明によれば、第2の発明の積層体を用いて、避難所の区画を形成することができる。また、クッション材の外表面全体の寸法形状が積層体と同様であれば、積層体と同様に用いることができる。さらに、本発明の避難所の区画の形成方法により、避難所の区画を組み立てるに際して、本発明の積層体またはクッション材は軽量であり、特別な工具使用せずに面ファスナの位置を視認しただけで、子供でも容易に直感的に組み立てることが可能である。 According to the seventh invention, the evacuation shelter section can be formed by using the laminate of the second invention. Further, if the size and shape of the entire outer surface of the cushion material is the same as that of the laminated body, it can be used in the same manner as the laminated body. Further, according to the method of forming the shelter compartment of the present invention, when assembling the shelter compartment, the laminate or the cushioning material of the present invention is lightweight, and the position of the hook-and-loop fastener is only visually recognized without using a special tool. Therefore, even children can easily and intuitively assemble it.
 第8の発明は、第7の発明にかかる避難所の区画の形成方法により形成した避難所区画の分解収納方法であって、前記積層体の平坦面の両側の所定位置に固定手段が貼合され、前記平坦面の固定手段配設位置に対応させて壁面の所定位置に固定手段が配設され、避難所区画を形成した前記積層体を分解後、前記積層体の平坦面を壁面に向けて、前記壁面の固定手段に、1枚目の前記積層体の固定手段を固定することで、前記積層体を前記壁面に立設固定し、さらに前記壁面に立設固定した積層体の裏面の波形状の凹凸構造の表面に、2枚目の前記積層体を1枚目の積層体と端面を揃えて波形状の凹凸構造の表面を重ねることで2枚目を積み重ねて、前記積層体の3枚目と4枚目とを、それぞれの積層面である平坦面、波形状の凹凸構造面を1枚目、2枚目と同様の順にそれぞれの積層面と端面を揃えて立設し、さらにその後も、前記積層体を同様の手順で、積み重ねる枚数に応じて、前記積層体を順次繰り返して積み重ねて立設して、前記立設されたそれぞれの積層体の端面の所定位置には固定手段が貼合され、前記積層体の端面の固定手段を、別の壁面に固定された所定長さを有する固定手段にて固定することを特徴とする避難所区画の分解収納方法である。 An eighth invention is a method of disassembling and storing an evacuation shelter compartment formed by the method of forming an evacuation shelter compartment according to the seventh invention, in which fixing means are attached to predetermined positions on both sides of a flat surface of the laminated body. Then, the fixing means is arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the position of the fixing means on the flat surface, and after disassembling the laminated body forming the evacuation center section, the flat surface of the laminated body is directed toward the wall surface. By fixing the first fixing means of the laminated body to the wall surface fixing means, the laminated body is erected and fixed to the wall surface, and further, the back surface of the laminated body is erected and fixed to the wall surface. The second layer is stacked on the surface of the wavy uneven structure by aligning the end face with the first layer and overlapping the surface of the wavy uneven structure. The 3rd and 4th sheets are erected with the flat surface and the wavy uneven structure surface, which are the respective laminated surfaces, in the same order as the 1st and 2nd sheets, with the respective laminated surfaces and end faces aligned. Further, after that, the laminated bodies are sequentially and repeatedly stacked and erected according to the number of stacked bodies in the same procedure, and fixed at a predetermined position on the end face of each of the erected laminated bodies. It is a method of disassembling and storing a shelter section, characterized in that the means are bonded and the fixing means of the end face of the laminated body is fixed by the fixing means having a predetermined length fixed to another wall surface.
 前記避難所区画の分解収納方法において、前記積層体の分解収納に用いる固定手段は、前記積層体の組立に用いた固定手段と同一の、組立時の接続、分解時の分離が容易な固定手段であり、前記固定手段は、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナのいずれかであってもよい。面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。 In the method of disassembling and storing the shelter section, the fixing means used for disassembling and storing the laminated body is the same as the fixing means used for assembling the laminated body, and the fixing means that can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly. The fixing means may be any of a button-shaped fastener fixed to the tape-shaped member, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed. In the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to.
 前記避難所区画の分解収納方法において、前記積層体のプロファイル加工面を、山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線の、隣接する山部頂部から山部頂部までの距離を1ピッチとすると、山部頂部あるいは谷部底部から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置すなわち山部頂部から谷部底部に至る中間位置あるいは谷部底部から山部頂部に至る中間位置を結ぶように直線状に切断されるか、またはこれらの中間位置が変曲点である場合には、変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断されることで、前記積層体の切断面に占める平行部の断面積が最大となるように形成された短辺側端面の切断面に固定手段が貼合されてもよい。ここで、側端面における平行部面積が最も大きい断面に、面ファスナなどの固定手段を固定すれば、積層体の端面の固定手段を、別の壁面に固定された所定長さを有する固定手段にてしっかり固定することができる。 In the disassembly and storage method of the evacuation center section, the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes through the profiled surface of the laminated body at the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is set to 1 pitch. Then, a straight line is connected so as to connect a position deviated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, an intermediate position from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or an intermediate position from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. It is cut, or when these intermediate positions are inflection points, it is cut in a substantially straight line so as to connect the inflection point positions, thereby cutting the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the laminated body. The fixing means may be attached to the cut surface of the short side end surface formed so as to maximize the area. Here, if a fixing means such as a hook-and-loop fastener is fixed to the cross section having the largest parallel portion area on the side end face, the fixing means for the end face of the laminated body can be changed to a fixing means having a predetermined length fixed to another wall surface. Can be firmly fixed.
 前記避難所区画の分解収納方法において、前記積層体に代えて第1の発明にかかる表面に線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材を使用してもよい。 In the method of disassembling and storing the shelter section, a cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface according to the first invention may be used instead of the laminated body.
 第8の発明によれば、第7の発明で形成した避難所の区画を分解して収納することができる。また、この避難所区画の積層体の分解収納方法において、積層体に代えて、クッション材を使用しても、クッション材の外表面全体の寸法形状が積層体と同様であれば、積層体と同様に用いることができる。また、第8の発明の避難所区画の積層体の分解収納方法においても、本発明の積層体またはクッション材は軽量であり、特別な工具使用せずに面ファスナの位置を視認しただけで、子供でも容易に直感的に分解収納することができる。 According to the eighth invention, the shelter section formed by the seventh invention can be disassembled and stored. Further, in the method of disassembling and storing the laminated body of the evacuation center section, even if a cushion material is used instead of the laminated body, if the dimensions and shape of the entire outer surface of the cushion material are the same as those of the laminated body, the laminated body It can be used in the same way. Further, also in the method of disassembling and storing the laminated body of the evacuation shelter section of the eighth invention, the laminated body or the cushioning material of the present invention is lightweight, and the position of the hook-and-loop fastener is only visually recognized without using a special tool. Even children can easily and intuitively disassemble and store it.
 第9の発明は、第7の発明にかかる避難所の区画の形成方法で用いられた積層体を用いた避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法であって、前記積層体の平坦面の両側の所定位置に固定手段が貼合され、前記積層体の短辺を壁面に平行な立設面として、長辺方向が隣接するように前記積層体を連続配置した場合における前記積層体の前記平坦面の固定手段配設位置に対応させて、壁面の所定位置に固定手段が配設され、前記避難所区画を形成した積層体を分解後、前記積層体の平坦面を壁面に向けて、前記積層体の固定手段配設位置に対応させて壁面の所定位置に配設された固定手段にて、前記積層体の波形状の凹凸構造面を室内側に向けて固定し、さらに別の積層体の平坦面を壁面に向けて、同様に前記壁面の所定位置に配設された固定手段にて、別の積層体を壁面に、最初の積層体と連続するように波形状の凹凸構造面を室内側に向けて固定し、さらに、次々と別の積層体を同様に直前に壁面固定した積層体と連続するように壁面固定することで衝撃緩衝壁面パネルを形成することを特徴とする避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法である。 A ninth invention is a method for forming a shock absorbing wall surface panel of an evacuation center using the laminate used in the method for forming an evacuation shelter section according to the seventh invention, and both sides of a flat surface of the laminate. The flatness of the laminated body when the fixing means is laminated at a predetermined position and the laminated bodies are continuously arranged so that the short sides of the laminated body are vertical surfaces parallel to the wall surface and the long sides are adjacent to each other. Fixing means is arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the arrangement position of the fixing means on the surface, and after disassembling the laminate forming the evacuation center section, the flat surface of the laminate is directed to the wall surface, and the above. The wavy uneven structure surface of the laminated body is fixed toward the indoor side by the fixing means arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the arrangement position of the fixing means of the laminated body, and yet another laminated body is fixed. With the flat surface of the wall facing the wall surface, another laminated body is formed on the wall surface by a fixing means similarly arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface, and a wavy uneven structure surface is formed so as to be continuous with the first laminated body. An evacuation center characterized in that a shock absorbing wall panel is formed by fixing the laminated body toward the indoor side and then fixing another laminated body to the wall surface so as to be continuous with the laminated body fixed to the wall surface immediately before. This is a method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel.
 避難所の区画の形成方法で用いられた積層体を用いた避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法であって、前記積層体を分解して前記衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成に用いる固定手段は、前記積層体の組立に用いる固定手段と同一の、組立時の接続、分解時の分離が容易な固定手段であり、前記固定手段は、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナのいずれかであってもよい。面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。 A method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation center using a laminated body used in a method for forming a section of an evacuation center, wherein the fixing means used for forming the shock absorbing wall panel by disassembling the laminated body is. The same fixing means used for assembling the laminated body is a fixing means that can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly, and the fixing means is a button-shaped fastener, a magnet, or a minute piece fixed to a tape-shaped member. It may be any of the hook-and-loop fasteners on which a large number of protrusions are formed. In the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to.
 前記衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法において、前記積層体に代えて第1の発明にかかる表面に線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材を使用してもよい。 In the method for forming the shock absorbing wall surface panel, instead of the laminated body, a cushion material having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface according to the first invention may be used.
 第9の発明によれば、避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法を得ることができる。また、この避難所区画の積層体を用いた衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法において、積層体に代えてクッション材を使用しても、積層体を使用した場合と同様の効果を得ることができる。 According to the ninth invention, it is possible to obtain a method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation shelter. Further, in the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel using the laminated body of the evacuation center section, even if a cushioning material is used instead of the laminated body, the same effect as when the laminated body is used can be obtained.
 第4の発明から第9の発明によれば、クッション材や積層体を用いた意匠性に優れた避難所の区画用パーテーション等の組立が、工具や組立部品などを使用せずに組立可能である。また、クッション材や積層体が軽量であるため、老人や子供でも容易に組立ができる。また、避難所区画を分解する場合には、同様の理由により容易に短時間で分解でき、壁面に容易に収納できる。さらに、避難所区画を解体した場合には、避難所の壁面に衝撃緩衝壁面パネルを容易に形成することができる。逆に言うと、通常時には、避難所の壁面に衝撃緩衝壁面パネルとして使用し、非常時には避難所の区画用パーテーションや床材のいずれにも使用することが可能になる。 According to the fourth to ninth inventions, it is possible to assemble a partition for a shelter with excellent design using a cushion material or a laminate without using tools or assembly parts. is there. In addition, since the cushion material and the laminate are lightweight, even elderly people and children can easily assemble them. Further, when disassembling the evacuation center section, it can be easily disassembled in a short time for the same reason and can be easily stored on the wall surface. Further, when the evacuation shelter section is dismantled, a shock absorbing wall panel can be easily formed on the wall surface of the evacuation shelter. Conversely, it can be used as a shock absorbing wall panel on the wall surface of the evacuation shelter in normal times, and can be used as a partition for partitioning in the evacuation shelter or as a floor material in an emergency.
 これらの発明に用いるクッション材や積層体はポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体からなり、融着面または接着面を着色することで波形状の凹凸構造面に線状模様を形成することに成功したものであり、軽量で意匠性に優れ、断熱性や衝撃緩衝性、防湿性に優れるものである。接着層または融着層に制振性や遮音性等の機能性を持たせることも可能になる。また、この積層体に所定の寸法形状を付与すれば、区画用パーテーションの組立作業性にも優れたものとなり、組立工具や組立部品を使用せずに簡単に組立が可能な区画用パーテーションを得ることができる。さらに、前述のように、積層体を用いた避難所区画の接続構造、積層体を用いた避難所区画の形成方法と避難所区画の分解収納方法、避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法を得ることができる。 The cushioning material and the laminate used in these inventions are made of polyolefin resin foam, and have succeeded in forming a linear pattern on a wavy uneven structure surface by coloring the fused surface or the adhesive surface. It is lightweight, has excellent design, and has excellent heat insulation, shock cushioning, and moisture resistance. It is also possible to give the adhesive layer or the fusion layer functionality such as vibration damping property and sound insulation property. Further, if a predetermined size and shape are given to the laminated body, the assembly workability of the partition partition becomes excellent, and a partition partition that can be easily assembled without using assembly tools or assembly parts can be obtained. be able to. Further, as described above, a connection structure of the evacuation shelter section using the laminate, a method of forming the evacuation shelter section using the laminate, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation shelter section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation shelter section. Can be obtained.
 本発明によれば、軽量で意匠性に優れ、接着層または融着層に制振性や静音性を持たせることが可能なポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体からなる波形状の凹凸構造面に線状模様を有するクッション材、これを用いた積層体、クッション材及び積層体の製造方法、クッション材の使用方法、さらに、組立工具や組立部品を使用せずに簡単に組立が可能な積層体を用いた避難所区画の接続構造、積層体を用いた避難所区画の形成方法、避難所区画の分解収納方法及び避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, a linear pattern is formed on a wavy uneven structure surface made of a polyolefin resin foam which is lightweight, has excellent designability, and can give vibration damping and quietness to an adhesive layer or a fusion layer. Evacuation using a laminated body that can be easily assembled without using an assembly tool or an assembly part, as well as a cushion material to have, a laminate using the same, a method of manufacturing the cushion material and the laminate, a method of using the cushion material, and the evacuation using the laminate. It is possible to provide a connection structure of a place section, a method of forming an evacuation center section using a laminated body, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation center section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation center section.
クッション材1を示す表面側斜視図。The front side perspective view which shows the cushion material 1. クッション材1を示す裏面側斜視図。The back side perspective view which shows the cushion material 1. クッション材1を示す平面図。The plan view which shows the cushion material 1. クッション材1の断面図であり、図2のA-A線断面図。It is sectional drawing of the cushion material 1, and is the sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 樹脂発泡体製造装置20を示す概略図。The schematic diagram which shows the resin foam manufacturing apparatus 20. ロール31a、31bを示す正面図。Front view showing rolls 31a and 31b. ロール31a、31bの側面図。Side view of rolls 31a and 31b. ロール31a、31bによりクッション材1を製造する方法を示す図。The figure which shows the method of manufacturing the cushion material 1 by the roll 31a, 31b. 図6AのC部拡大図。FIG. 6A is an enlarged view of part C. 積層体1aの断面図。Sectional drawing of the laminated body 1a. クッション材1を対向して配置した状態を示す図。The figure which shows the state which the cushion material 1 is arranged facing each other. 積層構造40の断面図。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the laminated structure 40. クッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造を外表面に向けて配置した状態を示す図。It is a figure which shows the state which arranged the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material 1 toward the outer surface. 積層構造40aの断面図。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the laminated structure 40a. 積層構造40の断面図であり、図8BのF-F線断面図。It is sectional drawing of the laminated structure 40, and is the sectional drawing taken on line FF of FIG. クッション材1cを示す平面図。The plan view which shows the cushion material 1c. クッション材1dを示す平面図。The plan view which shows the cushion material 1d. クッション材1dを示す側面図。The side view which shows the cushion material 1d. 避難所区画50を示す図。The figure which shows the shelter section 50. 積層体の切断位置と切断された端部側面の断面の形状の関係を示す図であって、積層体のプロファイル加工面から見た切断位置を示す図。It is a figure which shows the relationship of the cutting position of the laminated body and the shape of the cross section of the cut end side surface, and is the figure which shows the cutting position seen from the profile processing surface of a laminated body. 山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線上で切断した場合の切断面を示す図。The figure which shows the cut surface at the time of cutting on the curve which passes alternately the top of a mountain part and the bottom of a valley part. 山部頂部と谷部底部から、(1/4)ピッチ離れた変曲点位置を直線状に結ぶように切断し場合の切断面を示す図。The figure which shows the cut surface at the time of cutting so that the position of the inflection point separated by (1/4) pitch from the top of a mountain portion and the bottom of a valley portion is cut in a straight line. クッション材1の収納方法を示す正面図。The front view which shows the storage method of a cushion material 1. クッション材1の収納方法を示す平面図。The plan view which shows the storage method of a cushion material 1. 衝撃緩衝壁面パネル60を示す正面図。The front view which shows the shock absorbing wall panel 60. 衝撃緩衝壁面パネル60を示す平面図。The plan view which shows the shock-cushioning wall surface panel 60. 面ファスナ53c、53d近傍の拡大図。Enlarged view of the hook-and-loop fasteners 53c and 53d. 区画用パーテーションの組立自立性評価の略直角の接続試験の状況を示す図。The figure which shows the state of the connection test which is substantially right angle of the assembly independence evaluation of a partition for a partition. 区画用パーテーションの各部の寸法等を示す図。The figure which shows the dimension of each part of a partition for a section. 山部5aを谷部7a側に反転して合わせる状態を示す図。The figure which shows the state which inverts the mountain part 5a to the valley part 7a side, and puts it together. 山部5aを谷部7a側に反転して合わせる状態を示す図。The figure which shows the state which inverts the mountain part 5a to the valley part 7a side, and puts it together.
(第1の実施形態)
 以下、図面を参照しながら、本発明の実施形態について説明する。図1Aは、クッション材1の表面斜視図、図1Bはクッション材の裏面斜視図、図2はクッション材1の平面模式図である。
(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 1A is a front perspective view of the cushion material 1, FIG. 1B is a back perspective view of the cushion material, and FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view of the cushion material 1.
 クッション材1は、ポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体によって形成される。クッション材1の一方の面(表面3)には、山部5および谷部7が形成される。山部5および谷部7は、縦横に交互に周期的に配置される。すなわち、クッション材1の表面3は、波形状の凹凸構造を有し、山部5が所定間隔で形成され、山部5同士の間に谷部7が形成され、山部5及び谷部7が、それぞれいわゆる千鳥配置で設けられる。したがって、山部5の縦横に隣接する部位には谷部7が形成され、谷部7の縦横に隣接する部位には山部5が形成される。 The cushion material 1 is formed of a polyolefin resin foam. A mountain portion 5 and a valley portion 7 are formed on one surface (surface 3) of the cushion material 1. The peaks 5 and valleys 7 are periodically arranged vertically and horizontally alternately. That is, the surface 3 of the cushion material 1 has a wavy uneven structure, the peaks 5 are formed at predetermined intervals, valleys 7 are formed between the peaks 5, and the peaks 5 and 7 are formed. However, each is provided in a so-called staggered arrangement. Therefore, a valley portion 7 is formed in a portion vertically and horizontally adjacent to the mountain portion 5, and a mountain portion 5 is formed in a portion vertically and horizontally adjacent to the valley portion 7.
 また、クッション材1の他方の面(裏面9)には、山部5及び谷部7は形成されず、平坦である。すなわち、クッション材1は、表面3にのみ、山部5と谷部7が形成される。 Further, the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7 are not formed on the other surface (back surface 9) of the cushion material 1 and are flat. That is, the cushion material 1 has peaks 5 and valleys 7 formed only on the surface 3.
 図3は、図2のA-A線断面図である。図示したように、山部5は厚さが厚い部位であり、谷部7は厚さが薄い部位となる。なお、斜め方向に隣接する山部5同士の間(斜め方向に隣接する谷部7同士の間)には、山部5と谷部7の厚さの略中間の厚さの稜が形成される。すなわち、クッション材1の表面の波形状の凹凸構造は、このように滑らかに連続して形成される。 FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. As shown in the figure, the mountain portion 5 is a thick portion, and the valley portion 7 is a thin portion. It should be noted that a ridge having a thickness substantially intermediate between the thicknesses of the mountain portions 5 and the valley portions 7 is formed between the mountain portions 5 adjacent to each other in the diagonal direction (between the valley portions 7 adjacent to each other in the diagonal direction). To. That is, the wavy uneven structure on the surface of the cushion material 1 is formed smoothly and continuously in this way.
 また、クッション材1は、山部5を形成する樹脂発泡体15aと、谷部7を形成する15bとが積層され、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの積層面に形成される接着層17を具備する。なお、以下の説明では、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの積層面に接着層17が形成される例を説明するが、接着層17に代えて融着層であってもよい。接着層は着色されていない場合には、融着層と同様に、樹脂発泡体15a、15bとほぼ同色の白色に認識される。なお、通常、クッション材の断面は視認できないので、着色された接着層または融着層は、後述するように多数の環状の線状模様として観察される。 Further, the cushion material 1 includes an adhesive layer 17 formed on the laminated surface of the resin foams 15a and 15b by laminating the resin foam 15a forming the peak portion 5 and the resin foam 15b forming the valley portion 7. .. In the following description, an example in which the adhesive layer 17 is formed on the laminated surface of the resin foams 15a and 15b will be described, but a fusion layer may be used instead of the adhesive layer 17. When the adhesive layer is not colored, it is recognized as white, which is substantially the same color as the resin foams 15a and 15b, like the fusion layer. Since the cross section of the cushion material is usually invisible, the colored adhesive layer or fusion layer is observed as a large number of annular linear patterns as described later.
 樹脂発泡体15a、15bの積層面に、接着剤による接着層17が形成される場合には、ウレタン樹脂、酢酸ビニルエマルジョン、アクリル樹脂、シリコーン樹脂及び変性シリコーン樹脂の少なくとも一種の可撓性樹脂を主成分として含有する接着剤を使用することができる。特に、ウレタン樹脂、シリコーン樹脂及び変性シリコーン樹脂からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも一種の可撓性樹脂を主成分として含有する接着剤を使用することで、クッション材1に制振性を付与することができる。また、接着層17に、アクリル酸エステル系重合体と含ハロゲンリン酸エステルと無機系難燃剤を必須成分として含有する接着剤を使用することもできる。このようにすることで、クッション材1に難燃性と制振性を付与することができる。このように、クッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造は、接着層17(又は融着層)に機能性を付与したものであってもよい。 When the adhesive layer 17 is formed by an adhesive on the laminated surface of the resin foams 15a and 15b, at least one kind of flexible resin such as urethane resin, vinyl acetate emulsion, acrylic resin, silicone resin and modified silicone resin is used. An adhesive contained as a main component can be used. In particular, by using an adhesive containing at least one flexible resin selected from the group consisting of urethane resin, silicone resin and modified silicone resin as a main component, vibration damping property is imparted to the cushion material 1. Can be done. Further, an adhesive containing an acrylic acid ester-based polymer, a halogen-containing phosphoric acid ester, and an inorganic flame retardant as essential components can also be used in the adhesive layer 17. By doing so, it is possible to impart flame retardancy and vibration damping property to the cushion material 1. As described above, the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material 1 may be one in which the adhesive layer 17 (or the fusion layer) is provided with functionality.
 波形状の凹凸構造の表面3の所定高さの部分には、裏面9に略平行に形成された接着層17が露出する。接着層17によって、平面視において、多数の環状の線状模様11が相互に所定間隔離間して形成される。線状模様11は、波形状の凹凸構造の山部5と谷部7とを仕切り、それぞれの山部5を囲むように山部5と谷部7の間に所定高さで環状に形成され、意匠性と防湿性に優れる。すなわち、クッション材1の表面3は、線状模様11より上側の樹脂発泡体15aにより形成される山部5と、線状模様11が形成される線状模様形成部13と、線状模様11より下側の樹脂発泡体15bにより形成される谷部7との3つの部分に区画される。なお、谷部7は、隣接する谷部7同士で相互に連続して一体になる。 An adhesive layer 17 formed substantially parallel to the back surface 9 is exposed at a predetermined height portion of the front surface 3 of the wavy uneven structure. The adhesive layer 17 forms a large number of annular linear patterns 11 at predetermined intervals from each other in a plan view. The linear pattern 11 partitions the peaks 5 and valleys 7 having a wavy uneven structure, and is formed in an annular shape at a predetermined height between the peaks 5 and the valleys 7 so as to surround the respective peaks 5. , Excellent in design and moisture resistance. That is, the surface 3 of the cushion material 1 has a mountain portion 5 formed by the resin foam 15a above the linear pattern 11, a linear pattern forming portion 13 on which the linear pattern 11 is formed, and a linear pattern 11. It is partitioned into three portions with a valley portion 7 formed by the lower resin foam 15b. The valley portions 7 are continuously integrated with each other in the adjacent valley portions 7.
 樹脂発泡体15a、15bは、ポリエチレン、低密度ポリエチレン、高密度ポリエチレン、エチレン酢酸ビニルコポリマー、又はポリプロピレン樹脂の少なくともいずれか、あるいはこれらの2種以上の混合物であることが望ましい。この際、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの発泡倍率は20倍から40倍であることが望ましい。特に、樹脂発泡体15a、15bは、ポリエチレン樹脂であることが望ましい。このポリエチレン樹脂は、JIS K6767に基づく、圧縮永久歪みが3.0%~7.4%であり、試験温度25℃における25%圧縮時の圧縮応力が34kPa~56kPaであることが望ましい。 The resin foams 15a and 15b are preferably at least one of polyethylene, low-density polyethylene, high-density polyethylene, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, or polypropylene resin, or a mixture of two or more thereof. At this time, it is desirable that the foaming ratios of the resin foams 15a and 15b are 20 to 40 times. In particular, it is desirable that the resin foams 15a and 15b are polyethylene resins. It is desirable that this polyethylene resin has a compression set of 3.0% to 7.4% and a compressive stress of 34 kPa to 56 kPa at 25% compression at a test temperature of 25 ° C. based on JIS K6767.
 なお、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの圧縮応力は、JIS K6767:1999における、圧縮応力歪みISO3386-1による圧縮応力の試験にて測定される。この際、試験機の圧縮板の移動速度は1分当たり材料厚さの約50%とし、試験温度は25℃で、材料厚さの25%圧縮時の圧縮応力が測定される。 The compressive stress of the resin foams 15a and 15b is measured by the compressive stress test by the compressive stress strain ISO3386-1 in JIS K6767: 1999. At this time, the moving speed of the compression plate of the testing machine is about 50% of the material thickness per minute, the test temperature is 25 ° C., and the compressive stress at the time of 25% compression of the material thickness is measured.
 また、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの圧縮永久歪みは、JIS K6767:1999における、ISO1856による試験により測定される。試験片を25%歪んだ状態に圧縮し、温度23℃±2℃において22時間放置し、圧縮終了後24時間後の厚さを測定することで圧縮永久歪みを得ることができる。 The compression set of the resin foams 15a and 15b is measured by a test according to ISO1856 in JIS K6767: 1999. A permanent compression strain can be obtained by compressing the test piece into a state of being distorted by 25%, leaving it at a temperature of 23 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 22 hours, and measuring the thickness 24 hours after the completion of compression.
 このように、樹脂発泡体15a、15bをポリエチレン樹脂とすることで、クッション材1の吸湿性(吸水率)を低下させることができる。なお、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの吸水率は、ISO2896 B法により測定される。なお、両面または片面にスキン層が形成される試料の場合には、吸水率は、下記の計算式により求めることができる。
Qs=(W1-W2)/A
 Qs:吸水率(g/cm
 W1:100mm×100mmに切断直後の試験片の質量(g)
 W2:60℃で24時間乾燥後の試験片の質量(g)
 A:試験片の面積(cm
なお、本発明では、ポリエチレンの吸水率は、0.03mg/cm以下であることが望ましい。
In this way, by using the resin foams 15a and 15b as polyethylene resin, the hygroscopicity (water absorption rate) of the cushion material 1 can be lowered. The water absorption rates of the resin foams 15a and 15b are measured by the ISO2896 B method. In the case of a sample in which a skin layer is formed on both sides or one side, the water absorption rate can be calculated by the following formula.
Qs = (W1-W2) / A
Qs: Water absorption rate (g / cm 2 )
W1: Mass (g) of the test piece immediately after cutting to 100 mm × 100 mm
W2: Mass (g) of test piece after drying at 60 ° C. for 24 hours
A: Area of test piece (cm 2 )
In the present invention, the water absorption rate of polyethylene is preferably 0.03 mg / cm 2 or less.
 また、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの、MD方向の引張強さは273kPa~495kPa、TD方向の引張強さは201kPa~333kPaであることが望ましい。また、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの、MD方向の伸び値は92%~100%、TD方向の伸び値は114%~120%であることが望ましい。なお、引張強さ及び伸び値は、ISO1798に準じて、500mm/minの試験速度で行った試験の破断時の引張強さ及び伸び値により得られる。 Further, it is desirable that the tensile strengths of the resin foams 15a and 15b in the MD direction are 273 kPa to 495 kPa and the tensile strength in the TD direction is 201 kPa to 333 kPa. Further, it is desirable that the elongation values of the resin foams 15a and 15b in the MD direction are 92% to 100% and the elongation values in the TD direction are 114% to 120%. The tensile strength and elongation value are obtained from the tensile strength and elongation value at break of the test conducted at a test speed of 500 mm / min according to ISO1798.
 また、樹脂発泡体15a、15bには、消臭剤としてシリカ、リン酸ジルコニウム、ゼオライト、硫酸亜鉛、又は硫酸ジルコニウムのいずれかを、樹脂成分100質量部に対して、0.5質量部から5質量部の範囲で含んでもよい。このように消臭剤を含有させて、消臭機能を付与することもできる。 Further, in the resin foams 15a and 15b, any one of silica, zirconium phosphate, zeolite, zinc sulfate, or zirconium sulfate is added as a deodorant to 100 parts by mass of the resin component from 0.5 parts by mass to 5 parts by mass. It may be included in the range of parts by mass. In this way, a deodorant can be contained to impart a deodorizing function.
 次に、クッション材1の製造方法について説明する。まず、樹脂発泡体15a、15bを製造する。図4は、樹脂発泡体製造装置20を示す図である。樹脂発泡体製造装置20は、主に、押し出し機21、ロール成形機23、加熱炉25及び巻き取り機27等から構成される。 Next, the manufacturing method of the cushion material 1 will be described. First, the resin foams 15a and 15b are produced. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a resin foam manufacturing apparatus 20. The resin foam manufacturing apparatus 20 is mainly composed of an extrusion machine 21, a roll forming machine 23, a heating furnace 25, a winding machine 27, and the like.
 例えば、押し出し機21に、原料樹脂(例えばポリエチレン樹脂)と、顔料、化学発泡剤と架橋剤を含むマスターバッチを投入して、所定幅のシート形状に押出を行う。次に、ロール成形機23を通過させることで、材料厚さと幅を調整する。さらに、加熱炉25において、金網製のコンベア上にて、所定温度(例えば190℃から240℃)の範囲で、炉の奥側に行くほど、徐々に温度が上昇するように設定された炉内に搬送する。加熱炉25においては、まず架橋剤を熱分解させて、ポリエチレン樹脂を架橋した後、化学発泡剤を熱分解させて所定の発泡倍率(例えば30倍)で所定のシート厚さ(望ましくは15mm~20mm)の樹脂発泡体15a、15bを得ることができる。 For example, a master batch containing a raw material resin (for example, polyethylene resin), a pigment, a chemical foaming agent, and a cross-linking agent is put into an extruder 21 and extruded into a sheet shape having a predetermined width. Next, the material thickness and width are adjusted by passing through the roll forming machine 23. Further, in the heating furnace 25, the inside of the furnace is set so that the temperature gradually rises toward the inner side of the furnace within a predetermined temperature (for example, 190 ° C. to 240 ° C.) on a wire mesh conveyor. To transport to. In the heating furnace 25, the cross-linking agent is first thermally decomposed, the polyethylene resin is cross-linked, and then the chemical foaming agent is thermally decomposed to obtain a predetermined sheet thickness (preferably 15 mm or more) at a predetermined foaming ratio (for example, 30 times). 20 mm) resin foams 15a and 15b can be obtained.
 なお、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの製造にあたっては、架橋剤として、DCP(ジクミルパーオキサイド)を使用することができる。この際、気泡核剤は使用せずに、化学発泡剤としてADCAを使用することができる。一般的には、核剤は、クエン酸モノNa、界面活性剤、シリコーンオイル等物理核材として炭酸ガスを使用する場合もある。融着層を黄色に変色させる場合には、化学発泡剤はADCAを用いることが望ましい。 In the production of the resin foams 15a and 15b, DCP (dicumyl peroxide) can be used as a cross-linking agent. At this time, ADCA can be used as a chemical foaming agent without using a bubble nucleating agent. In general, as the nucleating agent, carbon dioxide gas may be used as a physical nucleating material such as mono-Na citrate, a surfactant, and silicone oil. When the fused layer is discolored yellow, it is desirable to use ADCA as the chemical foaming agent.
 次に、得られた樹脂発泡体15a、15bを融着又は接着によって積層させる。なお、接着又は融着する樹脂発泡体15a、15bは、同じ厚みであってもよく、異なる厚みであってもよい。 Next, the obtained resin foams 15a and 15b are laminated by fusion or adhesion. The resin foams 15a and 15b to be adhered or fused may have the same thickness or different thicknesses.
 例えば、樹脂発泡体15a、15bのそれぞれの面に接着剤を塗布して、接着剤を塗布していない反対面を、プレスで押圧するか、樹脂発泡体15a、15bのいずれか一方の発泡体を、接着剤を塗布したロールを通過させることで、樹脂発泡体に接着剤を塗付し、さらに接着剤を塗付した面を貼合面として、もう一方の樹脂発泡体を重ね合わせた状態で、別のロールを通過させることで、2つの樹脂発泡体を接着することができる。この時接着剤を有機色素、染料、顔料などで着色するか、あるいは少なくとも一方の接着面を、有機色素、染料や顔料などで着色することができる。また、樹脂発泡体15a、15bを熱融着させる場合には、遠赤外線ヒータで、180℃前後に10~20秒程度加熱して、その後、ロールを通過させることで、熱融着を融着させることができる。ここで、融着面は、接着時と同様に、有機色素、染料や顔料などで着色することができる。また、樹脂発泡体表面および融着部が融着時に樹脂が再溶融して再結晶化するので、その際の結晶化状態及び分子量の変化やADCAの残差が表面に残留しやすいことなどの効果などを重畳させることにより、融着部を黄色に着色することができる。 For example, an adhesive is applied to the respective surfaces of the resin foams 15a and 15b, and the opposite surface to which the adhesive is not applied is pressed with a press, or one of the resin foams 15a and 15b is foamed. By passing a roll coated with an adhesive, the adhesive is applied to the resin foam, and the surface to which the adhesive is applied is used as the bonding surface, and the other resin foam is overlapped. Then, the two resin foams can be adhered by passing through different rolls. At this time, the adhesive can be colored with an organic dye, dye, pigment or the like, or at least one adhesive surface can be colored with an organic dye, dye, pigment or the like. When the resin foams 15a and 15b are heat-sealed, they are heated to around 180 ° C. for about 10 to 20 seconds with a far-infrared heater, and then passed through a roll to fuse the heat-sealing. Can be made to. Here, the fused surface can be colored with an organic dye, a dye, a pigment, or the like, as in the case of bonding. Further, since the resin is remelted and recrystallized when the surface of the resin foam and the fused portion are fused, the change in the crystallized state and the molecular weight at that time and the residual of ADCA are likely to remain on the surface. By superimposing the effects and the like, the fused portion can be colored yellow.
 次に、接着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の樹脂発泡体(以下、積層樹脂発泡体)に対して、プロファイル加工を行う。図5Aは、クッション材1のプロファイル加工に用いられるプロファイルロールであるロール31a、31bを示す正面図であり、図5Bはロール31a、31bを示す側面図である。なお、ロール31bはロール31aと同様の構成であるため、説明を省略する。 Next, profile processing is performed on a sheet-shaped resin foam (hereinafter referred to as a laminated resin foam) having a predetermined thickness facing the adhesive layer. FIG. 5A is a front view showing rolls 31a and 31b which are profile rolls used for profile processing of the cushion material 1, and FIG. 5B is a side view showing rolls 31a and 31b. Since the roll 31b has the same configuration as the roll 31a, the description thereof will be omitted.
 ロール31aは、円筒状のロールの表面に凸部33が複数形成されたものである。凸部33は、ロール31aの表面に千鳥状に配置される。すなわち、凸部33は、ロール31aの長手方向に所定間隔(所定ピッチ)で形成され、周方向に隣り合う凸部33は前述の設置ピッチに対して半ピッチずれた位置に形成される。なお、凸部33で囲まれた部位が凹部35となる。凹部35は凸部33に対してわずかに大きく、互いに対向する凸部33と凹部35とは噛み合うことができる。 The roll 31a has a plurality of convex portions 33 formed on the surface of a cylindrical roll. The convex portions 33 are arranged in a staggered pattern on the surface of the roll 31a. That is, the convex portions 33 are formed at predetermined intervals (predetermined pitch) in the longitudinal direction of the roll 31a, and the convex portions 33 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction are formed at positions shifted by half a pitch with respect to the above-mentioned installation pitch. The portion surrounded by the convex portion 33 is the concave portion 35. The concave portion 35 is slightly larger than the convex portion 33, and the convex portion 33 and the concave portion 35 facing each other can mesh with each other.
 ロール31a、31bは、互いに対向するように所定の間隔をあけて配置される。ロール31a、31bの間隔は、調整が可能である。なお、この際、ロール31a、31bは、互いに対向するロール31a、31bのそれぞれの凸部33と凹部35の位置が一致しないような周方向位置で配置される。 The rolls 31a and 31b are arranged at predetermined intervals so as to face each other. The spacing between the rolls 31a and 31b can be adjusted. At this time, the rolls 31a and 31b are arranged at circumferential positions so that the positions of the convex portions 33 and the concave portions 35 of the rolls 31a and 31b facing each other do not match.
 すなわち、ロール31a、31bが対向して設置された状態で、ある周方向断面位置(例えば図5B)において、上側のロール31aの凸部33が最下端(ロール31bとの対向側)に位置した際、下側のロール31bの最上端(ロール31a側)には凹部35が位置する。また、このような位置が交互に繰り返すように、互いの回転が制御されて同期する。なお、ロール31a、31bの長手方向における凸部33、凹部35も互いに一致しないように互い違いになるように設置される。 That is, in a state where the rolls 31a and 31b are installed facing each other, the convex portion 33 of the upper roll 31a is located at the lowermost end (the side facing the roll 31b) at a certain circumferential cross-sectional position (for example, FIG. 5B). At this time, the recess 35 is located at the uppermost end (roll 31a side) of the lower roll 31b. Further, the rotations of each other are controlled and synchronized so that such positions are alternately repeated. The convex portions 33 and the concave portions 35 in the longitudinal direction of the rolls 31a and 31b are also installed so as to be staggered so as not to coincide with each other.
 図6Aは、ロール31a、31bを用いて、クッション材1を製造する状態を示す図である。前述の通り、ロール31a、31bが所定の間隔をあけて設置される。ロール31a、31bは、互いに反対方向に回転し(図中矢印D方向)、一方の側より、積層樹脂発泡体39を噛みこんでいく。なお、積層樹脂発泡体39は、前述した樹脂発泡体15a、15bを積層させて接着又は融着したものである。 FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the cushion material 1 is manufactured using the rolls 31a and 31b. As described above, the rolls 31a and 31b are installed at predetermined intervals. The rolls 31a and 31b rotate in opposite directions (in the direction of arrow D in the figure), and bite the laminated resin foam 39 from one side. The laminated resin foam 39 is obtained by laminating the above-mentioned resin foams 15a and 15b and adhering or fusing them together.
 ここで、積層樹脂発泡体39は、発泡倍率とシート厚さが等しい樹脂発泡体15aと15b前述のように積層させて接着または融着させたものである。積層樹脂発泡体39は、ロール31a、31bにより噛みこまれて順次後方に送られる(図中矢印E方向)。ロール31a、31bの噛みこみ部のやや後方側には切断刃37が設けられる。切断刃37は、積層樹脂発泡体39を厚さ方向に垂直に切断するものであり、少なくとも積層樹脂発泡体39の幅以上の幅を有する。積層樹脂発泡体39は、ロール31a、31bによりつぶされながら(変形させられながら)ロール31a、31b後方に送られ、ロール31a、31bにより変形がなされた状態で切断刃37により厚さ方向に垂直に切断される。 Here, the laminated resin foam 39 is a resin foam 15a and 15b having the same foaming ratio and sheet thickness, laminated and bonded or fused as described above. The laminated resin foam 39 is bitten by the rolls 31a and 31b and sequentially sent backward (in the direction of arrow E in the figure). A cutting blade 37 is provided on the slightly rear side of the biting portion of the rolls 31a and 31b. The cutting blade 37 cuts the laminated resin foam 39 perpendicularly in the thickness direction, and has a width at least equal to or larger than the width of the laminated resin foam 39. The laminated resin foam 39 is sent to the rear of the rolls 31a and 31b while being crushed (deformed) by the rolls 31a and 31b, and is perpendicular to the thickness direction by the cutting blade 37 in a state of being deformed by the rolls 31a and 31b. Will be disconnected.
 図6Bは、図6AのC部拡大図である。積層樹脂発泡体39は、ロール31a、31bの凸部33および凹部35によって弾性変形する。前述の通り、ロール31a、31bは、ロール31aの凸部33(凹部35)とロール31bの凹部35(凸部33)とが互い違いの位置となるように回転する。したがって、積層樹脂発泡体39は、上側のロール31aの凸部33および凹部35と、下側のロール31bの凸部33および凹部35との間を縫うように波形となる。 FIG. 6B is an enlarged view of part C of FIG. 6A. The laminated resin foam 39 is elastically deformed by the convex portions 33 and the concave portions 35 of the rolls 31a and 31b. As described above, the rolls 31a and 31b rotate so that the convex portion 33 (concave portion 35) of the roll 31a and the concave portion 35 (convex portion 33) of the roll 31b are in alternate positions. Therefore, the laminated resin foam 39 has a corrugated shape so as to sew between the convex portion 33 and the concave portion 35 of the upper roll 31a and the convex portion 33 and the concave portion 35 of the lower roll 31b.
 切断刃37は、積層樹脂発泡体39が波形状である状態で積層樹脂発泡体39を切断する。ここで、切断刃37は、積層樹脂発泡体39の厚さ方向の略中央(ロール31a、31bの中間)に設置される。しかし、実際に切断がなされる部位においては、積層樹脂発泡体39が波形に変形している。このため、積層樹脂発泡体39の厚さ方向の中央がまっすぐに切断されるのではなく、積層樹脂発泡体39は厚さ方向に対して波形に切断される。 The cutting blade 37 cuts the laminated resin foam 39 in a state where the laminated resin foam 39 has a wavy shape. Here, the cutting blade 37 is installed at substantially the center of the laminated resin foam 39 in the thickness direction (intermediate between the rolls 31a and 31b). However, at the portion where the cutting is actually performed, the laminated resin foam 39 is deformed into a corrugated shape. Therefore, the center of the laminated resin foam 39 in the thickness direction is not cut straight, but the laminated resin foam 39 is cut in a corrugated manner with respect to the thickness direction.
 ここで、積層樹脂発泡体39は、内部に接着層17が形成される。このため、積層樹脂発泡体39が波形に変形する際には、接着層17は、積層樹脂発泡体39の中心線を形成しながら、接着層17も上下に繰り返し波形に変形した状態となる。切断刃37は、波形の接着層17を横切るように積層樹脂発泡体39を切断する。 Here, the laminated resin foam 39 has an adhesive layer 17 formed inside. Therefore, when the laminated resin foam 39 is deformed into a corrugated shape, the adhesive layer 17 is in a state of being repeatedly deformed into a corrugated shape up and down while forming the center line of the laminated resin foam 39. The cutting blade 37 cuts the laminated resin foam 39 so as to cross the corrugated adhesive layer 17.
 切断後の積層樹脂発泡体39は、ロール31a、31b(凸部33、凹部35)による変形が元の状態に戻りながらロール31a、31bの後方に送られる。この際、切断刃37により切断された部位が、波形に戻る。したがって、積層樹脂発泡体39の切断面に山部5と谷部7が形成される。すなわち、切断刃37を中心に、ロールの凹部35内に変形した部位が、クッション材1の山部5となり、ロールの凸部33により押しつぶされた部位が、クッション材1の谷部7となる。すなわち、ロール31a、31bとの接触面は、平坦な形状となり、逆に切断面は、ロール31a、31bの凹凸ピッチに合わせて、縦横に山部谷部が交互に周期的に配置された波形状の凹凸構造が得られる。 The laminated resin foam 39 after cutting is sent to the rear of the rolls 31a and 31b while the deformation caused by the rolls 31a and 31b (convex portion 33 and concave portion 35) returns to the original state. At this time, the portion cut by the cutting blade 37 returns to the waveform. Therefore, peaks 5 and valleys 7 are formed on the cut surface of the laminated resin foam 39. That is, the portion deformed in the concave portion 35 of the roll centering on the cutting blade 37 becomes the peak portion 5 of the cushion material 1, and the portion crushed by the convex portion 33 of the roll becomes the valley portion 7 of the cushion material 1. .. That is, the contact surface with the rolls 31a and 31b has a flat shape, and conversely, the cut surface is a wave in which peaks and valleys are alternately arranged vertically and horizontally according to the uneven pitch of the rolls 31a and 31b. An uneven structure of shape can be obtained.
 以上のように、本実施形態では、プロファイルロールであるロール31a、31b通過直後の積層樹脂発泡体39が、上下のロール31a、31bによる押圧力が完全に弾性回復しないうちに、接着層17(又は融着層。以下同様。)を含む位置でスライス加工して切断される。このように、接着層17が湾曲した状態で湾曲した接着層17を横断するように切断されるため、切断分離された積層樹脂発泡体39が弾性回復して接着層17が所定長さ、所定形状で平坦面に形成されると、積層樹脂発泡体39の波形状の凹凸構造の山部5と谷部7の間の表面の所定高さの部分に、接着層17が露出し、平坦面の露出部として周期的な線状模様11がロールの長手方向と幅方向に対応して千鳥状にクッション材1形成される。以上により、波形状の凹凸構造がプロファイル加工によって形成されたクッション材1が一対形成される。 As described above, in the present embodiment, the laminated resin foam 39 immediately after passing through the rolls 31a and 31b, which are the profile rolls, has the adhesive layer 17 (the adhesive layer 17 () before the pressing force by the upper and lower rolls 31a and 31b is completely elastically recovered. Alternatively, it is sliced and cut at a position including a fused layer (the same applies hereinafter). In this way, since the adhesive layer 17 is cut so as to cross the curved adhesive layer 17 in a curved state, the cut and separated laminated resin foam 39 elastically recovers, and the adhesive layer 17 has a predetermined length and a predetermined length. When the laminated resin foam 39 is formed on a flat surface in shape, the adhesive layer 17 is exposed at a predetermined height on the surface between the peaks 5 and the valleys 7 of the corrugated uneven structure of the laminated resin foam 39, and the flat surface. As the exposed portion of the roll, a periodic linear pattern 11 is formed in a staggered manner corresponding to the longitudinal direction and the width direction of the roll. As described above, a pair of cushioning materials 1 having a wavy uneven structure formed by profile processing are formed.
 このようにして得られたクッション材1は、例えば、波形状の凹凸構造の形成面(表面3)を上面として、他方の面(裏面9)を下面として、ベッドとして使用可能な災害用マット材として使用することが可能である。 The cushion material 1 thus obtained is a disaster mat material that can be used as a bed, for example, with the surface (front surface 3) for forming a wavy uneven structure as the upper surface and the other surface (back surface 9) as the lower surface. It can be used as.
 以上、本実施の形態によれば、表面3に波形状の凹凸構造を有し、裏面9が平坦なクッション材1を得ることができる。この際、波形状の凹凸構造の山部5の所定の高さに多数の環状の線状模様11が千鳥状に形成されるため、意匠性に優れる。また、このようなクッション材1は、積層樹脂発泡体39をプロファイル加工することで得ることができるため、製造性が良好である。なお、詳細は後述するが、積層されるそれぞれの樹脂発泡体15a、15bの少なくとも一方が着色されているか、又は両方の樹脂発泡体15a、15bを異なる色とすることで、線状模様11(接着層17)の位置を界面として、線状模様形成部13に対して、波形状の凹凸構造の山部5側と谷部7側(底部を含む)とが異なる色に着色された3次元的な立体模様を形成することができる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure on the front surface 3 and a flat back surface 9. At this time, since a large number of annular linear patterns 11 are formed in a staggered pattern at a predetermined height of the mountain portion 5 having a wavy uneven structure, the design is excellent. Further, since such a cushion material 1 can be obtained by profile-processing the laminated resin foam 39, the manufacturability is good. Although details will be described later, the linear pattern 11 (by making at least one of the laminated resin foams 15a and 15b colored, or by making both resin foams 15a and 15b different colors, With the position of the adhesive layer 17) as the interface, the mountain portion 5 side and the valley portion 7 side (including the bottom portion) of the wavy uneven structure are colored in different colors with respect to the linear pattern forming portion 13. 3D pattern can be formed.
 なお、図示した例では、切断刃37は、ロール31a、31bの略中央(切断対象の積層樹脂発泡体39の厚さ方向の略中央)に設置したが、これには限られない。例えば、ロール31a、31bに噛み込まれた状態における接着層17の波形状の山部5と谷部7の形成位置における高さの範囲内で(積層樹脂発泡体39の接着層又は融着層に形成される湾曲の幅(高さ)を超えないように)、切断位置を上下方向に所定量移動して、ロールの出口側でのスライス加工を施す高さを調整してもよい。または切断刃37をロール31a、31bの略中央に設置したままで、樹脂発泡体15a、15bの一方のシート厚さを厚くすることで、積層樹脂発泡体39の接着層17の形成位置を、厚みの中央からずらしてもよい。 In the illustrated example, the cutting blade 37 is installed at substantially the center of the rolls 31a and 31b (approximately the center of the laminated resin foam 39 to be cut in the thickness direction), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, within the height range of the corrugated peaks 5 and valleys 7 of the adhesive layer 17 in the state of being bitten by the rolls 31a and 31b (adhesive layer or fusion layer of the laminated resin foam 39). The cutting position may be moved in a predetermined amount in the vertical direction so as not to exceed the width (height) of the curvature formed in the roll, and the height at which the slicing process is performed on the outlet side of the roll may be adjusted. Alternatively, by increasing the thickness of one of the resin foams 15a and 15b while keeping the cutting blade 37 installed substantially in the center of the rolls 31a and 31b, the position where the adhesive layer 17 of the laminated resin foam 39 is formed can be determined. It may be shifted from the center of the thickness.
 これにより、切断された波形状の凹凸構造の山部5と谷部7の面積割合を変えることが可能になる。その結果、接着層17により形成される線状模様11や立体模様の大きさを調整することができる。このように、樹脂発泡体15bが形成する山部5の面積や樹脂発泡体15aが形成する谷部7の面積割合を変えることで、樹脂発泡体15a、樹脂発泡体15bの少なくとも一方が着色された3次元的な意匠の質感や意匠性を大きく変えることができる。このように、波形状の凹凸構造の山部5及び谷部7の形成位置を調整して、多数の環状の線状模様11の大きさを調整して、線状模様11の大きさが異なる2つのクッション材1を得ることも可能である。 This makes it possible to change the area ratio of the peaks 5 and valleys 7 of the cut wavy uneven structure. As a result, the size of the linear pattern 11 or the three-dimensional pattern formed by the adhesive layer 17 can be adjusted. In this way, by changing the area ratio of the mountain portion 5 formed by the resin foam 15b and the area ratio of the valley portion 7 formed by the resin foam 15a, at least one of the resin foam 15a and the resin foam 15b is colored. It is possible to greatly change the texture and design of a three-dimensional design. In this way, the formation positions of the peaks 5 and the valleys 7 of the wavy uneven structure are adjusted to adjust the sizes of a large number of annular linear patterns 11, and the sizes of the linear patterns 11 are different. It is also possible to obtain two cushioning materials 1.
 また、樹脂発泡体15a、15bがポリエチレン製であれば、吸湿性が低いため、クッション材1を用いたマット等の防湿性を高めることができる。このため、クッション材1を災害時におけるマットとして使用した際に、クッション材1が吸湿せずに、しかもプロファイル加工された発泡材で形成されているため、ベッドとしても使用できるため、快適な睡眠環境や生活環境を提供することができる。 Further, if the resin foams 15a and 15b are made of polyethylene, the hygroscopicity is low, so that the moistureproof property of a mat or the like using the cushion material 1 can be enhanced. Therefore, when the cushion material 1 is used as a mat in the event of a disaster, the cushion material 1 does not absorb moisture and is made of a profiled foam material, so that it can also be used as a bed for a comfortable sleep. It can provide an environment and a living environment.
 また、接着層17に対して、他の機能を付与することもできる。例えば、制振性や難燃性の機能を付与することもできる。さらに、樹脂発泡体15a、15bに消臭機能を付与してもよい。 Further, other functions can be imparted to the adhesive layer 17. For example, it is possible to impart vibration damping and flame retardant functions. Further, the resin foams 15a and 15b may be provided with a deodorizing function.
 なお、上記の他、積層体は、後述するように、2層の樹脂発泡体をスライス加工して成形したクッション材1に、ロール成形後に平坦な樹脂発泡体15c、15dを貼合して形成しても良い。 In addition to the above, the laminate is formed by laminating flat resin foams 15c and 15d after roll molding on the cushion material 1 formed by slicing two layers of resin foam as described later. You may.
(第2の実施形態)
 次に、第2の実施形態について説明する。図7は、クッション材の裏面にシート状樹脂発泡体を融着または接着した積層体1aを示す断面図である。なお、以下の説明において、クッション材1と同様の構成には、図1A~図6Bと同一の符号を付して、重複する説明を省略する。
(Second Embodiment)
Next, the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing a laminated body 1a in which a sheet-shaped resin foam is fused or adhered to the back surface of a cushion material. In the following description, the same configurations as those of the cushion material 1 are designated by the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 1A to 6B, and duplicate description will be omitted.
 積層体1aは、クッション材1と略同様の構成であるが、クッション材1の裏面にシート状の樹脂発泡体15cを融着または接着させて、樹脂発泡体15cが積層される点で異なる。積層体1aは、クッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造の形成面の裏面の平坦な他方の面に、さらに別のシート状の樹脂発泡体15cが積層されて接着または融着されている。なお、この積層体1aの裏面9に、さらに別のシート状の樹脂発泡体が積層されて接着または融着された積層体であってもよいが、通常融着または接着するシート状樹脂発泡体は一層で十分である。 The laminated body 1a has substantially the same structure as the cushion material 1, but differs in that the resin foam 15c is laminated by fusing or adhering the sheet-shaped resin foam 15c to the back surface of the cushion material 1. In the laminated body 1a, another sheet-shaped resin foam 15c is laminated and adhered or fused to the other flat surface of the back surface of the corrugated uneven structure forming surface of the cushion material 1. Although another sheet-shaped resin foam may be laminated on the back surface 9 of the laminated body 1a and bonded or fused, the sheet-shaped resin foam is usually fused or bonded. Is enough.
 この際、クッション材の裏面にシート状樹脂発泡体を融着または接着させる別のシート状の樹脂発泡体15cは、波形状の凹凸構造を有する樹脂発泡体15a、15bより硬質あるいは同等の強度を有することが望ましい。ここで、クッション材の裏面に貼り付けるシート状の樹脂発泡体15cを、樹脂発泡体15a、15bよりも低発泡倍率の樹脂とすることで、後述する区画用パーテーションに使用する場合の組立自立性を向上させることができる。 At this time, another sheet-shaped resin foam 15c for fusing or adhering the sheet-shaped resin foam to the back surface of the cushion material has a hardness equal to or harder than that of the resin foams 15a and 15b having a wavy uneven structure. It is desirable to have. Here, by using the sheet-shaped resin foam 15c to be attached to the back surface of the cushion material as a resin having a lower foaming ratio than the resin foams 15a and 15b, assembly independence when used for a partition for partitioning described later Can be improved.
 積層体1aの製造方法は特に限定されないが、例えば、図5A、図5Bに示すロール31a、ロール31bを用いて、4層の積層樹脂発泡体の切断を行ってもよい。まず、接着層又は融着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の樹脂発泡体の、接着層又は融着層とは反対側のそれぞれの外側に、別のシート状の樹脂発泡体層がさらに接着または融着された、4層の積層樹脂発泡体を形成する。この場合には、ロール31aとロール31bのロール間隔を調整し、上下の表層(1層目と4層目)を除く中間の2層目と3層目の間でスライス加工を行うことで、2層の積層樹脂発泡体39と同様の加工を行うことができる。このため、周期的な線状模様11が形成された、波形状の凹凸構造を表面に有する樹脂発泡体15bの平坦な裏面に、それぞれ平坦な樹脂発泡体15cまたは15cと15dを貼合した積層体1a、1bを得ることができる。 The method for producing the laminated body 1a is not particularly limited, but for example, the four-layer laminated resin foam may be cut using the rolls 31a and 31b shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B. First, another sheet-shaped resin foam layer is formed on the outside of each of the sheet-shaped resin foams having a predetermined thickness facing each other with the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer on the opposite side of the adhesive layer or the fusion-bonded layer. Form a four-layer laminated resin foam that is further adhered or fused. In this case, the roll spacing between the rolls 31a and 31b is adjusted, and slicing is performed between the intermediate second and third layers excluding the upper and lower surface layers (first and fourth layers). The same processing as that of the two-layer laminated resin foam 39 can be performed. For this reason, the flat resin foams 15c or 15c and 15d are laminated on the flat back surface of the resin foam 15b having a wavy uneven structure on the surface on which the periodic linear pattern 11 is formed. The bodies 1a and 1b can be obtained.
 このように、4層中の内層の2層を形成する樹脂発泡体層の内部にプロファイルロール加工による湾曲形状を維持した状態で、中間の2層目と3層目の間でスライス加工を行うことで、プロファイル加工した内層樹脂層の外層に平坦なシート状発泡樹脂層が一体化した積層体を製造することができる。 In this way, slicing is performed between the second and third layers in the middle while maintaining the curved shape by profile roll processing inside the resin foam layer forming the two inner layers of the four layers. As a result, it is possible to manufacture a laminate in which a flat sheet-shaped foamed resin layer is integrated with the outer layer of the profile-processed inner layer resin layer.
 第2の実施形態によれば、第1の実施形態と同様に意匠性を高める効果を得ることができる。また、樹脂発泡体15c等を積層することで、より厚みの厚い積層体1a、1bを得ることができるため、より大きなクッション性を得ることができる。また、厚みが厚くなるため、防湿性に加えて積層体の組立自立性も高めることができる。 According to the second embodiment, the effect of enhancing the design can be obtained as in the first embodiment. Further, by laminating the resin foam 15c or the like, a thicker laminated body 1a and 1b can be obtained, so that a larger cushioning property can be obtained. Further, since the thickness is increased, the assembly independence of the laminated body can be enhanced in addition to the moisture resistance.
 この際、この積層体1a、1bは、避難所の区画部材に必要な断熱性、クッション性や防湿性を付与することができる他、表面に波形状の凹凸構造の周期的模様を有するため意匠性に優れるが、シート状の樹脂発泡体15c、15dにより厚みを増しているので、組立自立性も向上する。そのため、後述するように、避難所のパーテーション用仕切り壁などに使用する場合には、容易に自立させることができる。さらに積層体1a、1bは軽量であると同時に積層体1a、1bの端部側面と積層体1a、1bの平坦部などを、例えば面ファスナにより固定することができるので、工具や組立部品などを使用せずに避難所のパーテーション用仕切り壁などを容易に形成することができる。そのため、避難所のパーテーション部材として好適に使用することができる。 At this time, the laminated bodies 1a and 1b can impart the heat insulating property, cushioning property and moisture proofing property required for the partition members of the evacuation center, and also have a periodic pattern of a corrugated uneven structure on the surface, so that the design is provided. Although it is excellent in properties, the thickness is increased by the sheet-shaped resin foams 15c and 15d, so that the assembly independence is also improved. Therefore, as will be described later, when it is used as a partition wall for a partition in an evacuation shelter, it can be easily made independent. Further, the laminates 1a and 1b are lightweight, and at the same time, the side surfaces of the ends of the laminates 1a and 1b and the flat portions of the laminates 1a and 1b can be fixed by, for example, a hook-and-loop fastener, so that tools and assembly parts can be used. It is possible to easily form a partition wall for a partition of an evacuation center without using it. Therefore, it can be suitably used as a partition member of an evacuation shelter.
 しかも、この積層体1a、1bの波形状の凹凸構造の融着または接着面の上下の発泡体の着色を変えることで、さらに意匠性を向上させることができる。このため、避難所の仕切り壁のパーテーション部材や床マットとして使用する場合に、さらに断熱性、クッション性、防湿性などの機能性を有していることから、床マットはベッドとしても使用可能で、被災者の避難所における生活環境を快適に保つだけでなく、被災者の気分を明るく保つこともできる効果も有する。 Moreover, the design can be further improved by fusing the corrugated uneven structure of the laminated bodies 1a and 1b or changing the coloring of the foams above and below the adhesive surface. For this reason, when used as a partition member or floor mat for the partition wall of a shelter, the floor mat can also be used as a bed because it has functionality such as heat insulation, cushioning, and moisture resistance. Not only does it keep the living environment in the shelter of the victims comfortable, but it also has the effect of keeping the victims feeling bright.
 また、積層させるシート状の樹脂発泡体15c等を、波形状の凹凸構造を有する樹脂発泡体15a、15bよりも硬質または同等の強度とすることで、積層体1a、1bをマットとして使用した際に、クッション性を維持したまま、過度な沈み込みを抑制することができる。
すなわち、マット材を例に取れば、軽量で意匠性に優れ、防湿性、断熱性に優れるマット材を得ることができるため、被災地などの体育館の床などに露出使用することが可能である。このように、積層体1a、1bは、クッション性を維持したまま、防湿性に優れ、過度な沈み込みを抑制することが可能なため、ベッドとしても使用可能であり、避難所用のベッドを兼ねるマット材として好適に使用できる。また、積層体1a、1bを所定寸法形状の積層体とすれば、後述するように組立自立性に優れる区画用パーテーションとして利用可能である。
Further, when the laminated bodies 1a and 1b are used as a mat by making the sheet-shaped resin foam 15c or the like to be laminated harder or the same strength as the resin foams 15a and 15b having a wavy uneven structure. In addition, excessive sinking can be suppressed while maintaining cushioning properties.
That is, taking a mat material as an example, it is possible to obtain a mat material that is lightweight, has excellent design, and has excellent moisture resistance and heat insulation, so that it can be exposed and used on the floor of a gymnasium such as a disaster area. .. As described above, the laminated bodies 1a and 1b can be used as a bed because they have excellent moisture resistance and can suppress excessive sinking while maintaining the cushioning property, and also serve as a bed for an evacuation center. It can be suitably used as a mat material. Further, if the laminated bodies 1a and 1b are laminated bodies having a predetermined size and shape, they can be used as a partition for a partition having excellent assembly independence as described later.
(第3の実施形態)
 次に、第3の実施形態について説明する。図8Aは、クッション材1を対向して配置した状態を示す図である。一対のクッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造の面同志を対向させて配置する。本実施形態は、クッション材1を2枚重ねて、クッション材1の積層構造として使用するクッション材の使用方法に関する。ここで、積層構造とは、クッション材を重ねあわせて使用する構造を意味し、必ずしも積層部が融着または接着など貼合されている必要はなく、クッション材の平坦面同士を面ファスナで固定するか、単にクッション材の波形状の凹凸構造面を対向させて配置する構造であってもよい。
(Third Embodiment)
Next, a third embodiment will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a state in which the cushion members 1 are arranged so as to face each other. The surfaces of the wave-shaped uneven structure of the pair of cushioning materials 1 are arranged so as to face each other. The present embodiment relates to a method of using a cushion material in which two cushion materials 1 are stacked and used as a laminated structure of the cushion material 1. Here, the laminated structure means a structure in which cushion materials are used by overlapping them, and the laminated portions do not necessarily have to be bonded or bonded to each other, and the flat surfaces of the cushion materials are fixed to each other by a hook-and-loop fastener. Alternatively, the structure may be such that the corrugated uneven structure surfaces of the cushion material are arranged so as to face each other.
 図8Bは、一対のクッション材1の山部と谷部とを互いに組み合わせて積層させた積層構造40を示す図である。すなわち、図8Bは、クッション材1を2枚重ねて、クッション材1を積層して使用するクッション材の使用方法を示す図である。一方のクッション材1(図中下方)に形成される山部5aと、他方のクッション材1(図中上方)に形成される谷部7bが対向して配置される。同様に、一方のクッション材1(図中下方)に形成される谷部7aと、他方のクッション材1(図中上方)に形成される山部5bが対向して配置される。このように、クッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を相互に重ねることで、互いの波形状の凹凸構造同士が噛み合って、線状模様11が略同一平面上に並んで形成されたシート状の積層構造40が形成される。 FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a laminated structure 40 in which the peaks and valleys of the pair of cushioning materials 1 are combined and laminated with each other. That is, FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a method of using a cushion material in which two cushion materials 1 are stacked and the cushion material 1 is laminated and used. The mountain portion 5a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the valley portion 7b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are arranged so as to face each other. Similarly, the valley portion 7a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the mountain portion 5b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are arranged to face each other. In this way, by overlapping the forming surfaces of the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material 1 with each other, the corrugated concave and convex structures mesh with each other, and the linear patterns 11 are formed side by side on substantially the same plane. The sheet-like laminated structure 40 is formed.
 図9Aは、一対のクッション材1の山部5と谷部7とを相互に外側に向けて、平坦部同士を対向させた状態を示す図であり、図9Bは、一対のクッション材1を積層させた積層構造40aを示す図である。すなわち、図9Bは、クッション材1の平坦面を対向させて使用するクッション材1の使用方法を示す図である。一対のクッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造の面同志を相互に反対方向の外側に向け、波形状の凹凸構造の裏面である平坦面同士を接触させ、必要に応じて、接触面を面ファスナ等の固定手段で相互に固定しても良い。この際、一方のクッション材1(図中下方)に形成される山部5aと、他方のクッション材1(図中上方)に形成される谷部7bが相互に外側に向けて所定距離離間して配置される。同様に、一方のクッション材1(図中下方)に形成される谷部7aと、他方のクッション材1(図中上方)に形成される山部5bが相互に外側に向けて所定距離離間して配置される。 FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a state in which the peaks 5 and valleys 7 of the pair of cushioning materials 1 face each other with the flat portions facing each other, and FIG. 9B shows the pair of cushioning materials 1 It is a figure which shows the laminated structure 40a which was laminated. That is, FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a method of using the cushion material 1 in which the flat surfaces of the cushion material 1 are used so as to face each other. The surfaces of the wave-shaped uneven structure of the pair of cushioning materials 1 are directed outward in opposite directions, and the flat surfaces that are the back surfaces of the wave-shaped uneven structure are brought into contact with each other, and the contact surfaces are hook-and-loop fasteners as necessary. They may be fixed to each other by fixing means such as. At this time, the mountain portion 5a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the valley portion 7b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are separated from each other by a predetermined distance toward the outside. Is placed. Similarly, the valley portion 7a formed on one cushion material 1 (lower part in the figure) and the mountain portion 5b formed on the other cushion material 1 (upper part in the figure) are separated from each other by a predetermined distance toward the outside. Is placed.
 すなわち、一方のクッション材1の山部5aの裏面には、他方のクッション材1の谷部7bが位置し、一方のクッション材1の谷部7aの裏面には、他方のクッション材1の山部5bが位置する。このように平坦面を相互に対向させて重ねることで、図9Bに示すように、積層構造40aは、クッション材の1の波形状の凹凸構造の形成面が積層構造40aの両側の外表面に向けて構成されるため、両面に波形状の凹凸構造が略平行に形成されるとともに、線状模様11が外表面に多数並んで形成され、意匠性に優れたパネル状の積層構造を実現できる。 That is, the valley portion 7b of the other cushion material 1 is located on the back surface of the mountain portion 5a of one cushion material 1, and the mountain portion 7a of the other cushion material 1 is located on the back surface of the valley portion 7a of the other cushion material 1. The portion 5b is located. By stacking the flat surfaces so as to face each other in this way, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the laminated structure 40a, the forming surface of the corrugated uneven structure of 1 of the cushion material is formed on the outer surfaces on both sides of the laminated structure 40a. Since the structure is oriented toward the surface, a wavy uneven structure is formed substantially parallel to both sides, and a large number of linear patterns 11 are formed side by side on the outer surface, so that a panel-like laminated structure having excellent design can be realized. ..
 図10は、図8BのF-F線断面図である。図示したように、それぞれのクッション材1の接着層17aと接着層17bとが互いに隣接するように配置される。すなわち、積層構造40を構成するクッション材1のそれぞれの山部と谷部の中間に配置される線状模様11(接着面同士又は融着面同士)が、略同一平面上に隣接して配置される。このように、クッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を相互に重ねることで、線状模様11を略同一平面上に並ぶように形成することができる。 FIG. 10 is a sectional view taken along line FF of FIG. 8B. As shown, the adhesive layer 17a and the adhesive layer 17b of each cushion material 1 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. That is, the linear patterns 11 (adhesive surfaces or fusion surfaces) arranged between the peaks and valleys of the cushion material 1 constituting the laminated structure 40 are arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane. Will be done. In this way, by overlapping the forming surfaces of the corrugated uneven structure of the cushion material 1 with each other, the linear patterns 11 can be formed so as to be lined up on substantially the same plane.
 ここで、積層構造40の平面視において、接着面を含む平面の見かけ上の総面積に対する、略同一平面上に隣接して配置される接着層17a、17b(接着面又は融着面)の見かけの総占有率は80%以上であることが望ましく、さらに90%以上であることが望ましい。このように、一対のクッション材1を対向させて形成した積層構造40において、接着層17a、17bを同一平面上に、略全面にわたって配置することができる。このため、接着層17a、17bに制振性や難燃性等の機能性を付与した際に、積層構造40の略全面において、機能を発揮させることができる。このように、略同一平面上に隣接して配置される接着面又は融着面によって、機能性を有する平面を形成することができる。 Here, in the plan view of the laminated structure 40, the appearance of the adhesive layers 17a and 17b (adhesive surface or fused surface) arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane with respect to the apparent total area of the plane including the adhesive surface. The total occupancy rate of is preferably 80% or more, and more preferably 90% or more. In this way, in the laminated structure 40 formed by facing the pair of cushion materials 1, the adhesive layers 17a and 17b can be arranged on the same plane over substantially the entire surface. Therefore, when the adhesive layers 17a and 17b are provided with functionality such as vibration damping property and flame retardancy, the function can be exhibited on substantially the entire surface of the laminated structure 40. In this way, a functional plane can be formed by the adhesive surface or the fusion surface arranged adjacent to each other on substantially the same plane.
 なお、このようなクッション材を積層した積層構造は、例えば、避難所のパーテーション材又は衝撃緩衝壁面パネル材として好適である。意匠性を重視する場合には、波形状の凹凸構造の積層構造を外表面に配置し、機能性を利用する場合には、波形状の凹凸構造を対向するように配置して機能性を付与した面を略一直線状に配置する。波形状の凹凸構造の積層構造を外表面に配置する場合には、そのまま使用することも可能であるが、専用のスタンドを設けても良い。この場合は、2つのクッション材は、クッション材の端部側面を面ファスナなどを使用して固定することが望ましい。 It should be noted that such a laminated structure in which cushioning materials are laminated is suitable as, for example, a partition material for an evacuation center or a shock absorbing wall panel material. When emphasizing design, a laminated structure of corrugated concavo-convex structure is arranged on the outer surface, and when functionality is used, the corrugated concavo-convex structure is arranged so as to face each other to impart functionality. Arrange the surface in a substantially straight line. When a laminated structure having a wavy uneven structure is arranged on the outer surface, it can be used as it is, but a dedicated stand may be provided. In this case, it is desirable that the two cushioning materials are fixed by using a hook-and-loop fastener or the like on the side surface of the end portion of the cushioning material.
 第3の実施形態によれば、第1の実施形態と同様の効果を得ることができる。また、クッション材を組み合わせて積層構造とすることで、このような積層構造を防災現場の衝立や壁面パネル材等として使用することができる。このような積層構造によって、従来の段ボール製のマットや仕切り材での、断熱性、クッション性、防湿性等の機能性を付与していることから、避難現場での避難生活を余儀なくされていた被災者に少しでも清潔で快適な生活環境を提供することができる。 According to the third embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained. Further, by combining cushioning materials to form a laminated structure, such a laminated structure can be used as a counter or wall panel material at a disaster prevention site. With such a laminated structure, the conventional corrugated cardboard mats and partitioning materials are provided with functionality such as heat insulation, cushioning, and moisture resistance, which has forced evacuation life at the evacuation site. It is possible to provide the victims with a clean and comfortable living environment as much as possible.
 また、この樹脂発泡体15a、15bの波形状の凹凸構造を対向するように重ね合わせて使用することで、波形状の表面に現れた周期的な線状模様11が形成される位置を略一致させることができる。すなわち、この線状模様11(接着面又は融着面)は、組み合わせた樹脂発泡体15a、15bの内部を貫通して略平面状に配列するように形成される。例えば、上記の線状模様11を構成する接着層(または融着層)に、遮音性や制振性を付与することで、意匠性と同時にクッション性の他、静音性や制振性を付与することが可能になる。 Further, by superimposing the corrugated uneven structures of the resin foams 15a and 15b so as to face each other, the positions where the periodic linear pattern 11 appearing on the corrugated surface is formed are substantially matched. Can be made to. That is, the linear pattern 11 (adhesive surface or fusion surface) is formed so as to penetrate the inside of the combined resin foams 15a and 15b and be arranged in a substantially planar shape. For example, by imparting sound insulation and vibration damping properties to the adhesive layer (or fusion layer) constituting the linear pattern 11, in addition to design and cushioning properties, quietness and vibration damping properties are imparted. It becomes possible to do.
 このように、プロファイル加工した面には、接着面や融着面が矩形状、円状、または楕円状に多数配列するため、プロファイル加工した面を対向させると、若干の隙間は存在するものの、接着面や融着面を略同一平面に配置することができる。このため、その部分に制振性や静音性などの付加的機能を付与することが可能である。さらにこれを挟む樹脂発泡体15a、15bにも、消臭性、抗菌性、抗ウィルス性などを付与することが可能である。 In this way, a large number of adhesive surfaces and fused surfaces are arranged in a rectangular shape, a circular shape, or an elliptical shape on the profiled surface. Therefore, when the profiled surfaces face each other, there are some gaps, The bonding surface and the fusion surface can be arranged on substantially the same plane. Therefore, it is possible to add additional functions such as vibration damping and quietness to the portion. Further, the resin foams 15a and 15b sandwiching the resin foams 15a and 15b can also be provided with deodorant property, antibacterial property, antiviral property and the like.
 また、波形状の凹凸構造を組わせることで、積層構造の厚みは、クッション材の厚みの約2倍になるため、パーテーション等の仕切り材として使用する場合に、組立自立性を向上させることができる。また、波形状の凹凸構造を外表面に配置した場合でも、組立自立性に問題がないことは言うまでもない。 In addition, by assembling a wavy uneven structure, the thickness of the laminated structure is about twice the thickness of the cushion material, so when used as a partition material for partitions, etc., the assembly independence should be improved. Can be done. Further, it goes without saying that there is no problem in assembly independence even when the wavy uneven structure is arranged on the outer surface.
(第4の実施形態)
 次に、第4の実施形態について説明する。図11は、クッション材1cの平面図である。クッション材1cは、クッション材1と略同様の構成であるが、クッション材1cが、複数の色で構成される点で異なる。
(Fourth Embodiment)
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cushion material 1c. The cushion material 1c has substantially the same configuration as the cushion material 1, but differs in that the cushion material 1c is composed of a plurality of colors.
 前述したように、クッション材1cの表面3は、線状模様11より上側の樹脂発泡体15bにより形成される山部5と、線状模様11が形成される線状模様形成部13と、線状模様11より下側の樹脂発泡体15aにより形成される谷部7との3つの部分に区画される。本実施形態では、山部5、線状模様形成部13及び谷部7の少なくとも一つ又は2つの部分が、他の部位とは異なる色に形成される。 As described above, the surface 3 of the cushion material 1c has a mountain portion 5 formed by the resin foam 15b above the linear pattern 11, a linear pattern forming portion 13 on which the linear pattern 11 is formed, and a line. It is divided into three portions with a valley portion 7 formed by the resin foam 15a below the pattern 11. In the present embodiment, at least one or two portions of the peak portion 5, the linear pattern forming portion 13 and the valley portion 7 are formed in a color different from that of the other portions.
 例えば、線状模様形成部13が山部5及び谷部7とは異なる色に着色されるか、あるいは線状模様形成部13のみが着色されることで、他部位とは異なる色に着色された線状模様11を形成することもできる。また、波形状の凹凸構造の山部5と谷部7のいずれかが異なる色に着色されることで、山部5あるいは谷部7のいずれかを着色された3次元的な立体模様を形成することができる。 For example, the linear pattern forming portion 13 is colored differently from the peaks 5 and the valleys 7, or only the linear pattern forming portion 13 is colored, so that the linear pattern forming portion 13 is colored differently from other portions. It is also possible to form the linear pattern 11. Further, by coloring either the mountain portion 5 or the valley portion 7 of the wavy uneven structure in a different color, a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in which either the mountain portion 5 or the valley portion 7 is colored is formed. can do.
 例えば、線状模様11が融着層により形成される場合において、融着層を形成する樹脂発泡体の表面が溶融後固化する過程で結晶化する際に、結晶化度、分子配向の変化、これに加えてADCAの発泡体表面への残留効果を重畳させることにより異なる色に形成されてもよい。又は、融着する樹脂発泡体の一方の融着面を異なる色に塗装した樹脂発泡体を用いて融着されてもよい。このようにしても線状模様形成部13を山部5及び谷部7とは異なる色に着色することができる。 For example, when the linear pattern 11 is formed by the fusion layer, when the surface of the resin foam forming the fusion layer crystallizes in the process of solidification after melting, the degree of crystallinity and the change in molecular orientation, In addition to this, different colors may be formed by superimposing the residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface. Alternatively, one of the fused surfaces of the resin foam to be fused may be fused using a resin foam coated with a different color. Even in this way, the linear pattern forming portion 13 can be colored in a color different from that of the peak portion 5 and the valley portion 7.
 また、線状模様11が、接着層により形成される場合において、接着層を形成する接着剤に顔料を添加することで、着色された接着剤を用いて形成された接着層としてもよい。このようにしても線状模様形成部13を山部5及び谷部7とは異なる色に着色することができる。 Further, when the linear pattern 11 is formed by the adhesive layer, the adhesive layer formed by using the colored adhesive may be obtained by adding a pigment to the adhesive forming the adhesive layer. Even in this way, the linear pattern forming portion 13 can be colored in a color different from that of the peak portion 5 and the valley portion 7.
 また、このようなクッション材1cを製造するためには、例えば、異なる色の樹脂発泡体15aと樹脂発泡体15bとを用いてもよい。異なる色の樹脂発泡体15aと樹脂発泡体15bとを接着等によって積層樹脂発泡体39として、図6Aに示すように、プロファイル加工を行うことで、山部5又は谷部7の色を他の部位の色と異なるようにすることができる。すなわち、線状模様形成部13の2次元的な模様に加えて、波形状の凹凸構造の山部5と谷部7のいずれもが異なる色に着色されることで、線状模様形成部13、山部5、谷部7のいずれもが異なる色に着色された3次元的な立体模様を形成することができる。 Further, in order to manufacture such a cushion material 1c, for example, resin foams 15a and resin foams 15b of different colors may be used. As shown in FIG. 6A, the resin foams 15a and the resin foams 15b of different colors are bonded to each other to form a laminated resin foam 39, and profile processing is performed to change the color of the peak 5 or the valley 7 to another. It can be different from the color of the part. That is, in addition to the two-dimensional pattern of the linear pattern forming portion 13, both the peak portion 5 and the valley portion 7 of the wavy uneven structure are colored in different colors, so that the linear pattern forming portion 13 , Each of the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7 can form a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern colored in different colors.
 また、図12Aは、クッション材1dの平面図であり、図12Bは、クッション材1dの側面図である。クッション材1dは、クッション材1cと略同様の構成であるが、クッション材1cとは、線状模様11で囲まれた山部の面積が小さく形成される点で異なる。 Further, FIG. 12A is a plan view of the cushion material 1d, and FIG. 12B is a side view of the cushion material 1d. The cushion material 1d has substantially the same structure as the cushion material 1c, but differs from the cushion material 1c in that the area of the mountain portion surrounded by the linear pattern 11 is formed to be small.
 クッション材1dの表面3は、クッション材1cと同様に、線状模様11より上側の樹脂発泡体15bにより形成される山部5と、線状模様11が形成される線状模様形成部13と、線状模様11より下側の樹脂発泡体15aにより形成される谷部7との3つの部分に区画される。クッション材1dでは、山部5、線状模様形成部13及び谷部7の少なくとも一つ又は2つの部分が、他の部位とは異なる色に形成される点もクッション材1cと同様である。 Similar to the cushion material 1c, the surface 3 of the cushion material 1d includes a mountain portion 5 formed by the resin foam 15b above the linear pattern 11 and a linear pattern forming portion 13 on which the linear pattern 11 is formed. , It is divided into three portions with a valley portion 7 formed by the resin foam 15a below the linear pattern 11. The cushion material 1d is similar to the cushion material 1c in that at least one or two portions of the peak portion 5, the linear pattern forming portion 13 and the valley portion 7 are formed in a color different from that of the other portions.
 一方、クッション材1dでは、図6Bに示したプロファイル加工時のスライス位置を上側にオフセットするか、あるいは樹脂発泡体15aと樹脂発泡体15bとで、積層樹脂発泡体39を形成する場合に、上側の樹脂発泡体15bの厚さを、下側の樹脂発泡体15aより厚くすることで、線状模様11で囲まれた山部の面積を小さく形成することができる。その結果、図12Bに示すようなクッション材が得られることになる。 On the other hand, in the cushion material 1d, when the slice position at the time of profile processing shown in FIG. 6B is offset upward, or when the resin foam 15a and the resin foam 15b form the laminated resin foam 39, the upper side is formed. By making the thickness of the resin foam 15b thicker than that of the lower resin foam 15a, the area of the mountain portion surrounded by the linear pattern 11 can be made smaller. As a result, a cushion material as shown in FIG. 12B can be obtained.
 第4の実施形態によれば、第1の実施形態と同様の効果を得ることができる。また、山部5、谷部7、線状模様11の少なくとも一部を他の部位とは異なる色とすることで、より高い意匠性を得ることができる。特に、山部5と谷部7の色や相互の面積割合を変えることで、より高い意匠性を得ることができる。 According to the fourth embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained. Further, by making at least a part of the mountain portion 5, the valley portion 7, and the linear pattern 11 a color different from other portions, higher designability can be obtained. In particular, higher design can be obtained by changing the colors of the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7 and the mutual area ratio.
 この際、線状模様11の位置を境界線として、着色しない場合の線状模様11から、山部5と谷部7(底部を含む)とが異なる色に着色された3次元的な意匠を得ることができる。 At this time, with the position of the linear pattern 11 as the boundary line, a three-dimensional design in which the peak portion 5 and the valley portion 7 (including the bottom portion) are colored in different colors from the linear pattern 11 when not colored is created. Obtainable.
 さらに、スライス加工位置を、接着面あるいは融着面が形成する波形状の範囲内でオフセットすることで、線状模様11の形成高さは、波形状の凹凸構造の範囲内の任意の高さに形成することが可能である。例えば、線状模様11を波形状の凹凸構造の高さの中心より、山部5側に形成することで、線状模様11あるいは着色された山部5の模様を小さく形成することが可能である。また、線状模様11を波形状の凹凸構造の高さの中心より谷部7側に形成することで、線状模様11あるいは着色された山部5の模様を大きく形成することが可能である。このように、山部5と谷部7の着色される面積を変化させることで、意匠性を変化させることができる。 Further, by offsetting the slicing position within the wavy shape formed by the adhesive surface or the fused surface, the formation height of the linear pattern 11 is an arbitrary height within the wavy uneven structure. It is possible to form in. For example, by forming the linear pattern 11 on the mountain portion 5 side from the center of the height of the wavy uneven structure, it is possible to form the linear pattern 11 or the colored mountain portion 5 in a smaller pattern. is there. Further, by forming the linear pattern 11 on the valley portion 7 side from the center of the height of the wavy uneven structure, it is possible to form a large pattern of the linear pattern 11 or the colored mountain portion 5. .. In this way, the design can be changed by changing the colored areas of the mountain portion 5 and the valley portion 7.
(第5の実施形態)
(積層体を用いた避難所の区画用パーテーションの接続構造)
 図13は、避難所区画50を示す図である。これにより、避難所の区画用パーテーションの構造について説明する。積層体1aは、長辺の長さが短辺の2倍の略長方形である。避難所区画50は、複数の積層体1aで構成され、床部52(災害用マット材)と壁部54(区画用パーテーション側壁)を有する。略長方形の長辺を相互に接触させて略正方形状の区画を形成するように床面にベッドにも使用可能な災害用マットついて積層体1aが床部52に2枚配置される。さらに積層体1aを、短辺方向に立設した状態で、前記略正方形状の床材としての災害用マットで形成した床部52の外周を囲うように、積層体1aの長辺を床面との接触面として、積層体1aの裏面の平坦面の短辺の端部近傍と短辺側の側端面を相互に略直角に接続させること複数回繰り返すことで、積層体1aが接続固定された壁部54を形成した接続構造であり、略正方形の一方が開口したコの字型の側壁が形成される区画を少なくとも含む接続構造である。
(Fifth Embodiment)
(Connection structure of partition for shelter compartment using laminated body)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a shelter section 50. This will explain the structure of the partition for the shelter. The laminated body 1a is substantially rectangular in which the length of the long side is twice the length of the short side. The shelter compartment 50 is composed of a plurality of laminated bodies 1a, and has a floor portion 52 (disaster mat material) and a wall portion 54 (partition side wall for division). Two laminated bodies 1a are arranged on the floor 52 with a disaster mat that can also be used as a bed on the floor so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are brought into contact with each other to form a substantially square section. Further, with the laminated body 1a erected in the short side direction, the long side of the laminated body 1a is placed on the floor surface so as to surround the outer circumference of the floor portion 52 formed of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material. As a contact surface with, the laminate 1a is connected and fixed by connecting the vicinity of the end of the short side of the flat surface on the back surface of the laminate 1a and the side end surfaces on the short side at substantially right angles to each other by repeating the process a plurality of times. It is a connection structure in which a wall portion 54 is formed, and is a connection structure including at least a section in which a U-shaped side wall having a substantially square opening is formed.
 避難所の区画用パーテーションの接続構造の形成に用いる固定手段としては、面ファスナを使用するが、面ファスナの代わりにテープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナや磁石を用いることができる。固定手段は、積層体1aの短辺の端部近傍及び端部側面の所定位置に貼着される。なお、本発明の避難所の区画用パーテーションの接続構造においては、固定手段が積層体に貼着されているため、別に固定部品を必要としないで、積層体同士を対向させて、当接又は嵌合させることで、区画用パーテーションが形成できることが最大の特徴である。面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。 A hook-and-loop fastener is used as the fixing means used to form the connection structure of the partition for the shelter, but a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to a tape-shaped member can be used instead of the hook-and-loop fastener. The fixing means is attached to the vicinity of the end portion of the short side of the laminated body 1a and at predetermined positions on the side surface of the end portion. In the connection structure of the partition for the shelter of the present invention, since the fixing means is attached to the laminate, the laminates face each other and come into contact with each other without requiring a separate fixing component. The biggest feature is that a partition for partitioning can be formed by fitting. In the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to.
この際、災害用マットの短辺側の端部側面は、プロファイル加工面の隣接する山部と山部を通過する曲線に対して、平面視略平行あるいは略垂直な方向のいずれかの方向に、山部頂部あるいは谷部頂部から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置で、略直線状に切断する。これにより、短辺側の端部側面の切断面として略長方形状の切断面を得ることができる。このような平坦な略長形状の断面を有する端部側面に固定手段を固定することで、効率的に固定手段を固定することが可能になり、面ファスナなどのテープ状固定手段の加工が不要になる。また、前記避難所区画の接続構造において、前記積層体に代えて、クッション材を使用する避難所区画の接続構造であってもよい。 At this time, the side surface of the end on the short side of the disaster mat is oriented in either a direction substantially parallel to the plan view or a direction substantially perpendicular to the adjacent mountain portion of the profile processing surface and the curve passing through the mountain portion. , Cut in a substantially straight line at a position (1/4) pitch-shifted from the top of the mountain or the top of the valley. As a result, a substantially rectangular cut surface can be obtained as the cut surface on the side surface of the end on the short side. By fixing the fixing means to the side surface of the end having such a flat substantially long cross section, the fixing means can be fixed efficiently, and there is no need to process a tape-shaped fixing means such as a hook-and-loop fastener. become. Further, in the connection structure of the evacuation center section, the connection structure of the evacuation center section may use a cushion material instead of the laminated body.
 第5の実施形態の避難所区画50の接続構造において、区画用パーテーション材として積層体1aに代えて、裏面にシート状発泡体が貼り付けられたクッション材1を使用しても良い。クッション材1は、クッション材1の平坦面から谷部までの高さ(Hv)と、クッション材1の平坦面から谷部7aと山部5aの中心線高さ(Hc)までの高さの割合Rが、50%以上確保することが望ましい。 In the connection structure of the shelter section 50 of the fifth embodiment, the cushion material 1 to which the sheet-like foam is attached to the back surface may be used instead of the laminate 1a as the partition material for the section. The cushion material 1 has a height (Hv) from the flat surface of the cushion material 1 to the valley portion and a height (Hc) from the flat surface of the cushion material 1 to the center line height (Hc) of the valley portion 7a and the mountain portion 5a. It is desirable to secure a ratio R of 50% or more.
 ここで、第5の実施形態から第8の実施形態においては、意匠性を犠牲にすれば、山部と谷部の間に多数の環状の線状模様を有する積層体1aの代わりに、プロファイル加工面に線状模様のない積層体を用いることでも、工具や特別の部品を使用することなく、組立分解が容易な積層体を用いた避難所区画の接続構造、積層体を用いた避難所区画の形成方法、避難所区画の分解収納方法及び避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法を得ることができる。 Here, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, if the design is sacrificed, the profile is replaced with the laminate 1a having a large number of annular linear patterns between the peaks and valleys. Even if a laminated body without a linear pattern is used on the processed surface, the connection structure of the evacuation center section using the laminated body that can be easily assembled and disassembled without using tools or special parts, and the evacuation center using the laminated body. A method of forming a section, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation center section, and a method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation center section can be obtained.
(第6の実施形態)
(積層体を用いた避難所の区画用パーテーションの形成方法)
 次に、第6の実施形態について説明する。積層体を用いた避難所の区画用パーテーションの接続構造で用いた図13で説明をする。図13は、避難所区画50を示す図である。
避難所区画50は、複数の積層体1aで構成され、床部52(災害用マット材)と壁部54(区画用パーテーション側壁)を有する。積層体1aは、クッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造の形成面とは逆の面に、別のシート状樹脂発泡体を積層して接着または融着することで得ることができる。または、前述したように、4層の積層樹脂発泡体を用い、スライス加工機で、2層目と3層目をスライス加工することでも得ることができる。なお、前述したように、クッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造の形成面とは逆の面に、さらに別のシート状樹脂発泡体が積層されて接着または融着されている複数層のクッション材を積層体と称する。
(Sixth Embodiment)
(Method of forming a partition for a shelter using a laminated body)
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described. This will be described with reference to FIG. 13 used in the connection structure of the partition for the shelter using the laminated body. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a shelter section 50.
The shelter compartment 50 is composed of a plurality of laminated bodies 1a, and has a floor portion 52 (disaster mat material) and a wall portion 54 (partition side wall for division). The laminated body 1a can be obtained by laminating another sheet-shaped resin foam on a surface opposite to the surface of the cushion material 1 having a corrugated uneven structure and adhering or fusing it. Alternatively, as described above, it can also be obtained by slicing the second and third layers with a slicing machine using a four-layer laminated resin foam. As described above, a plurality of layers of cushioning material in which another sheet-like resin foam is laminated and adhered or fused to the surface of the cushioning material 1 opposite to the surface on which the corrugated uneven structure is formed. Is referred to as a laminated body.
 次に、図13に示した避難所区画50の形成方法を説明する。この避難所区画50の構造に用いられる積層体1aは、例えば、長辺長さ1800mm×短辺長さ880mm×厚さ30mm (平均厚さは25mm)の略長方形の樹脂発泡シートである。すなわち、積層体1aは、長辺の長さが短辺の2倍の略長方形である。積層体1aの一方の表面には、線状模様を有する波形状の凹凸構造が形成され、他方の面は平坦面が形成されている。積層体1aには、発泡倍率20倍~40倍の樹脂発泡体が使用される。例えば、発泡倍率30倍の場合には、上記積層体の重量は、約1.25kgである。発泡倍率20倍でも約1.9kgで、2kg以下である。また、平均厚さは、50mmまで許容するものの、災害時以外の通常時の収納性を考えると、積層体の厚さは薄い方が好ましく40mm以下で十分である。そのため、積層体の重量は、最大でも5kg以下で4kgを超えることはない。 Next, a method of forming the evacuation shelter section 50 shown in FIG. 13 will be described. The laminate 1a used in the structure of the evacuation center section 50 is, for example, a substantially rectangular resin foam sheet having a long side length of 1800 mm × a short side length of 880 mm × a thickness of 30 mm (average thickness is 25 mm). That is, the laminated body 1a is substantially rectangular in which the length of the long side is twice the length of the short side. A wavy uneven structure having a linear pattern is formed on one surface of the laminated body 1a, and a flat surface is formed on the other surface. For the laminate 1a, a resin foam having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times is used. For example, when the foaming ratio is 30 times, the weight of the laminate is about 1.25 kg. Even if the foaming ratio is 20 times, it is about 1.9 kg, which is 2 kg or less. Further, although the average thickness is allowed up to 50 mm, it is preferable that the thickness of the laminated body is thin, and 40 mm or less is sufficient, considering the storability in normal times other than in the event of a disaster. Therefore, the weight of the laminated body is 5 kg or less at the maximum and does not exceed 4 kg.
 まず、避難所区画50の床部52を形成する。複数の積層体1aの平坦面または凹凸面のいずれかを床面に向けて併設することで、床面上に床部52を形成することができる。なお、2枚の積層体1aの長辺同士を添わせて並べることで、略正方形状の床部52となり、約2帖の広さの床部52が形成される。すなわち、略長方形の長辺を相互に接触させて略正方形状の区画を形成するように、床面にベッドにも使用可能な災害用マットとして積層体1aを配置する。ここで、この積層体1aにより、クッション性を有し、防湿性と断熱性に優れる床部52が形成される。 First, the floor 52 of the evacuation center section 50 is formed. By arranging either the flat surface or the uneven surface of the plurality of laminated bodies 1a toward the floor surface, the floor portion 52 can be formed on the floor surface. By arranging the two laminated bodies 1a with their long sides aligned with each other, a substantially square floor portion 52 is formed, and a floor portion 52 having an area of about 2 tatami mats is formed. That is, the laminated body 1a is arranged on the floor surface as a disaster mat that can also be used for a bed so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are brought into contact with each other to form a substantially square section. Here, the laminated body 1a forms a floor portion 52 having cushioning properties and excellent moisture-proof and heat-insulating properties.
 次に、避難所区画50の床部52に対して、区画を区切るための壁部54を形成する。壁部54は、2枚の積層体1aにより形成された約2帖の広さの略正方形状の領域の3方を囲うように配置される。すなわち、積層体1aを、短辺方向に立設した状態で、略正方形状の床材としてのベッドにも使用可能な災害用マットの外周を囲うように、積層体1aの長辺を前記災害用マットとの接触面として、短辺の端部を相互に略直角に接続させる。 Next, a wall portion 54 for dividing the division is formed with respect to the floor portion 52 of the evacuation center division 50. The wall portion 54 is arranged so as to surround three sides of a substantially square-shaped region having an area of about 2 tatami mats formed by the two laminated bodies 1a. That is, in a state where the laminated body 1a is erected in the short side direction, the long side of the laminated body 1a is covered with the disaster so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat that can be used as a bed as a substantially square floor material. As a contact surface with the mat, the ends of the short sides are connected to each other at a substantially right angle.
 より詳細には、まず、積層体1aの長辺が、略正方形状の床部52と接するように積層体1aを床部52に起立させる。床部52に起立する3枚の積層体1aの短辺を相互に略直角に順次接続することで、略正方形の区画の一方が開口した略コの字型の壁部54を形成することができる。このように、積層体1aを区画用パーテーションとして使用することで、略正方形の区画の一方が開口したコの字型の側壁が形成されて区画された、避難所の1区画である避難所区画50を形成することができる。この際、災害用マットの短辺側の端部側面は、プロファイル加工面の隣接する山部と山部を通過する曲線に対して、平面視略平行あるいは略垂直な方向のいずれかの方向に、山部頂部あるいは谷部頂部から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置で略直線状に切断する。これにより、短辺側の端部側面の切断面として略長方形状の切断面を得ることができる。このような形状の積層体の端部側面を得ることで、面ファスナや固定手段を貼り付けたテープ状部材などを効率的に積層体の端部側面に貼合することが可能になり、テープ状部材の端部側面に合わせた加工が不要になる。 More specifically, first, the laminated body 1a is erected on the floor portion 52 so that the long side of the laminated body 1a is in contact with the floor portion 52 having a substantially square shape. By sequentially connecting the short sides of the three laminated bodies 1a standing on the floor portion 52 at substantially right angles to each other, it is possible to form a substantially U-shaped wall portion 54 in which one of the substantially square sections is open. it can. In this way, by using the laminated body 1a as a partition for partitioning, a U-shaped side wall in which one of the substantially square sections is open is formed and partitioned, which is an evacuation center section, which is one section of the evacuation center. 50 can be formed. At this time, the side surface of the end on the short side of the disaster mat is oriented in either a direction substantially parallel to the plan view or a direction substantially perpendicular to the adjacent mountain portion of the profile processing surface and the curve passing through the mountain portion. , Cut in a substantially straight line at a position shifted by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain or the top of the valley. As a result, a substantially rectangular cut surface can be obtained as the cut surface on the side surface of the end on the short side. By obtaining the end side surface of the laminated body having such a shape, it becomes possible to efficiently bond the tape-shaped member to which the surface fastener or the fixing means is attached to the end side surface of the laminated body, and the tape. Processing to match the side surface of the end of the shaped member becomes unnecessary.
 このようにして得られた、3方が積層体1aで囲まれた記略正方形状の区画を基本の1区画とし、第1の区画を形成する。次いで、略正方形状の第2の区画を第1の区画に隣接して形成する。より詳細には、第2の区画の床部52を、第1の区画の床部52に連続して、第1の区画と同様に形成する。すなわち、第1の区画の床材としてのベッドにも使用可能な災害用マットに隣接して、積層体1aを用いて略正方形状の同様の大きさの第2の区画の床材としてのベッドにも使用可能な災害用マットを形成する。次に、第1の区画と反対方向に開口するコの字型の壁部54を配置して、第2の区画として形成される。このように、積層体1aを用いて、コの字型に形成した第1の区画と連続して、第1の区画とは反対方向に開口し、コの字型の端部一片を共有する、コの字型の側壁を第2の区画として形成することで、少なくとも2つのコの字型の区画を形成することができる。 The notated square-shaped section obtained in this way, which is surrounded by the laminated body 1a on three sides, is used as the basic section, and the first section is formed. Next, a substantially square second section is formed adjacent to the first section. More specifically, the floor portion 52 of the second compartment is formed consecutively from the floor portion 52 of the first compartment in the same manner as the first compartment. That is, adjacent to the disaster mat that can also be used as the floor material of the first compartment, the bed as the floor material of the second compartment having a substantially square shape and the same size using the laminated body 1a. Form a disaster mat that can also be used. Next, a U-shaped wall portion 54 that opens in the direction opposite to the first section is arranged to form a second section. In this way, using the laminated body 1a, the laminated body 1a is continuously opened in the direction opposite to the first section in succession with the first section formed in a U shape, and shares a U-shaped end piece. By forming the U-shaped side wall as the second compartment, at least two U-shaped compartments can be formed.
 次いで、第1、第2の区画と同様に、第2の区画に隣接して第3の区画の床部52を形成した後、第2の区画と反対方向に開口するコの字型の壁部54を配置して、第3の区画として形成することができる。すなわち、略正方形状の区画の開口部を順次開口方向を反対方向に開口するようにコの字型に形成して、区画の側壁部を順次繰り返し形成し、この側壁部に対応して、略正方形状の床材としてベッドにも使用可能な災害用マットを繰り返して形成することで多数の区画を形成することができる。 Then, like the first and second compartments, a U-shaped wall that opens in the opposite direction to the second compartment after forming the floor 52 of the third compartment adjacent to the second compartment. The portion 54 can be arranged to form a third compartment. That is, the openings of the substantially square compartments are sequentially formed in a U shape so as to open in the opposite directions, and the side wall portions of the compartments are sequentially and repeatedly formed, and corresponding to the side wall portions, substantially A large number of compartments can be formed by repeatedly forming a disaster mat that can also be used as a bed as a square floor material.
 このように、略正方形状の床部52を形成し、床部52に積層体1aの長辺を相互に接させて壁部54を形成することで、略コの字型の区画を形成することができる。この際、隣り合う区画同士において、反対方向に開口するように連続したコの字型に壁部54を形成して区画用パーテーションとすることで、少なくとも2つまたは3つ略正方形状の区画を含む避難所区画50の形成することができる。 In this way, a substantially square floor portion 52 is formed, and the long sides of the laminated body 1a are brought into contact with each other on the floor portion 52 to form the wall portion 54, thereby forming a substantially U-shaped section. be able to. At this time, at least two or three substantially square-shaped sections are formed by forming a continuous U-shaped wall portion 54 between adjacent sections so as to open in opposite directions to form a partition for the section. The including shelter compartment 50 can be formed.
 さらに、複数の略正方形状の床部52を互いに隣接するように形成し、隣り合う床部52に対して、それぞれ開口方向が反対方向に向くようにコの字型に壁部54を形成することを順次繰り返してもよい。このようにすることで、多数の区画が連続して配置された避難所区画50の形成することができる。 Further, a plurality of substantially square floor portions 52 are formed so as to be adjacent to each other, and a U-shaped wall portion 54 is formed so that the opening directions of the adjacent floor portions 52 are opposite to each other. This may be repeated sequentially. By doing so, it is possible to form a shelter compartment 50 in which a large number of compartments are continuously arranged.
 なお、この形成方法において、積層体1aの平坦面を床面に向けて配置してもよい。すなわち、床材としては、積層体1aの平坦面あるいは波形状の凹凸構造面のいずれかを床面に向けて配置すればよい。また、積層体1aにより形成されるコの字型の壁部54は、積層体1aの模様形成面である波形状の凹凸構造面と反対側の平坦面を交互に向けて配置してもよい。例えば、積層体1aによって形成されるコの字型に配置された側壁部に対し、積層体1aの積層体1aの模様形成面である波形状の凹凸構造面を区画の各辺に沿って、外方、内方、外方の順に向けて交互に配置するか、あるいは、内方、外方、内方の順に向けて交互に配置して、避難所区画50の形成することもできる。このような配置とすることで、非難所の意匠性を高めることができる。また、同時に防音性や防湿性、断熱性に優れるものとすることができる。そのため、避難所利用者が所定の区画内で快適に過ごすことができる。以上のように、区画の形成にあたっては適宜波形状の凹凸構造面の方向を区画の各辺に沿って、いずれの方向に向けるか意匠性を考慮して適宜選択すればよい。 In this forming method, the flat surface of the laminated body 1a may be arranged toward the floor surface. That is, as the floor material, either the flat surface of the laminated body 1a or the corrugated uneven structure surface may be arranged toward the floor surface. Further, the U-shaped wall portion 54 formed by the laminated body 1a may be arranged so that the flat surface on the opposite side to the wave-shaped uneven structure surface which is the pattern forming surface of the laminated body 1a is alternately arranged. .. For example, with respect to the side wall portion arranged in a U shape formed by the laminated body 1a, a wavy uneven structure surface which is a pattern forming surface of the laminated body 1a of the laminated body 1a is formed along each side of the partition. The shelter compartment 50 may be formed by alternately arranging them in the order of outer, inner, and outer, or by arranging them alternately in the order of inner, outer, and inner. With such an arrangement, the design of the criticized place can be enhanced. At the same time, it can be excellent in soundproofing, moistureproofing and heat insulating properties. Therefore, the evacuation center user can spend comfortably in the predetermined section. As described above, when forming the section, the direction of the corrugated uneven structure surface may be appropriately selected in consideration of the design, which direction should be directed along each side of the section.
 また、区画用パーテーションとして積層体1aを組み立てる際に、積層体1aの表面に貼着された微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナにより積層体1a同士を接続してもよい。このように、積層体1a同士を面ファスナにより簡易に接続することで、避難所区画50を容易に組み立てることができる。また、積層体1aは、例えば、1枚1.5kg程度と軽量なため、組み立て時の運搬移動性にも優れるものである。また、避難所区画50用の積層体1aは、表面に模様を有する1枚のクッション材1の波形状の凹凸構造とは逆の面に、別のシート状樹脂発泡体が積層されたものであるため、壁部54として使用する場合に組立自立性にも優れている。 Further, when assembling the laminated body 1a as a partition for partitioning, the laminated bodies 1a may be connected to each other by a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections attached to the surface of the laminated body 1a are formed. In this way, the evacuation shelter section 50 can be easily assembled by simply connecting the laminated bodies 1a to each other with a hook-and-loop fastener. Further, since the laminated body 1a is as light as about 1.5 kg per sheet, it is also excellent in transportability during assembly. Further, the laminated body 1a for the evacuation center section 50 is formed by laminating another sheet-shaped resin foam on the surface opposite to the wavy uneven structure of one cushion material 1 having a pattern on the surface. Therefore, it is also excellent in assembly independence when used as a wall portion 54.
 ここで、組立自立性が優れているとは、積層体1aによって避難所区画50を形成するために、積層体1a同士を、例えば、面ファスナ等にて固定した際に、接続した積層体1aが面ファスナで固定した部分以外の反対の端面においても、積層体1aの重心が安定なため、立設された積層体1aの短辺の上部が傾いたり、撓むことなく自立した形で組立が可能なことである。 Here, "excellent assembly independence" means that the laminated bodies 1a are connected to each other when the laminated bodies 1a are fixed to each other by, for example, a hook-and-loop fastener, in order to form a shelter section 50 by the laminated body 1a. Since the center of gravity of the laminated body 1a is stable even on the opposite end surface other than the portion fixed by the hook-and-loop fastener, the upper part of the short side of the erected laminated body 1a is assembled in a self-supporting manner without tilting or bending. Is possible.
 なお、積層体1aを接続する際には、一方の積層体1aの平坦面の幅方向の端部と、他方の積層体1aの端面とを接触させて、面ファスナで接続することが望ましい。例えば、面ファスナは、積層体1aの平坦面の長辺方向の上方端部から下方端部の所定位置あるいは、積層体の端面の平坦部に対応する部分の上方から下方の所定位置に貼着される。より詳細には、この面ファスナは、高さ方向で少なくとも上方、中間部、下方の三カ所に貼着されることが望ましい。 When connecting the laminated body 1a, it is desirable that the end portion of the flat surface of one laminated body 1a in the width direction and the end surface of the other laminated body 1a are brought into contact with each other and connected by a hook-and-loop fastener. For example, the hook-and-loop fastener is attached to a predetermined position from the upper end to the lower end in the long side direction of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, or from the upper side to the lower predetermined position of the portion corresponding to the flat portion of the end surface of the laminated body. Will be done. More specifically, it is desirable that the hook-and-loop fasteners be attached to at least three places in the height direction: upper part, middle part, and lower part.
 例えば、一方の積層体1aには、積層体1aの平坦面の幅方向の上方端部、中間部及び下方端部の所定位置に面ファスナを貼着し、他方の積層体1aの端面の上方、中間部及び下方の所定位置に面ファスナを貼着する。ここで、面ファスナ等の固定手段の固定位置は、上記のような配置でもよいが、上方端部から下方端部に向けて均等配置してもよく、積層体同士を安定して接続支持できれば特に問題はない。 For example, a hook-and-loop fastener is attached to one of the laminated bodies 1a at predetermined positions of the upper end portion, the middle portion and the lower end portion in the width direction of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, and above the end surface of the other laminated body 1a. , Attach the hook-and-loop fastener to the middle part and the lower part at the predetermined position. Here, the fixing positions of the fixing means such as the hook-and-loop fastener may be arranged as described above, but may be evenly arranged from the upper end portion to the lower end portion, as long as the laminated bodies can be stably connected and supported. There is no particular problem.
 一方の積層体1aと他方の積層体1aの面ファスナの貼着位置が互いに対応する位置であれば、一方の積層体1aの平坦面に貼着される面ファスナと、他方の積層体1aの端面に貼着される面ファスナを相互に対向させることで積層体1a同士を接続することができる。このように、平坦面の所定位置に貼着される面ファスナと、端面に貼着される面ファスナを相互に対向させることで両者が接続される。この際、組立自立性に優れる積層体1aを用いれば、組み立てた区画用パーテーションに不要な隙間が生じることがなく、組立性にも優れることになる。 If the attachment positions of the surface fasteners of one laminate 1a and the other laminate 1a correspond to each other, the surface fasteners attached to the flat surface of one laminate 1a and the other laminate 1a The laminated bodies 1a can be connected to each other by facing each other with the hook-and-loop fasteners attached to the end faces. In this way, the surface fasteners attached to the predetermined positions on the flat surface and the surface fasteners attached to the end surfaces are opposed to each other to connect the two. At this time, if the laminated body 1a having excellent assembly independence is used, unnecessary gaps are not generated in the assembled partition for partitioning, and the assembling property is also excellent.
ここで、避難所の区画用パーテーションの形成に用いる固定手段としては、面ファスナを用いて説明したが、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナや磁石を、面ファスナの代わりに用いることができる。また、その効果は、避難所の区画用パーテーションの接続構造の場合と同様である。面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。 Here, as the fixing means used for forming the partition for the shelter, a hook-and-loop fastener has been described, but a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member can be used instead of the hook-and-loop fastener. .. In addition, the effect is the same as in the case of the connection structure of the partition for the shelter. In the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to.
 なお、詳細は後述するが、組立自立性に優れる積層体1aは、積層体1aの平坦面から谷部7aまでの高さ(Hv)と、積層体1aの平坦面から谷部7aと山部5aの中心線高さ(Hc)までの高さの割合が、50%以上であることが望ましい。より望ましくは60%以上である。 Although the details will be described later, the laminated body 1a having excellent assembly independence includes the height (Hv) from the flat surface of the laminated body 1a to the valley portion 7a and the valley portion 7a and the mountain portion from the flat surface of the laminated body 1a. It is desirable that the ratio of the height to the center line height (Hc) of 5a is 50% or more. More preferably, it is 60% or more.
 避難所区画50の形成方法において、区画用パーテーション材として積層体1aに代えて、表面に線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材1を使用しても良い。クッション材1を、組立自立性に優れるようにするためには、クッション材1の平坦面から谷部までの高さ(Hv)と、クッション材1の平坦面から谷部7aと山部5aの中心線高さ(Hc)までの高さの割合が、50%以上であることが望ましいことは同様である。 In the method of forming the evacuation center section 50, instead of the laminated body 1a, the cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure having a linear pattern formed on the surface may be used as the partition material for the section. In order to make the cushion material 1 excellent in assembly independence, the height (Hv) from the flat surface to the valley portion of the cushion material 1 and the valley portion 7a and the mountain portion 5a from the flat surface of the cushion material 1 Similarly, it is desirable that the ratio of the height to the center line height (Hc) is 50% or more.
(積層体の切断位置と切断された端部側面の断面の形状の関係)
 ここで、第5の実施形態から第7の実施形態において、積層体1aの固定手段が貼合される切断面について見ると、図14A~図14Cには、積層体の切断位置と切断された端部側面の断面の形状の関係を示す。図14Aは、積層体のプロファイル加工面から見た切断位置を示す。図14Bは、山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線上で切断した場合の切断面(山部頂部を結ぶ切断面71)を示す。図14Cは、山部頂部と谷部底部から、(1/4)ピッチ離れた変曲点位置を直線状に結ぶように切断した場合の切断面(変曲点を結ぶ切断面70)を示す。
(Relationship between the cutting position of the laminated body and the shape of the cross section of the cut end side surface)
Here, in the fifth to seventh embodiments, looking at the cut surface to which the fixing means of the laminated body 1a is bonded, FIGS. 14A to 14C show the cutting position of the laminated body and the cut surface. The relationship between the shapes of the cross sections of the side surfaces of the ends is shown. FIG. 14A shows the cutting position as seen from the profiled surface of the laminate. FIG. 14B shows a cut surface (cut surface 71 connecting the tops of the peaks) when cut on a curve that alternately passes through the tops of the peaks and the bottoms of the valleys. FIG. 14C shows a cut surface (cut surface 70 connecting the inflection points) when the inflection point positions separated by (1/4) pitch from the top of the mountain portion and the bottom of the valley portion are cut so as to linearly connect them. ..
 積層体1aを図14AのXX線に沿って、山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線上で略直線状に切断すると、図14Bに示すように切断面の凹凸が最も大きくなり、前記積層体の端面の平行部断面積が最も小さくなる。これに対して、積層体1aを、山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線から、平面視略平行あるいは略直角な方向のいずれかに(1/4)ピッチずれた変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断することで、切断面の凹凸が最も少なく、略長形状の切断面が得られて、前記積層体の端面の平行部断面積が最も大きくなる。例えば、図14AのYY線に沿って、切断すると図14Cに示すように切断面の凹凸が最も少なく、略長形状の切断面が得られて、前記積層体の端面の平行部断面積が最も大きくなる。この際、山部と谷部を形成する樹脂発泡体15aと樹脂発泡体15bの境界である接着層あるいは融着層とプロファイル加工面の山部頂点から谷部底部に至る曲線の変曲点と一致すると、切断した略平行な断面の上端部に周期的な所定長さの線状模様が形成される。なお、線状模様が変曲点より上側か下側のいずれかずれた位置に形成される場合には、切断面に線状模様は現れない。ここで、山部頂部と谷部底部を結ぶ線が曲線状でなく直線状である場合には、山部頂部と谷部底部の中間位置または谷部底部と山部頂部の中間位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断することでも、変曲点を有する場合と同様の略長方形状の切断面が得られ、同様の挙動が確認された。 When the laminate 1a is cut substantially linearly on a curve that alternately passes through the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley along the XX line of FIG. 14A, the unevenness of the cut surface becomes the largest as shown in FIG. 14B. The cross-sectional area of the parallel portion of the end face of the laminated body is the smallest. On the other hand, the inflection point position where the laminated body 1a is (1/4) pitch-shifted in either a direction substantially parallel to a plan view or a direction substantially perpendicular to the curve that alternately passes through the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley. By cutting in a substantially straight line so as to connect the two, a cut surface having a substantially long shape with the least unevenness of the cut surface can be obtained, and the cross-sectional area of the parallel portion of the end surface of the laminated body becomes the largest. For example, when cutting along the YY line of FIG. 14A, as shown in FIG. 14C, the unevenness of the cut surface is the smallest, a substantially long cut surface is obtained, and the cross-sectional area of the parallel portion of the end surface of the laminated body is the largest. growing. At this time, the inflection point of the curve from the apex of the mountain portion to the bottom of the valley portion of the adhesive layer or the fusion layer and the profile processed surface, which is the boundary between the resin foam 15a and the resin foam 15b forming the peak and the valley. When they match, a linear pattern of a predetermined length is formed periodically at the upper end of the cut substantially parallel cross section. When the linear pattern is formed at a position shifted above or below the inflection point, the linear pattern does not appear on the cut surface. Here, when the line connecting the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is not curved but straight, connect the intermediate position between the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley or the intermediate position between the bottom of the valley and the top of the valley. By cutting in a substantially straight line, a substantially rectangular cut surface similar to that in the case of having an inflection point was obtained, and the same behavior was confirmed.
 また、このプロファイル加工面の山部谷部は、相互に直交する方向にも同様の周期構造を有しているため、平面視略平行あるいは略直角な直交する2方向のいずれの山部頂部から谷部底部に至る中間あるいは谷部底部から山部頂部に至る中間の変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断することが可能になる。ここで、さらに厳密には、山部谷部の周期構造を考えると、このような変曲点位置は、プロファイル加工面における隣接する山部頂部から山部頂部まで、あるいは谷部底部から谷部底部までの距離を1ピッチとすると、(1/4)、(3/4)、(5/4)ピッチの位置に周期的に出願することは、図4Aの切断位置を示す図面からも理解できる。より厳密には、(2N+1)/4(N:自然数)ピッチ毎に切断することが可能である。なお、図14AのXX線と図14BのYY線の間で同様の方向で切断することもできる。その場合には、図14AのXX線で切断した場合より、切断面の凹凸が小さいが切断面に凹凸を有する切断面が得られる。この場合には、切断位置がXX線に近い場合には、凹凸の大きさがXX線で切断した場合に近くなり、切断位置がYY線に近い場合には、凹凸の大きさがYY線で切断した場合に近づくことで平坦に近くなるが、必要によっては、このような切断方法も可能である。 Further, since the mountainous valleys of this profiled surface have the same periodic structure in the directions orthogonal to each other, from the tops of the mountainous portions in either of the two orthogonal directions, which are substantially parallel to the plan view or substantially perpendicular to each other. It is possible to cut in a substantially straight line so as to connect the positions of the turning points in the middle to the bottom of the valley or in the middle from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. Here, more strictly speaking, considering the periodic structure of the mountain part valley, such an inflection point position is located from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top on the profile machined surface, or from the valley bottom to the valley. Assuming that the distance to the bottom is 1 pitch, it is understood from the drawing showing the cutting position in FIG. 4A that applications are periodically filed at positions of (1/4), (3/4), and (5/4) pitches. it can. More strictly, it is possible to cut at every (2N + 1) / 4 (N: natural number) pitch. It is also possible to cut in the same direction between the XX line of FIG. 14A and the YY line of FIG. 14B. In that case, a cut surface having smaller irregularities on the cut surface but having irregularities on the cut surface can be obtained as compared with the case of cutting with the XX line of FIG. 14A. In this case, when the cutting position is close to the XX line, the size of the unevenness is close to the case of cutting with the XX line, and when the cutting position is close to the YY line, the size of the unevenness is the YY line. By approaching the case of cutting, the surface becomes flat, but if necessary, such a cutting method is also possible.
 前記積層体は、切断位置により、固定手段を貼合する平坦な部分の面積が異なる。そこで、側端面における平行部面積が最も大きい断面を選んでその部分を切断部位にすれば、面ファスナなどの固定手段を貼合する面積を最大化できる。この山部頂部と谷部底部、谷部底部と山部頂部を結ぶ線上から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置すなわち山部と谷部を結ぶ曲線の変曲点位置を結ぶように切断することで、切断された側端面の周期的な凹凸構造である側端面の幅の狭小部を少なくして側端面における平行部面積が最も大きい略長方形状に側端面を形成することができる。これにより、側端面に貼合する固定手段のテープ状部材の幅を最大化することができ、そのため、強固な接続構造とすることができる。 The area of the flat portion to which the fixing means is attached differs depending on the cutting position of the laminated body. Therefore, if the cross section having the largest parallel portion area on the side end surface is selected and that portion is used as the cutting portion, the area to which the fixing means such as the surface fastener is attached can be maximized. Cut so as to connect the position shifted by (1/4) pitch from the line connecting the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley, and the bottom of the valley and the top of the mountain, that is, the inflection point position of the curve connecting the mountain and the valley. Therefore, the side end face can be formed in a substantially rectangular shape having the largest parallel portion area on the side end face by reducing the narrow portion of the width of the side end face, which is a periodic uneven structure of the cut side end face. As a result, the width of the tape-shaped member of the fixing means to be bonded to the side end surface can be maximized, and therefore a strong connection structure can be obtained.
(第7の実施形態)
(避難所区画の分解収納方法)
 次に、避難所区画の分解収納方法について説明する。図15A、図15Bは、前述した方法で形成された避難所区画50の収納状態を示す図であり、図15Aは正面図、図15Bは平面図である。避難所区画50の収納時には、積層体1aの端面が固定されて壁面51に収納される。
(7th Embodiment)
(How to disassemble and store the evacuation center)
Next, a method of disassembling and storing the evacuation center section will be described. 15A and 15B are views showing a storage state of the shelter section 50 formed by the method described above, FIG. 15A is a front view, and FIG. 15B is a plan view. When the evacuation center section 50 is stored, the end face of the laminated body 1a is fixed and stored on the wall surface 51.
 避難所区画50を分解収納するためには、まず、避難所区画50を形成した積層体1aを分解する。積層体1aを分解後、1枚の積層体1aを、平坦面を壁面51に向けて配置して壁面51へ固定する。この際、固定に用いる固定手段としては、他の固定手段もあるが、ここでは、面ファスナ53の場合で説明する。積層体1aの平坦面の両側の所定位置には面ファスナ53dが配置され、壁面51の、面ファスナ53dの配設位置に対応する位置には、面ファスナ53cが配置される。このため、面ファスナ53c、53dによって、積層体1aを壁面51に固定することができる。すなわち、壁面51の面ファスナ53dに、1枚目の積層体1aの面ファスナ53dを接触させることで、積層体1aを壁面に51立設固定する。 In order to disassemble and store the evacuation center section 50, first, the laminated body 1a forming the evacuation center section 50 is disassembled. After disassembling the laminated body 1a, one laminated body 1a is fixed to the wall surface 51 by arranging the flat surface toward the wall surface 51. At this time, as the fixing means used for fixing, there are other fixing means, but here, the case of the hook-and-loop fastener 53 will be described. The hook-and-loop fasteners 53d are arranged at predetermined positions on both sides of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, and the hook-and-loop fasteners 53c are arranged at positions on the wall surface 51 corresponding to the arrangement positions of the hook-and-loop fasteners 53d. Therefore, the laminated body 1a can be fixed to the wall surface 51 by the surface fasteners 53c and 53d. That is, by bringing the surface fastener 53d of the first laminated body 1a into contact with the surface fastener 53d of the wall surface 51, the laminated body 1a is erected and fixed to the wall surface 51.
 さらに、壁面51に立設固定した積層体1aの平坦面の裏面の波形状の凹凸構造面に、2枚目の積層体1aの波形状の凹凸構造面を重ね、を1枚目の積層体1aの端面を揃えて2枚積重ねとする。その後、新たな積層体1aである3枚目と4枚目の積層体1aとを、それぞれの積層面である平坦面、波形状の凹凸構造面を1枚目、2枚目の積層体1aの場合と同様の順にそれぞれの積層面と端面を揃えて立設する。すなわち、順次、平坦面同士、波形状の凹凸構造面同士を対向させて、それぞれの端面を揃えて繰り返して立設する。 Further, the corrugated concave-convex structure surface of the back surface of the flat surface of the laminate 1a erected and fixed to the wall surface 51 is superposed on the corrugated concave-convex structure surface of the second laminate 1a, and the first laminate is formed. The end faces of 1a are aligned to form a stack of two sheets. After that, the third and fourth laminated bodies 1a, which are new laminated bodies 1a, are subjected to the flat surface, which is the respective laminated surface, and the wavy uneven structure surface, which is the first and second laminated body 1a. Each laminated surface and end surface are aligned and erected in the same order as in the case of. That is, the flat surfaces and the wavy concave-convex structure surfaces are sequentially opposed to each other, and the end surfaces of the respective end surfaces are aligned and erected repeatedly.
 さらにその後も、積層体1aを同様の手順で、積み重ねる。なお、積み重ねる積層体1aの枚数に応じて、積み重ねる枚数が奇数枚の場合には、最終積み重ね面が平坦面であり、最表面が波形状の凹凸構造面であり、積み重ねる枚数が偶数枚の場合には、最終積み重ね面が波形状の凹凸構造面であり、最表面が平坦面となる。このように、積層体を順次繰り返して積み重ねて立設する。 After that, the laminated body 1a is stacked in the same procedure. When the number of stacked sheets is an odd number according to the number of stacked layers 1a, the final stacking surface is a flat surface, the outermost surface is a wavy uneven structure surface, and the number of stacked sheets is an even number. The final stacking surface is a wavy uneven structure surface, and the outermost surface is a flat surface. In this way, the laminated bodies are sequentially repeated and stacked to stand upright.
 ここで、積層体1aの端面の所定位置には、面ファスナ53cが貼合される。このため、立設したそれぞれの積層体1aの端面の面ファスナ53aにまたがるように、重ね合わせた積層体1aの全厚に見合う長さの別の面ファスナ53bを配置することで、すべての積層体1aの端面を一括して固定することができる。 Here, the surface fastener 53c is attached to a predetermined position on the end surface of the laminated body 1a. Therefore, by arranging another surface fastener 53b having a length corresponding to the total thickness of the laminated layers 1a so as to straddle the surface fastener 53a on the end surface of each of the erected laminated bodies 1a, all the layers are laminated. The end faces of the body 1a can be fixed together.
 ここで、避難所の区画用パーテーションの避難所区画の分解収納方法に用いる固定手段としては、面ファスナを用いて説明したが、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナや磁石を、面ファスナの代わりに用いることができる。なお、避難所の区画用パーテーションの分解収納方法においても、固定手段として、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナや磁石を用いることで、容易に避難所の区画用パーテーションが分解収納できる。面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。この際、避難所の区画用パーテーションの避難所区画の分解収納方法に用いる固定手段は、避難所区画の組立に用いる積層体の組立に用いる固定手段と同一の固定手段を用いることは言うまでもない。 Here, as the fixing means used for the method of disassembling and storing the shelter compartment of the partition for the shelter, the surface fastener has been described, but the button-shaped fastener or the magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member is used as the surface fastener. It can be used instead. Also in the method of disassembling and storing the partition for the shelter, the partition for the shelter can be easily disassembled and stored by using a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member as the fixing means. In the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to. At this time, it goes without saying that the fixing means used for the method of disassembling and storing the shelter section of the partition for the shelter section is the same as the fixing means used for assembling the laminate used for assembling the shelter section.
 以上のようにして、避難所区画50に使用された積層体1aを分解して収納することができる。この際、積層体1aの表面に線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造の面が最表面となるように配置して、コンパクトに収納することができる。この際、積層体1aの端面形状は、避難所区画50を組立て使用するため、組立時に取り付け固定する積層体1aの端面は、前記のように、プロファイル加工面の隣接する山部と山部を通過する曲線に対して、平面視略平行あるいは略垂直な方向のいずれかの方向に、山部頂部あるいは谷部頂部から(1/4)ピッチずれた位置で、略直線状に切断する。これにより、短辺側の端部側面の切断面として略長方形状の切断面を得ることができる。このような形状の積層体の端部側面を得ることで、面ファスナや固定手段を貼り付けたテープ状部材などを効率的に積層体の端部側面に貼合することが可能になり、テープ状部材の端部側面に合わせた加工が不要になる。 As described above, the laminated body 1a used in the evacuation center section 50 can be disassembled and stored. At this time, the surface of the wavy uneven structure in which the linear pattern is formed on the surface of the laminated body 1a is arranged so as to be the outermost surface, and can be stored compactly. At this time, since the end face shape of the laminated body 1a is used by assembling the evacuation center section 50, the end face of the laminated body 1a to be attached and fixed at the time of assembly has a mountain portion and a mountain portion adjacent to the profile processed surface as described above. It is cut in a substantially straight line at a position (1/4) pitch deviated from the top of the mountain or the top of the valley in either the direction substantially parallel to the plane view or the direction substantially perpendicular to the passing curve. As a result, a substantially rectangular cut surface can be obtained as the cut surface on the side surface of the end on the short side. By obtaining the end side surface of the laminated body having such a shape, it becomes possible to efficiently bond the tape-shaped member to which the surface fastener or the fixing means is attached to the end side surface of the laminated body, and the tape. Processing to match the side surface of the end of the shaped member becomes unnecessary.
 なお、前述した避難所区画の分解収納方法において、積層体1aに代えて、表面に線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材1を使用してもよい。 In the above-mentioned disassembly and storage method of the evacuation shelter section, the cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure having a linear pattern formed on the surface may be used instead of the laminated body 1a.
(第8の実施形態)
(避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法)
 図16A、図16Bは、避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネル60を示す図であり、図16Aは正面図、図16Bは平面図、図16Cは、図16Bの面ファスナ53c、53d近傍の拡大図である。衝撃緩衝壁面パネル60の形成方法は、以下の通りである。まず、前述したように、積層体1aを用いた避難所の区画の形成方法において形成した避難所区画50を分解する。ここでも、上述の場合と同様に固定手段としては、面ファスナを用いて説明する。
(8th Embodiment)
(How to form a shock absorbing wall panel in an evacuation center)
16A and 16B are views showing the impact absorbing wall panel 60 of the evacuation center section, FIG. 16A is a front view, FIG. 16B is a plan view, and FIG. 16C is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the hook-and-loop fasteners 53c and 53d of FIG. 16B. Is. The method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel 60 is as follows. First, as described above, the shelter compartment 50 formed in the method of forming the shelter compartment using the laminated body 1a is disassembled. Here, as in the case described above, the surface fastener will be used as the fixing means.
 次に、分解された積層体1aの平坦面を壁面51に向けて配置する。この際、積層体1aの平坦面の両側の所定位置に面ファスナ53dが配置され、面ファスナ53dの配設位置に対応した壁面51の所定位置に面ファスナ53cが配置される。すなわち、積層体1aの短辺を壁面51に平行な立設面として連続配置した場合に積層体1aの平坦面の面ファスナ53dの配設位置に対応させて、壁面51の所定位置に面ファスナ53cが配設される。このため、面ファスナ53c、53dによって積層体1aを、凹凸面を室内側に向けて壁面51に固定することができる。 Next, the flat surface of the disassembled laminated body 1a is arranged toward the wall surface 51. At this time, the surface fasteners 53d are arranged at predetermined positions on both sides of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a, and the surface fasteners 53c are arranged at predetermined positions on the wall surface 51 corresponding to the arrangement positions of the surface fasteners 53d. That is, when the short side of the laminated body 1a is continuously arranged as an upright surface parallel to the wall surface 51, the surface fastener is placed at a predetermined position on the wall surface 51 in accordance with the arrangement position of the surface fastener 53d on the flat surface of the laminated body 1a. 53c is arranged. Therefore, the laminated body 1a can be fixed to the wall surface 51 with the uneven surface facing the indoor side by the surface fasteners 53c and 53d.
 さらに別の積層体1aの平坦面を壁面51に向けて、最初に固定された積層体1aと連続するように、波形状の凹凸構造面を室内側に向けて配置し、壁面51の所定位置に配設された面ファスナ53cにて壁面51に固定する。さらに、次々と直前に壁面51へ固定した積層体1aと連続するように積層体1aを壁面51へ固定することで、避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネル60を形成することできる。このように、本実施形態では、避難所区画50の床部52や壁部54、あるいは衝立として使用しない場合には、積層体1aの凹凸面を室内側に向けて壁面51に固定することで、壁面51に所定の大きさの意匠性に優れた衝撃緩衝壁面パネル60を形成することができる。 The flat surface of the other laminated body 1a is directed toward the wall surface 51, and the corrugated uneven structure surface is arranged toward the indoor side so as to be continuous with the initially fixed laminated body 1a, and the predetermined position of the wall surface 51 is arranged. It is fixed to the wall surface 51 by the surface fastener 53c arranged in. Further, by fixing the laminated body 1a to the wall surface 51 one after another so as to be continuous with the laminated body 1a fixed to the wall surface 51 immediately before, the shock absorbing wall panel 60 of the evacuation shelter section can be formed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the uneven surface of the laminated body 1a is fixed to the wall surface 51 toward the indoor side when it is not used as the floor portion 52 or the wall portion 54 of the evacuation center section 50 or as a tsuitate. A shock absorbing wall panel 60 having a predetermined size and excellent design can be formed on the wall surface 51.
 なお、積層体1aに代えて、表面に線状模様が形成された波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材1を使用してもよい。この場合でも、避難所区画50を構成するクッション材1を分解して衝撃緩衝壁面パネル60を形成することができる。このように、積層体1aは、災害時には、避難所の区画用パーテーション側壁又はベッドにも使用可能な災害用マット材として使用することが可能であり、通常時には、衝撃吸収用壁面パネル材として使用することが可能である。 In addition, instead of the laminated body 1a, a cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure in which a linear pattern is formed on the surface may be used. Even in this case, the cushioning material 1 constituting the evacuation center section 50 can be disassembled to form the shock absorbing wall panel 60. As described above, the laminated body 1a can be used as a disaster mat material that can be used as a partition side wall for a shelter or a bed in the event of a disaster, and is usually used as a wall panel material for shock absorption. It is possible to do.
 ここで、避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法に用いる固定手段としては、面ファスナを用いて説明したが、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナや磁石を面ファスナの代わりに用いることができる。なお、避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法においても、固定手段として、同様の固定手段を用いることができる。面ファスナは、面ファスナの裏面を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定し、ボタン状ファスナや磁石を貼り付けたテープ状部材は、テープ状部材を粘着剤または接着剤で積層体に固定することができる。この際、避難所区画の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法に用いる固定手段は、避難所区画の組立に用いる積層体の組立に用いる固定手段と同一の固定手段を用いることは言うまでもない。 Here, as the fixing means used for the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation shelter section, the surface fastener has been described, but a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to the tape-shaped member is used instead of the surface fastener. Can be done. In addition, in the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation center section, the same fixing means can be used as the fixing means. In the surface fastener, the back surface of the surface fastener is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive, and in the tape-like member to which the button-shaped fastener or the magnet is attached, the tape-like member is fixed to the laminate with an adhesive or an adhesive. be able to. At this time, it goes without saying that the fixing means used for the method of forming the shock absorbing wall panel of the evacuation center section is the same as the fixing means used for assembling the laminate used for assembling the evacuation center section.
(積層体の組立自立性の評価試験による評価)
 面ファスナで複数の積層体1aを接合した側壁区画用パーテーション(壁部54)は、クッション性が必要なため、これに使用する積層体1aは剛性が必ずしも高いとは限らない。このため、側壁区画用パーテーションの組立作業時の自立性について確認する試験を行った。図17は、区画用パーテーションの組立自立性試験の説明図を示す図であり、図18Aは、区画用パーテーションの組立自立性評価に用いた積層体1aの各部の寸法を示す図である。
(Evaluation by evaluation test of assembly independence of laminated body)
Since the partition for the side wall section (wall portion 54) in which a plurality of laminated bodies 1a are joined by a hook-and-loop fastener needs to have cushioning properties, the laminated body 1a used for this is not necessarily highly rigid. For this reason, a test was conducted to confirm the independence of the partition for the side wall section during the assembly work. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an explanatory view of an assembly independence test of a partition partition, and FIG. 18A is a diagram showing the dimensions of each part of the laminate 1a used for evaluating the assembly independence of the partition.
 組立作業時の自立性の評価は、側壁区画用パーテーションを模して、積層体1aの長辺長さ方向(図中I)1800mm×高さ方向(図中J:短辺方向)880mmの2枚の積層体1a’、1a’’を作成した。切断した2枚の積層体1a’、1a’’の長さ方向部を横にしてそれぞれ床面に接するように、2枚の積層体1a’、1a’’を相互に直交するように配置した。 The evaluation of the independence during the assembly work is performed by imitating the partition for the side wall section, that is, the long side length direction (I in the figure) 1800 mm × height direction (J: short side direction) 880 mm of the laminated body 1a. A laminated body 1a', 1a'' was prepared. The two laminated bodies 1a ′ and 1a'' that were cut were arranged so as to be orthogonal to each other so that the lengthwise portions of the two laminated bodies 1a ′ and 1a ″ were laid horizontally and in contact with the floor surface, respectively. ..
 図17に示すように、一方の積層体1a’の平坦面の長さ方向の端部と、他方の積層体1a’’の長さ方向の側端面とを相互に面ファスナで接続した。積層体1a’、1a’’の接続位置は、高さ方向に3か所とし、上方の面ファスナ貼着部61a、中間の面ファスナ貼着部61b、及び下方の面ファスナ貼着部61cにおいて、両者を接続した。すなわち、一方の積層体1a’には、積層体1a’の平坦面の長さ方向端部であって、高さ方向の上方、中間部及び下方のそれぞれに面ファスナが貼着される。また、他方の積層体1a’’には、積層体1a’’の長さ方向の側端面であって、高さ方向の上方、中間部及び下方の所定位置に面ファスナが貼着される。 As shown in FIG. 17, the end portion of the flat surface of one laminate 1a ″ in the length direction and the side end surface of the other laminate 1a ″ in the length direction were connected to each other by a hook-and-loop fastener. The laminated bodies 1a'and 1a' are connected at three positions in the height direction, with the upper surface fastener attaching portion 61a, the intermediate surface fastener attaching portion 61b, and the lower surface fastener attaching portion 61c. , Both were connected. That is, on one of the laminated bodies 1a', surface fasteners are attached to the upper, middle and lower portions of the flat surface of the laminated body 1a'in the length direction, respectively. Further, a hook-and-loop fastener is attached to the other laminated body 1a ″ at predetermined positions above, in the middle, and below in the height direction, which is the side end surface of the laminated body 1a ″ in the length direction.
 一方の積層体1a’の平坦面に貼着される面ファスナと、他方の積層体1a’’の側端面に貼着される面ファスナとを相互に対向させて接続することで、積層体が互いに直交して接続された接続構造体を作成することできる。この積層体の接続構造体を用いて、組立自立性を評価した。積層体は、積層体のプロファイル加工面の山部同士を結ぶ曲線である表面の凹凸の最も大きい位置より、平面視略平行に(1/4)ピッチずれた位置で直線状に切断したものを用いたので、積層体の側端面は、プロファイル加工前のシート厚さに相当する略平行な切断面を得ることができる。ここで、実施例で使用した積層体の平均厚さは、20mm~30mmである。実施例で使用した積層体は、積層体の平均厚さに相当する厚さの略平行な切断面が得られるように切断したため、寸法150mm×20mmの面ファスナは問題なく積層体の端面にも貼り付けることができ、面ファスナの支持力を有効に利用することができる。 By connecting the surface fasteners attached to the flat surface of one laminate 1a'and the surface fasteners attached to the side end surfaces of the other laminate 1a'' so as to face each other, the laminate can be formed. It is possible to create a connection structure that is connected orthogonally to each other. The assembly independence was evaluated using the connection structure of this laminated body. The laminated body is cut in a straight line at a position that is (1/4) pitch-shifted substantially parallel to the plan view from the position where the surface unevenness is the largest, which is a curve connecting the peaks of the profiled surface of the laminated body. Since it was used, it is possible to obtain a substantially parallel cut surface corresponding to the sheet thickness before profile processing on the side end surface of the laminated body. Here, the average thickness of the laminate used in the examples is 20 mm to 30 mm. Since the laminate used in the examples was cut so as to obtain a substantially parallel cut surface having a thickness corresponding to the average thickness of the laminate, a hook-and-loop fastener having a size of 150 mm × 20 mm could be used on the end surface of the laminate without any problem. It can be pasted, and the bearing capacity of the hook-and-loop fastener can be effectively used.
 試験に用いた積層体1aは、発泡倍率40倍のポリエチレン発泡シートを用い、プロファイル加工機によりスライス加工して形成した。この際、積層体表面の波形状の凹凸構造の寸法形状が、組立自立性に及ぼす影響を評価するため、積層体の厚さ方向の平坦部と山部谷部などの波形状の凹凸構造部の厚さの全体厚さに対する割合が異なる種々の寸法形状の積層体を作成した。このようにして得られた波形状の凹凸構造を有し、表面に周期的な線状模様が形成され、裏面にシート状樹脂発泡体が積層された積層体を試験材として用い組立自立性の評価を行った。組立自立性の評価を行った結果を表1、表2に示す。 The laminate 1a used in the test was formed by slicing with a profile processing machine using a polyethylene foam sheet having a foaming ratio of 40 times. At this time, in order to evaluate the influence of the dimensional shape of the wavy uneven structure on the surface of the laminated body on the assembly independence, the wavy uneven structure portion such as the flat portion in the thickness direction and the mountain part valley portion of the laminated body is evaluated. Laminates of various dimensions and shapes were prepared in which the ratio of the thickness to the total thickness was different. It has a wavy uneven structure obtained in this way, a periodic linear pattern is formed on the front surface, and a laminated body in which a sheet-like resin foam is laminated on the back surface is used as a test material for assembly independence. Evaluation was performed. The results of the evaluation of assembly independence are shown in Tables 1 and 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
 表1、表2において、平坦面から山部までの高さ(Hm)は、図18Aに示すように、積層体のシート厚さ(最大厚)に相当するものである。平坦面から山部までの高さ(Hm)は、シート状発泡体の厚さとクッション材の山部までの高さの合計に相当する。また、平坦面から谷部までの高さ(Hv)は、図18Aに示すように、谷部7aの底部における積層体の厚さ(最小厚)に相当するものである。平坦面から谷部までの高さ(Hv)は、シート状発泡体の厚さとクッション材の谷部までの高さの合計に相当する。また、積層体の平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造の中心線までの高さ(Hc)は、図18Aに示すように、山部5aの頂部と谷部7aの底部との中心線Kと積層体裏面の平坦面との距離である。すなわち、Hc=Hv+(Hm-Hv)/2=(Hm+Hv)/2として計算される。また表1、表2の波形状加工高さ(凹凸構造の半価幅)は、(Hm-Hv)/2に相当する。 In Tables 1 and 2, the height (Hm) from the flat surface to the mountain portion corresponds to the sheet thickness (maximum thickness) of the laminated body as shown in FIG. 18A. The height from the flat surface to the ridge (Hm) corresponds to the sum of the thickness of the sheet-like foam and the height of the cushioning material to the ridge. Further, the height (Hv) from the flat surface to the valley portion corresponds to the thickness (minimum thickness) of the laminated body at the bottom of the valley portion 7a as shown in FIG. 18A. The height from the flat surface to the valley (Hv) corresponds to the sum of the thickness of the sheet-like foam and the height of the cushion material to the valley. Further, as shown in FIG. 18A, the height (Hc) from the flat surface of the laminated body to the center line of the wavy uneven structure is laminated with the center line K of the top of the mountain portion 5a and the bottom of the valley portion 7a. It is the distance from the flat surface on the back of the body. That is, it is calculated as Hc = Hv + (Hm-Hv) / 2 = (Hm + Hv) / 2. The wave-shaped processing height (half-value width of the uneven structure) in Tables 1 and 2 corresponds to (Hm-Hv) / 2.
 また、表1、表2において、組立自立性評価は、図17に示した積層体接続構造体において、面ファスナによる接続部とは反対側の幅方向端部の上部先端に撓みや曲がりが生じなかったものを「good」とし、上部先端に2-3mm程度であっても軽い撓みや曲がりが生じたものを「not enough」とした。すなわち、面ファスナの接続部とは反対側の端面に撓みや曲がりが生じることがない積層体は、組立自立性に優れるものと判定した。このように、組立自立性に優れる積層体を用いれば、組み立てた区画用パーテーションに不要な隙間が生じることがなく、組立性にも優れることになる。 Further, in Tables 1 and 2, in the assembly independence evaluation, in the laminated body connection structure shown in FIG. 17, bending or bending occurs at the upper tip of the widthwise end portion on the side opposite to the connection portion by the hook-and-loop fastener. Those that did not exist were designated as "good", and those that had slight bending or bending even if the upper tip was about 2-3 mm were designated as "not enough". That is, it was determined that the laminated body in which the end face on the side opposite to the connecting portion of the hook-and-loop fastener does not bend or bend is excellent in assembly independence. As described above, if the laminated body having excellent assembly independence is used, unnecessary gaps are not generated in the assembled partition for partitioning, and the assembling property is also excellent.
 表1、表2からわかるように、積層体の裏面である平坦面から谷部までの高さ(Hv)に対する、裏面である平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造面の中心線高さ(Hc)までの高さの比をパーセント表示した数値をRとして以下の試験材について、組立自立性とRとの関係を評価した。表1、表2において、試験材1~4は、積層体の山部高さを40mm一定として、波形状加工高さを変えることで、Rの値を44%から62%まで変えた場合を示す。試験材5~8、試験材9~11、試験材12~15は、それぞれ積層体の平均厚さを30mm、25mm、20mmにそれぞれ一定にして、波形状加工高さ(凹凸構造の半値幅)を適宜変えた場合の試験材の実施例である。ここで、前述の通り、極く僅かではあるが変形があったものを「not enough」、組立自立性に問題のないものに「good」、さらに長時間保管後にも組立自立性の低下が防止できると考えられるものを「excellent」として評価した。 As can be seen from Tables 1 and 2, the height (Hc) of the center line height (Hc) from the flat surface to the wavy uneven structure surface, which is the back surface, with respect to the height (Hv) from the flat surface to the valley portion, which is the back surface of the laminate. The relationship between assembly independence and R was evaluated for the following test materials, where R was used as a percentage of the ratio of heights up to. In Tables 1 and 2, the test materials 1 to 4 have a case where the R value is changed from 44% to 62% by changing the wave shape processing height while keeping the mountain portion height of the laminated body constant at 40 mm. Shown. For the test materials 5 to 8, test materials 9 to 11, and test materials 12 to 15, the average thickness of the laminated body is kept constant at 30 mm, 25 mm, and 20 mm, respectively, and the corrugated processing height (half width of the uneven structure). This is an example of a test material when is appropriately changed. Here, as described above, "not enough" is the one that is slightly deformed, "good" is the one that has no problem in assembly independence, and the decrease in assembly independence is prevented even after long-term storage. Those that could be evaluated were evaluated as "excellent".
 上記の積層体の平均高さ20mmから30mmの範囲で、波形状加工高さを種々変えた試験材1から試験材15における、試験材1、試験材5、試験材12のRが50%以下のものは、極わずかであるが撓みや曲がりが生じたが、Rが50%以上である場合に、このような軽微な撓みや曲がりが生じずに、組立自立性に優れる積層体が得られることが確認できた。また、発泡体を避難所に使用する場合には、長期間保管するため、保管中の経時的な僅かな強度低下による組立自立性の低下などを考慮すると、望ましくは、Rが60%以上であることが望ましい。なお、組立自立性の確認に使用する固定手段として面ファスナに代えて、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナや磁石を、積層体に貼着してもよい。ボタン状ファスナや磁石を固定手段に使用して、同様の確認を行ったが、この場合も同様の結果が得られた。 The R of the test material 1, the test material 5, and the test material 12 in the test material 1 to the test material 15 in which the wave shape processing height is variously changed in the range of the average height of the above laminated body of 20 mm to 30 mm is 50% or less. Although there was a slight amount of bending and bending, when R was 50% or more, a laminated body having excellent assembly independence could be obtained without such slight bending or bending. I was able to confirm that. Further, when the foam is used in an evacuation center, it is stored for a long period of time. Therefore, considering the decrease in assembly independence due to a slight decrease in strength over time during storage, it is desirable that R is 60% or more. It is desirable to have. As a fixing means used for confirming the independence of assembly, a button-shaped fastener or a magnet fixed to a tape-shaped member may be attached to the laminate instead of the hook-and-loop fastener. Similar confirmations were made using button fasteners and magnets as fixing means, but similar results were obtained in this case as well.
 この理由は、以下のように考えられる。中心線Kより上部の山部領域の断面積と中心線Kより下部の谷部領域の断面積は同等である。ここで、山部5aを谷部7a側にずらして反転して、積層体の裏面である平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造面の中心線高さ(Hc)の厚みである架空のシート状発泡体を考える(図18B、図18C参照)。この場合、山部5aの体積と谷部7aの体積は同等であることから、積層体の重心位置(図18CのL)は、架空のシート状発泡体の中心線と略同等と考えられる。このことは、シート状発泡体のシート厚さの中心にてプロファイル加工によりスライスして得られる2枚の発泡体が略同等の重量であることからも容易に理解することができる。この場合に、上記Rが50%以上の条件を満足することができれば、積層体の端面の谷部7aよりも平坦面側に重心位置が配置されることになり、積層体が安定することになる。ここで、より望ましくは、60%以上の条件を満足すればより発泡体が安定することになる。 The reason for this is thought to be as follows. The cross-sectional area of the mountain region above the center line K and the cross-sectional area of the valley region below the center line K are equivalent. Here, the mountain portion 5a is shifted to the valley portion 7a side and inverted, and a fictitious sheet-like foam having a thickness of the center line height (Hc) of the wavy uneven structure surface from the flat surface which is the back surface of the laminated body. Consider the body (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). In this case, since the volume of the peak portion 5a and the volume of the valley portion 7a are the same, the position of the center of gravity of the laminated body (L in FIG. 18C) is considered to be substantially the same as the center line of the fictitious sheet-shaped foam. This can be easily understood from the fact that the two foams obtained by slicing at the center of the sheet thickness of the sheet-shaped foam by profile processing have substantially the same weight. In this case, if the condition that R is 50% or more can be satisfied, the position of the center of gravity is arranged on the flat surface side of the valley portion 7a of the end surface of the laminated body, and the laminated body becomes stable. Become. Here, more preferably, if the condition of 60% or more is satisfied, the foam becomes more stable.
 以上の、発泡倍率40倍のポリエチレン発泡シート組立自立性の確認試験の結果から判るように、より硬質の材料や発泡倍率が40倍以下の材料を用いれば、この材料よりも組立自立性は有利になる。従って発泡倍率40倍以下の樹脂発泡体を用いて、積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から積層体の谷部までの高さ(Hv)に対する、積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造面の中心線高さ(Hc)までの高さの両者の割合をパーセント表示したRが、50%以上を満足する積層体を用いれば、組立自立性に問題はない。また、この積層体は軽量であり、意匠性に優れた区画用パーテーションを容易に組み立てることができる。 As can be seen from the results of the above-mentioned confirmation test of polyethylene foam sheet assembly independence with a foaming ratio of 40 times, if a harder material or a material having a foaming ratio of 40 times or less is used, the assembly independence is more advantageous than this material. become. Therefore, using a resin foam having a foaming ratio of 40 times or less, the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate with respect to the height (Hv) from the flat surface of the sheet-like foam on the back surface of the laminate to the valley portion of the laminate. If a laminate is used in which the ratio of both the heights from the flat surface to the center line height (Hc) of the wavy uneven structure surface is expressed as a percentage of 50% or more, there is a problem in assembly independence. There is no. In addition, this laminate is lightweight, and a partition partition having excellent design can be easily assembled.
 ここで、表面に波形状の凹凸構造を有するクッション材1の裏面側に、他のシート状発泡体を張り付けた積層体1aにおいて、裏面に設けられたシート状発泡体として、クッション材1よりも硬質の樹脂発泡体を用いてもよい。この場合でも、積層体の重心位置が硬質のシート状発泡体側に少し移動することで、組立自立性はより向上する。このため、積層体を同質の材料で作成した場合と少なくとも同様の関係を満足していれば、より安定な状態が得られることになる。 Here, in the laminated body 1a in which another sheet-like foam is attached to the back surface side of the cushion material 1 having a wavy uneven structure on the front surface, the sheet-like foam provided on the back surface is more than the cushion material 1. A hard resin foam may be used. Even in this case, the position of the center of gravity of the laminated body is slightly moved toward the hard sheet-like foam side, so that the assembly independence is further improved. Therefore, a more stable state can be obtained if at least the same relationship as when the laminate is made of the same material is satisfied.
 なお、積層体1aの代わりに、クッション材1を用いてもよい。この場合にも、クッション材1として、平坦面から谷部までの高さHvとクッション材1の裏面の平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造面の中心線高さHcの両者の割合のパーセント表示Rが、50%以上の関係を満足するクッション材1を用いれば、裏面にシート状発泡体が設けられていないクッション材であっても積層体1aと同様の組立自立性を得ることができる。 The cushion material 1 may be used instead of the laminated body 1a. Also in this case, as the cushion material 1, the percentage display R of the ratio of both the height Hv from the flat surface to the valley and the center line height Hc of the wavy uneven structure surface from the flat surface on the back surface of the cushion material 1. However, if the cushion material 1 satisfying the relationship of 50% or more is used, the same assembly independence as the laminated body 1a can be obtained even if the cushion material is not provided with the sheet-like foam on the back surface.
 以上、添付図を参照しながら、本発明の実施形態を説明したが、本発明の技術的範囲は、前述した実施の形態に左右されない。当業者であれば、特許請求の範囲に記載された技術的思想の範囲内において、各種の変更例または修正例に相当しうることは明らかであり、それらについても当然に本発明の技術的範囲に属するものと了解される。例えば、上述した各実施形態は、互に組み合わせることができることは言うまでもない。 Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the attached drawings, the technical scope of the present invention does not depend on the above-described embodiments. It is clear to those skilled in the art that it can correspond to various modified examples or amended examples within the scope of the technical idea described in the claims, and of course, the technical scope of the present invention also includes them. It is understood that it belongs to. For example, it goes without saying that the above-described embodiments can be combined with each other.
1、1c、1d………クッション材
3………表面
5、5a、5b………山部
7、7a、7b………谷部
9………裏面
11………線状模様
13………線状模様形成部
15a、15b、15c、15d………樹脂発泡体
17、17a、17b………接着層
20………樹脂発泡体製造装置
21………押し出し機
23………ロール成形機
25………加熱炉
27………巻き取り機
31a、31b………ロール
33………凸部
35………凹部
37………切断刃
39………積層樹脂発泡体
1a、1b、1a’、1a’’………積層体
40、40a………積層構造
50………避難所区画
51………壁面
52………床部
53a、53b、53c、53d………面ファスナ
54………壁部
60………衝撃緩衝壁面パネル
61a、61b、61c………面ファスナ貼着部
70………変曲点を結ぶ切断面
71………山部頂部を結ぶ切断面
 
 
1, 1c, 1d ………… Cushion material 3 ………… Front surface 5, 5a, 5b ………… Yamabe 7, 7a, 7b ………… Tanibe 9 ………… Back side 11 ………… Linear pattern 13 …… … Linear pattern forming portions 15a, 15b, 15c, 15d ……… Resin foams 17, 17a, 17b ……… Adhesive layer 20 ……… Resin foam manufacturing apparatus 21 ……… Extruding machine 23 ……… Roll molding Machine 25 ………… Heating furnace 27 ………… Winding machine 31a, 31b ………… Roll 33 ………… Convex 35 ………… Concave 37 ………… Cutting blade 39 ………… Laminated resin foam 1a, 1b, 1a', 1a'' ………… Laminated body 40, 40a ………… Laminated structure 50 ………… Evacuation shelter section 51 ………… Wall surface 52 ………… Floor 53a, 53b, 53c, 53d ………… Hook-and-loop fastener 54 ……… Wall 60 ……… Impact cushioning wall panels 61a, 61b, 61c ……… Hook-and-loop fastener 70 ……… Cut surface connecting the turning points 71 ……… Cutting surface connecting the tops of the mountain

Claims (40)

  1.  山部を形成するポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体と、谷部を形成するポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体とが積層され、それらのポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体の積層面に形成される接着層又は融着層と、を具備するポリオレフィン樹脂発泡体からなるクッション材であって、
     前記クッション材は、一方の面が縦横に山部と谷部が交互に周期的に配置された波形状の凹凸構造を有するプロファイル加工面で、他方の面が平坦面であり、
     前記波形状の凹凸構造の表面の所定高さの部分に、前記他方の面に略平行に形成された前記接着層又は前記融着層が露出して、多数の環状の線状模様が相互に所定間隔離間して形成され、前記線状模様は、前記波形状の凹凸構造の前記山部と前記谷部とを仕切り、それぞれの前記山部を囲むように前記山部と前記谷部の間に所定高さで形成されることを特徴とするクッション材。
    A polyolefin having a polyolefin resin foam forming a mountain portion and a polyolefin resin foam forming a valley portion laminated, and an adhesive layer or a fusion layer formed on the laminated surface of the polyolefin resin foam. A cushioning material made of resin foam
    The cushion material is a profiled surface having a wavy uneven structure in which peaks and valleys are periodically arranged vertically and horizontally on one surface, and the other surface is a flat surface.
    The adhesive layer or the fusion layer formed substantially parallel to the other surface is exposed at a predetermined height portion of the surface of the wavy uneven structure, and a large number of annular linear patterns are mutually formed. The linear pattern is formed at a predetermined interval, and the linear pattern divides the mountain portion and the valley portion of the wavy concave-convex structure, and between the mountain portion and the valley portion so as to surround each of the mountain portions. A cushioning material characterized by being formed at a predetermined height.
  2.  前記線状模様は、融着層または接着層により形成され、前記線状模様が融着層により形成される場合には、融着する樹脂発泡体の少なくとも一方の融着面を異なる色に塗装した樹脂発泡体を用いて融着されることで形成されたものであるか、接着層により形成される場合には、前記接着層は、着色された接着剤を用いて形成されたものであるかのいずれかであることを特徴とする請求項1に記載のクッション材。 The linear pattern is formed by a fusion layer or an adhesive layer, and when the linear pattern is formed by a fusion layer, at least one fusion surface of the resin foam to be fused is painted in a different color. It is formed by fusion using the resin foam, or when it is formed by an adhesive layer, the adhesive layer is formed by using a colored adhesive. The cushioning material according to claim 1, wherein the cushioning material is any of the above.
  3.  前記融着層または前記接着層が融着層であり、前記融着層は、融着時に融着層を形成する樹脂発泡体の表面が溶融後固化する過程で結晶化する際に、結晶化度と分子配向の変化、これに加えてADCAの発泡体表面への残留効果を重畳させることにより選択的に異なる色に形成されることを特徴とする請求項2に記載のクッション材。 The fusion layer or the adhesion layer is a fusion layer, and the fusion layer crystallizes when the surface of the resin foam forming the fusion layer at the time of fusion crystallizes in the process of melting and solidifying. The cushioning material according to claim 2, wherein the cushioning material is selectively formed into a different color by superimposing a change in degree and molecular orientation, and a residual effect of ADCA on the foam surface.
  4.  前記クッション材の前記一方の面は、前記線状模様より上側の樹脂発泡体により形成される前記山部と、前記線状模様が形成される線状模様形成部と、前記線状模様より下側の樹脂発泡体により形成される前記谷部との3つの部分に区画され、前記谷部は隣接する谷部同志で相互に連続して一体になり、前記線状模様形成部に対して前記山部あるいは前記谷部のいずれかが異なる色に形成されることで、3次元的な立体模様が形成されていることを特徴とする請求項2または請求項3に記載のクッション材。 The one surface of the cushion material includes the mountain portion formed by the resin foam above the linear pattern, the linear pattern forming portion on which the linear pattern is formed, and the lower portion of the linear pattern. It is divided into three portions with the valley portion formed by the resin foam on the side, and the valley portions are continuously integrated with each other by adjacent valley portions, and the linear pattern forming portion is described as described above. The cushioning material according to claim 2 or 3, wherein a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern is formed by forming either the mountain portion or the valley portion in a different color.
  5.  前記線状模様形成部の2次元的な模様に加えて前記波形状の凹凸構造の前記山部と前記谷部のいずれもが異なる色に着色されることで、前記線状模様形成部と前記山部、前記谷部のいずれもが異なる色に着色された3次元的な立体模様が形成されることを特徴とする請求項4に記載のクッション材。 In addition to the two-dimensional pattern of the linear pattern forming portion, both the peak portion and the valley portion of the wavy uneven structure are colored in different colors, whereby the linear pattern forming portion and the said The cushioning material according to claim 4, wherein a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in which both the mountain portion and the valley portion are colored in different colors is formed.
  6.  前記線状模様の形成高さは、前記波形状の凹凸構造の範囲内の任意の高さに形成することが可能であり、前記線状模様を前記波形状の凹凸構造の高さの中心より、前記山部側に形成することで、前記線状模様あるいは着色された前記山部の模様を小さく形成することが可能であるか、又は前記線状模様を前記波形状の凹凸構造の高さの中心より前記谷部側に形成することで、前記線状模様あるいは着色された前記山部の模様を大きく形成することが可能なことを特徴とする請求項1から請求項5のいずれかに記載のクッション材。 The formation height of the linear pattern can be formed at an arbitrary height within the range of the wavy uneven structure, and the linear pattern is formed from the center of the height of the wavy uneven structure. By forming on the mountain portion side, it is possible to form the linear pattern or the colored mountain portion pattern in a small size, or the linear pattern is formed on the height of the wavy uneven structure. According to any one of claims 1 to 5, it is possible to form a large linear pattern or a colored mountain pattern by forming the pattern on the valley side from the center of the above. The described cushioning material.
  7.  前記樹脂発泡体の原料樹脂は、ポリエチレン、低密度ポリエチレン、高密度ポリエチレン、エチレン酢酸ビニルコポリマー、又はポリプロピレン樹脂の少なくともいずれか、あるいはこれらの2種以上の混合物であるか、これらの原料樹脂の合計を100質量部とした場合に、さらにカルボキシ基または酸無水物構造を有する官能基を有するポリエチレン樹脂またはポリプロピレン樹脂を0.5質量部以上10質量部以下含有する樹脂であるかのいずれかであることを特徴とする請求項1から請求項6のいずれかに記載のクッション材。 The raw material resin of the resin foam is at least one of polyethylene, low-density polyethylene, high-density polyethylene, ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer, or polypropylene resin, or a mixture of two or more of these, or a total of these raw material resins. Is 100 parts by mass, it is either a polyethylene resin having a functional group having a carboxy group or an acid anhydride structure or a resin containing 0.5 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less of a polypropylene resin. The cushioning material according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that.
  8.  前記樹脂発泡体はポリエチレン樹脂発泡体であり、前記ポリエチレン樹脂発泡体は発泡倍率が20倍から40倍の独立気泡構造を有し、さらにJIS K6767に基づく、圧縮永久歪みが3.0%~7.4%であり、試験温度25℃における25%圧縮時の圧縮応力が34kPa~56kPaであることを特徴とする請求項1から請求項7のいずれかに記載のクッション材。 The resin foam is a polyethylene resin foam, and the polyethylene resin foam has a closed cell structure having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times, and further has a compression set of 3.0% to 7 based on JIS K6767. The cushioning material according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the cushioning material is 4% and the compressive stress at 25% compression at a test temperature of 25 ° C. is 34 kPa to 56 kPa.
  9.  前記波形状の凹凸構造は、前記クッション材の前記接着層に機能性を付与したものであることを特徴とする請求項1、請求項2、請求項4、請求項5、請求項6、請求項7又は請求項8のいずれかに記載のクッション材。 Claim 1, claim 2, claim 4, claim 5, claim 6, claim that the corrugated uneven structure imparts functionality to the adhesive layer of the cushion material. The cushion material according to any one of items 7 or 8.
  10.  前記樹脂発泡体の積層面は、接着剤により前記接着層が形成され、
     前記接着層に、ウレタン樹脂、酢酸ビニルエマルジョン、アクリル樹脂、シリコーン樹脂及び変性シリコーン樹脂からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも一種の可撓性樹脂を主成分として含有する接着剤を使用することで、制振性を付与するか、あるいはアクリル酸エステル系重合体と含ハロゲンリン酸エステルと無機系難燃剤を必須成分として含有する接着剤を使用することで、難燃性と制振性を付与することを特徴とする請求項9に記載のクッション材。
    The adhesive layer is formed on the laminated surface of the resin foam by an adhesive.
    The adhesive layer is controlled by using an adhesive containing at least one flexible resin selected from the group consisting of urethane resin, vinyl acetate emulsion, acrylic resin, silicone resin and modified silicone resin as a main component. To impart flame retardancy and vibration damping property by imparting vibration resistance or by using an adhesive containing an acrylic acid ester polymer, a halogen-containing phosphoric acid ester and an inorganic flame retardant as essential components. 9. The cushioning material according to claim 9.
  11.  前記樹脂発泡体は、消臭剤としてシリカ、リン酸ジルコニウム、ゼオライト、硫酸亜鉛又は硫酸ジルコニウムのいずれか、あるいは抗菌剤、抗ウィルス剤として銀イオンを吸着した非晶性リン酸カルシウム粒子、あるいは光触媒作用を有するアナターゼ型結晶構造の酸化チタン粒子、銀、銅、亜鉛などの抗菌性金属化合物粒子、銀、銅、亜鉛の金属微粒子を、樹脂成分100質量部に対して、0.5質量部~10質量部の範囲で含むことを特徴とする請求項1から請求項10のいずれかに記載のクッション材。 The resin foam has silica, zirconium phosphate, zeolite, zinc sulfate or zirconium sulfate as a deodorant, or an antibacterial agent, amorphous calcium phosphate particles adsorbing silver ions as an antiviral agent, or photocatalytic action. Titanium oxide particles with anatase-type crystal structure, antibacterial metal compound particles such as silver, copper, and zinc, and metal fine particles of silver, copper, and zinc are added by 0.5 parts by mass to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin component. The cushioning material according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the cushioning material is included in a range of parts.
  12.  請求項1から請求項11のいずれかに記載のクッション材とシート状樹脂発泡体からなる積層体であって、
     前記クッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の形成面の裏面の平坦な他方の面に、さらに別のポリオレフィン樹脂からなるシート状樹脂発泡体が積層されて接着または融着されていることを特徴とする積層体。
    A laminate composed of the cushion material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 and a sheet-like resin foam.
    It is characterized in that a sheet-shaped resin foam made of another polyolefin resin is laminated and adhered or fused to the other flat surface of the back surface of the wavy uneven structure forming surface of the cushion material. Laminated body.
  13.  前記積層体の前記シート状樹脂発泡体は、前記波形状の凹凸構造を有する前記樹脂発泡体より硬質あるいは同等の強度を有することを特徴とする請求項12に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to claim 12, wherein the sheet-shaped resin foam of the laminate has a strength equal to or harder than that of the resin foam having a wavy uneven structure.
  14.  前記積層体は、前記積層体を形成する樹脂発泡体が、クッション材とシート状発泡体ともに、発泡倍率が20倍から40倍の独立気泡構造のポリエチレン樹脂発泡体であり、災害時には、避難所の区画用パーテーション側壁又はベッドとして使用可能な災害用マット材のいずれにも使用することが可能であり、通常時には、衝撃吸収用壁面パネル材として使用することが可能であることを特徴とする請求項12または請求項13に記載の積層体。 In the laminated body, the resin foam forming the laminated body is a polyethylene resin foam having a closed cell structure having a foaming ratio of 20 to 40 times for both the cushion material and the sheet-shaped foam, and is a shelter in the event of a disaster. A claim characterized in that it can be used as either a partition side wall or a disaster mat material that can be used as a bed, and can normally be used as a wall panel material for shock absorption. Item 12. The laminate according to claim 13.
  15.  前記積層体は、前記積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から積層体の谷部までの高さHvに対する、積層体の裏面のシート状発泡体の平坦面から波形状の凹凸構造面の中心線高さHcまでの高さの割合をRとすると、Rが50%以上を満足する組立自立性に優れることを特徴とする請求項12から請求項14のいずれかに記載の積層体。 The laminated body has a wavy uneven structure surface from the flat surface of the sheet-shaped foam on the back surface of the laminated body with respect to the height Hv from the flat surface of the sheet-shaped foam on the back surface of the laminated body to the valley portion of the laminated body. The laminate according to any one of claims 12 to 14, characterized in that it is excellent in assembly independence, where R satisfies 50% or more, where R is the ratio of the height to the center line height Hc. ..
  16.  着色された接着層又は融着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の樹脂発泡体を、プロファイルロール通過直後の、上下のロールによる押圧力が完全に弾性回復しないうちに、前記接着層又は前記融着層を含む位置で前記樹脂発泡体の厚さ方向に垂直な水平方向にスライス加工して切断することで、前記接着層又は前記融着層が湾曲した状態で湾曲した前記接着層又は前記融着層を横断するように切断され、さらに切断分離された前記樹脂発泡体が弾性回復し、
     前記接着層又は前記融着層が所定の大きさに、所定形状でプロファイル加工された表面を貫通する平坦面として形成されることで、前記樹脂発泡体の波形状の凹凸構造の表面の山部と谷部の間の所定高さの部分に前記平坦面の露出部として周期的な線状模様が形成されることを特徴とするクッション材の製造方法。
    Immediately after passing through the profile roll, the adhesive layer is applied to the sheet-shaped resin foam having a predetermined thickness facing each other with the colored adhesive layer or the fusion layer sandwiched therein, before the pressing force of the upper and lower rolls completely recovers the elasticity. Alternatively, the adhesive layer or the adhesive layer is curved in a curved state by cutting by slicing in the horizontal direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the resin foam at a position including the adhesive layer. Alternatively, the resin foam that has been cut so as to cross the fused layer and further cut and separated is elastically restored.
    By forming the adhesive layer or the fusion layer as a flat surface penetrating the surface profiled in a predetermined shape to a predetermined size, a mountain portion of the surface of the corrugated uneven structure of the resin foam. A method for manufacturing a cushion material, characterized in that a periodic linear pattern is formed as an exposed portion of the flat surface at a predetermined height portion between the and valley portions.
  17.  前記接着層又は前記融着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の前記樹脂発泡体の少なくとも一方が、着色されているか、又は両方の前記樹脂発泡体を異なる色とすることで、前記接着層又は前記融着層を界面として前記樹脂発泡体の前記波形状の凹凸構造の山部側と谷部側が異なる色に着色された3次元的な立体模様が形成されることを特徴とする請求項16に記載のクッション材の製造方法。 At least one of the resin foams in the form of a sheet having a predetermined thickness facing the adhesive layer or the fusion layer is colored, or both of the resin foams have different colors. It is characterized in that a three-dimensional three-dimensional pattern in which the peak side and the valley side of the wavy uneven structure of the resin foam are colored in different colors is formed with the adhesive layer or the fusion layer as an interface. The method for producing a cushioning material according to claim 16.
  18.  上下の前記ロールにより前記樹脂発泡体の前記接着層又は前記融着層に形成される湾曲の幅を超えないように、前記樹脂発泡体の前記接着層又は前記融着層の形成位置をずらすか、あるいは前記ロールの出口側でのスライス加工を施す高さを変えることで、前記波形状の凹凸構造の前記山部及び谷部の形成位置を調整して、前記線状模様の大きさを調整して、前記線状模様の大きさが異なる2つのクッション材を得ることが可能なことを特徴とする請求項17に記載のクッション材の製造方法。 Whether to shift the formation position of the adhesive layer or the fusion layer of the resin foam so as not to exceed the width of the curvature formed on the adhesion layer or the fusion layer of the resin foam by the upper and lower rolls. Alternatively, by changing the height at which slicing is performed on the outlet side of the roll, the formation positions of the peaks and valleys of the wavy uneven structure are adjusted, and the size of the linear pattern is adjusted. The method for manufacturing a cushion material according to claim 17, wherein it is possible to obtain two cushion materials having different linear patterns.
  19.  着色された接着層又は融着層を挟んで対向する所定厚さのシート状の樹脂発泡体の、前記接着層又は融着層とは反対側のそれぞれのシート状の樹脂発泡体の外側に、別のシート状の樹脂発泡体層がさらに接着または融着された4層の樹脂発泡体を用いて、プロファイルロール加工による湾曲形状を維持した状態で、4層中の内層の2層の樹脂発泡体層間の接着層を横断するように前記樹脂発泡体の厚さ方向に垂直な水平方向にスライス加工を行うことで、内層樹脂層の2層のみに山部、谷部を形成して、内層樹脂層と外層樹脂層の樹脂発泡体が一体化することを特徴とする積層体の製造方法。 On the outside of each sheet-shaped resin foam having a predetermined thickness facing the colored adhesive layer or the fusion-bond layer on the opposite side of the adhesive layer or the fusion-bond layer. Using a four-layer resin foam in which another sheet-shaped resin foam layer is further adhered or fused, two layers of resin foam, which is the inner layer of the four layers, are maintained in a curved shape by profile roll processing. By performing slicing in the horizontal direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the resin foam so as to cross the adhesive layer between the body layers, peaks and valleys are formed only in the two layers of the inner layer resin layer, and the inner layer is formed. A method for producing a laminated body, characterized in that the resin foam of the resin layer and the outer layer resin layer are integrated.
  20.  請求項1から請求項11のいずれかに記載のクッション材の平坦面を対向させて使用するクッション材の使用方法であって、前記クッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を外表面に向け、平坦面を相互に対向させて重ねることで、前記線状模様が外表面に多数並んで形成されることを特徴とするクッション材の使用方法。 The method of using the cushion material according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the flat surfaces of the cushion material are used so as to face each other, and the surface of the cushion material having a corrugated uneven structure is formed on an outer surface. A method of using a cushioning material, characterized in that a large number of the linear patterns are formed side by side on the outer surface by stacking the flat surfaces facing each other.
  21.  請求項9に記載のクッション材を2枚重ねて、機能性を付与したクッション材を積層して使用するクッション材の使用方法であって、前記クッション材の前記波形状の凹凸構造の形成面を相互に重ねることで、前記線状模様が略同一平面上に並んで形成され、前記線状模様を含む平面全体に対する接着面の合計面積の占有率が80%以上であることを特徴とする機能性を付与したクッション材の使用方法。 A method of using a cushioning material in which two cushioning materials according to claim 9 are stacked and the cushioning materials to which functionality is imparted are laminated, wherein the surface of the cushioning material having a wavy uneven structure is formed. By overlapping each other, the linear patterns are formed side by side on substantially the same plane, and the occupancy rate of the total area of the adhesive surface with respect to the entire plane including the linear pattern is 80% or more. How to use cushioning material with added sex.
  22.  前記クッション材を避難所のパーテーション材と衝撃緩衝壁面パネル材のいずれにも用いることが可能であることを特徴とする請求項20または請求項21に記載のクッション材の使用方法。 The method of using the cushion material according to claim 20 or 21, wherein the cushion material can be used as both a partition material for an evacuation center and a shock absorbing wall panel material.
  23.  請求項12から請求項15のいずれかに記載の
    積層体を用いた避難所の区画の接続構造であり、前記積層体は、長辺の長さが短辺の2倍の略長方形であり、
     前記略長方形の長辺を相互に接触させて略正方形状の区画を形成するように床面にベッドとして使用可能な災害用マットとして前記積層体が2枚配置され、
     さらに前記積層体を、短辺方向に立設した状態で、前記略正方形状の床材としての前記災害用マットの外周を囲うように、前記積層体の長辺を床面との接触面として、
     前記立設された積層体の裏面の平坦面の短辺側の端部と短辺側端面の平坦部に固定された固定手段を相互に略直角に当接または嵌合させることを複数回繰り返しで接続固定された接続構造であり、略正方形の一方が開口したコの字型の側壁が形成される区画を少なくとも含むことを特徴とする避難所区画の接続構造。
    A structure for connecting shelter compartments using the laminate according to any one of claims 12 to 15, wherein the laminate has a substantially rectangular shape with a long side twice the short side.
    Two of the laminated bodies are arranged as disaster mats that can be used as beds on the floor surface so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are brought into contact with each other to form a substantially square section.
    Further, in a state where the laminated body is erected in the short side direction, the long side of the laminated body is used as a contact surface with the floor surface so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material. ,
    The fixing means fixed to the short side end of the flat surface of the back surface of the erected laminate and the flat end of the short side end surface are repeatedly abutted or fitted to each other at substantially right angles. A connection structure of a shelter compartment, which is a connection structure fixed by a connection structure including at least a compartment in which a U-shaped side wall having an opening at one side of a substantially square is formed.
  24.  前記積層体の接続固定は、組立時の接続、分解時の分離が容易な積層体の表面に貼着された固定手段として、積層体の表面に貼着されたテープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナのいずれかにより接続固定されることを特徴とする請求項23に記載の避難所区画の接続構造。 The connection fixing of the laminated body is a button fixed to a tape-shaped member attached to the surface of the laminated body as a fixing means attached to the surface of the laminated body which can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly. 23. The connection structure of a shelter compartment according to claim 23, wherein the connection is fixed by any of a shape fastener, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed.
  25.  前記積層体を使用する前記避難所区画の接続構造において、前記積層体の端面の切断面に占める略平行な部分の断面積が最大となるように積層体のプロファイル加工面の変曲点位置を結んで直線状に切断されることで、略長方形状に形成された短辺側端面の平坦部に固定手段が貼合されることを特徴とする請求項23または請求項24に記載の避難所区画の接続構造。 In the connection structure of the evacuation center section using the laminate, the inflection point position of the profiled surface of the laminate is set so that the cross-sectional area of the substantially parallel portion of the cut surface of the end surface of the laminate is maximized. The evacuation center according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the fixing means is attached to the flat portion of the short side end face formed in a substantially rectangular shape by being tied and cut in a straight line. Partition connection structure.
  26.  前記避難所区画の接続構造において、前記積層体に代えて、請求項1から請求項11のいずれかに記載のクッション材を使用することを特徴とする請求項23から請求項25のいずれかに記載の避難所区画の接続構造。 According to any one of claims 23 to 25, the cushioning material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 is used instead of the laminated body in the connection structure of the evacuation center section. The connection structure of the described shelter compartment.
  27.  請求項12から請求項15のいずれかに記載の積層体を用いた避難所の区画の形成方法であり、前記積層体は、長辺の長さが短辺の2倍の略長方形であり、
     前記略長方形の長辺を相互に接触させて略正方形状の区画を形成するように床面にベッドとして使用可能な災害用マットとして前記積層体を2枚配置し、
     さらに前記積層体を、短辺方向に立設した状態で、前記略正方形状の床材としての前記災害用マットの外周を囲うように、前記積層体の長辺を床面との接触面として、
     前記立設された積層体の裏面の平坦面の短辺側の端部と短辺側端面の平坦部に固定された固定手段を相互に略直角に当接または嵌合させることを複数回繰り返して接続固定させて、略正方形の一方が開口したコの字型の側壁を形成して区画することで、避難所の1区画を形成することを特徴とする避難所の区画の形成方法。
    The method for forming an evacuation shelter section using the laminate according to any one of claims 12 to 15, wherein the laminate has a substantially rectangular shape with a long side twice the short side.
    Two of the laminated bodies are arranged on the floor surface as a disaster mat that can be used as a bed so that the long sides of the substantially rectangular shapes are brought into contact with each other to form a substantially square section.
    Further, in a state where the laminated body is erected in the short side direction, the long side of the laminated body is used as a contact surface with the floor surface so as to surround the outer periphery of the disaster mat as the substantially square floor material. ,
    The fixing means fixed to the short side end of the flat surface of the back surface of the erected laminate and the flat end of the short side end surface are repeatedly abutted or fitted to each other at substantially right angles. A method for forming a section of an evacuation center, which comprises forming one section of the evacuation center by forming and partitioning a U-shaped side wall in which one of the substantially squares is open.
  28.  前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、
     前記略正方形状の第1の区画を床材としての前記災害用マットに隣接して、前記積層体を用いて前記略正方形状の同様の大きさの第2の区画の床材としてベッドとして使用可能な災害用マットを形成して、
    前記コの字型に形成した区画を第1の区画とすると、前記第1の区画と連続して反対方向に開口し、さらに前記積層体を用いて、コの字型の端部一辺を共有するコの字型の側壁を第2の区画として形成することで、少なくとも2つのコの字型の区画を形成することを含むことを特徴とする請求項27に記載の避難所の区画の形成方法。
    In the method of forming the shelter section,
    The substantially square first section is adjacent to the disaster mat as a flooring material, and the laminate is used as a bed as a flooring material for the substantially square second section of the same size. Form a possible disaster mat,
    When the U-shaped section is used as the first section, the section is continuously opened in the opposite direction to the first section, and the laminated body is used to share one side of the U-shaped end. 27. The formation of a shelter compartment according to claim 27, which comprises forming at least two U-shaped compartments by forming the U-shaped side wall as a second compartment. Method.
  29.  前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記略正方形状の開口部を順次開口部の開口方向を反対方向に開口したコの字型に形成して区画する側壁部を順次繰り返し形成し、この側壁部に対応して、略正方形状の床材として前記災害用マットを繰り返して形成することで多数の区画を形成することを特徴とする請求項28に記載の避難所の区画の形成方法。 In the method for forming a section of an evacuation center, the substantially square openings are sequentially formed in a U shape in which the opening directions of the openings are opened in opposite directions, and the side wall portions for partitioning are sequentially and repeatedly formed, and the side walls are formed repeatedly. The method for forming a section of an evacuation center according to claim 28, wherein a large number of sections are formed by repeatedly forming the disaster mat as a substantially square floor material corresponding to the section.
  30.  前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記床材は、前記積層体の平坦面あるいは波形状の凹凸構造面のいずれかを床面に向けて配置し、前記積層体により形成される前記コの字型の側壁部は、前記積層体の模様形成面である波形状の凹凸構造面をコの字型区画の各辺に沿って順に前記積層体を外方、内方、外方に向けて交互に配置されるか、あるいは、内方、外方、内方のいずれかに向けて交互に配置されることを特徴とする請求項27から請求項29のいずれかに記載の避難所の区画の形成方法。 In the method of forming a section of an evacuation shelter, the floor material is formed by arranging either a flat surface or a wavy uneven structure surface of the laminated body toward the floor surface. The side wall portion of the character shape has a wavy uneven structure surface, which is a pattern forming surface of the laminate, directed outward, inward, and outward in order along each side of the U-shaped section. The shelter compartment according to any one of claims 27 to 29, characterized in that they are arranged alternately or are arranged alternately toward one of the inside, the outside, and the inside. How to form.
  31.  前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記積層体の区画用パーテーション材としての組立時の接続固定は、組立時の接続、分解時の分離が容易な積層体の表面に貼着された固定手段として、前記固定手段は、積層体の表面に貼着されたテープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナのいずれかの固定手段により接続固定されることを特徴とする請求項27から請求項30のいずれかに記載の避難所の区画の形成方法。 In the method of forming a section of an evacuation center, the connection fixing at the time of assembly as a partition material for a section of the laminated body is a fixing means attached to the surface of the laminated body which can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly. The fixing means is connected and fixed by any of a button-shaped fastener fixed to a tape-shaped member attached to the surface of the laminate, a magnet, or a surface fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed. The method for forming a shelter section according to any one of claims 27 to 30, wherein the shelter section is formed.
  32.  前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記積層体のプロファイル加工面を、山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線の、隣接する山部頂部から山部頂部までの距離を1ピッチとすると、山部頂部あるいは谷部底部から1/4ピッチずれた位置すなわち山部頂部から谷部底部に至る中間位置あるいは谷部底部から山部頂部に至る中間位置を結ぶように直線状に切断されるか、またはこれらの中間位置が変曲点である場合には、変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断されることで、前記積層体の切断面に占める平行部の断面積が最大となるように略長方形状に形成された短辺側端面の切断面に固定手段が貼合されることを特徴とする請求項27または請求項31に記載の避難所の区画の形成方法。 In the method of forming the section of the evacuation center, the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes through the profiled surface of the laminated body at the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is defined as 1 pitch. Then, it is cut linearly so as to connect a position deviated by 1/4 pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, an intermediate position from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or an intermediate position from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. Or, when these intermediate positions are inflection points, the cross-sectional area of the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the laminated body is reduced by cutting in a substantially straight line so as to connect the inflection point positions. The method for forming a section of an evacuation center according to claim 27 or 31, wherein the fixing means is attached to the cut surface of the short side end surface formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be the maximum.
  33.  前記避難所の区画の形成方法において、前記積層体に代えて、請求項1から請求項11のいずれかに記載のクッション材を使用することを特徴とする請求項27から請求項32のいずれかに記載の避難所の区画の形成方法。 Any of claims 27 to 32, wherein the cushioning material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 is used in place of the laminated body in the method of forming the section of the shelter. How to form a shelter compartment as described in.
  34.  請求項27から請求項33のいずれかに記載の避難所の区画の形成方法により形成した避難所区画の分解収納方法であって、
     前記積層体の平坦面の両側の所定位置に固定手段が貼合され、
     前記平坦面の固定手段配設位置に対応させて壁面の所定位置に固定手段が配設され、
     避難所区画を形成した前記積層体を分解後、
     前記積層体の平坦面を壁面に向けて、
     前記壁面の固定手段に、
     1枚目の前記積層体の固定手段を固定することで、
     前記積層体を前記壁面に立設固定し、
     さらに前記壁面に立設固定した積層体の裏面の波形状の凹凸構造の表面に、2枚目の積層体を1枚目の前記積層体と端面を揃えて波形状の凹凸構造の表面を重ねることで2枚目の前記積層体を積み重ねて、
     新たな積層体である3枚目と4枚目の積層体とを、それぞれの積層面である平坦面、波形状の凹凸構造面を1枚目、2枚目の積層体の場合と同様の順にそれぞれの積層面と端面を揃えて立設し、
     さらにその後も、前記積層体を同様の手順で、積み重ねる枚数に応じて、
     前記積層体を順次繰り返して積み重ねて立設して、
     前記立設されたそれぞれの積層体の端面の所定位置には固定手段が貼合され、前記積層体の端面の固定手段を、別の壁面に固定された所定長さを有する固定手段にて固定することを特徴とする避難所区画の分解収納方法。
    A method for disassembling and storing an evacuation shelter section formed by the method for forming an evacuation shelter section according to any one of claims 27 to 33.
    Fixing means are bonded to predetermined positions on both sides of the flat surface of the laminate.
    The fixing means is arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the fixing means arrangement position on the flat surface.
    After disassembling the laminate forming the shelter section,
    With the flat surface of the laminate facing the wall surface,
    For fixing the wall surface
    By fixing the fixing means of the first laminated body,
    The laminated body is erected and fixed to the wall surface,
    Further, the surface of the corrugated concavo-convex structure is overlapped with the surface of the corrugated concavo-convex structure on the back surface of the laminate erected and fixed to the wall surface by aligning the end faces with the first laminate. By stacking the second laminated body,
    The third and fourth laminated bodies, which are the new laminated bodies, have the same flat surface as the respective laminated bodies and the wavy uneven structure surface as in the case of the first and second laminated bodies. Stand up with each laminated surface and end face aligned in order,
    Further thereafter, in the same procedure, depending on the number of stacked bodies,
    The laminated bodies are sequentially repeated and stacked to stand upright.
    Fixing means are attached to a predetermined position on the end face of each of the erected laminated bodies, and the fixing means of the end face of the laminated body is fixed by a fixing means having a predetermined length fixed to another wall surface. A method of disassembling and storing evacuation shelters, which is characterized by
  35.  前記避難所区画の分解収納方法において、前記積層体の分解収納に用いる固定手段は、前記積層体の組立に用いた固定手段と同一の、分解時の分離が容易な固定手段であり、前記固定手段は、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナのいずれかであることを特徴とする請求項34に記載の避難所区画の分解収納方法。 In the method of disassembling and storing the evacuation shelter section, the fixing means used for disassembling and storing the laminate is the same fixing means used for assembling the laminate, which is easy to separate at the time of disassembly, and is fixed. The method for disassembling and storing a shelter section according to claim 34, wherein the means is any of a button-shaped fastener fixed to a tape-shaped member, a magnet, or a hook-and-loop fastener on which a large number of microprojections are formed.
  36.  前記避難所区画の分解収納方法において、前記積層体のプロファイル加工面を、山部頂部と谷部底部を交互に通過する曲線の、隣接する山部頂部から山部頂部までの距離を1ピッチとすると、山部頂部あるいは谷部底部から1/4ピッチずれた位置すなわち山部頂部から谷部底部に至る中間位置あるいは谷部底部から山部頂部に至る中間位置を結ぶように直線状に切断されるか、またはこれらの中間位置が変曲点である場合には、変曲点位置を結ぶように略直線状に切断されることで、前記積層体の切断面に占める平行部の断面積が最大となるように略長方形状に形成された短辺側端面の切断面に固定手段が貼合されることを特徴とする請求項34または請求項35に記載の避難所区画の分解収納方法。 In the disassembly and storage method of the evacuation shelter section, the distance from the adjacent mountain top to the mountain top of the curve that alternately passes through the profiled surface of the laminated body at the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley is set to 1 pitch. Then, it is cut linearly so as to connect a position deviated by 1/4 pitch from the top of the mountain or the bottom of the valley, that is, an intermediate position from the top of the mountain to the bottom of the valley or an intermediate position from the bottom of the valley to the top of the mountain. Or, when these intermediate positions are inflection points, the cross-sectional area of the parallel portion occupying the cut surface of the laminated body is reduced by cutting in a substantially straight line so as to connect the inflection point positions. The method for disassembling and storing an evacuation shelter section according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the fixing means is attached to the cut surface of the short side end surface formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be the maximum.
  37.  前記避難所区画の分解収納方法において、前記積層体に代えて請求項1から請求項11のいずれかに記載のクッション材を使用することを特徴とする請求項34から請求項36のいずれかに記載の避難所区画の分解収納方法。 The method according to any one of claims 34 to 36, wherein the cushioning material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 is used instead of the laminated body in the disassembly and storage method of the evacuation center section. Disassembly and storage method of the described evacuation center section.
  38.  請求項27から請求項33のいずれかに記載の避難所の区画の形成方法で用いられた積層体を用いた避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法であって、前記積層体の平坦面の両側の所定位置に固定手段が貼合され、
    前記積層体の短辺を壁面に平行な立設面として、長辺方向が隣接するように前記積層体を連続配置した場合における前記積層体の前記平坦面の固定手段配設位置に対応させて、壁面の所定位置に固定手段が配設され、
    前記避難所区画を形成した積層体を分解後、
    前記積層体の平坦面を壁面に向けて、
    前記積層体の固定手段配設位置に対応させて壁面の所定位置に配設された固定手段にて、
    前記積層体の波形状の凹凸構造面を室内側に向けて固定し、
    さらに別の積層体の平坦面を壁面に向けて
    同様に前記壁面の所定位置に配設された固定手段にて、別の積層体を壁面に、最初の積層体と連続するように波形状の凹凸構造面を室内側に向けて固定し、
    さらに、次々と別の積層体を同様に直前に壁面固定した積層体と連続するように壁面固定することで衝撃緩衝壁面パネルを形成することを特徴とする避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法。
    A method for forming a shock absorbing wall surface panel of an evacuation center using the laminate used in the method for forming an evacuation shelter section according to any one of claims 27 to 33, wherein the flat surface of the laminate is formed. Fixing means are attached to the predetermined positions on both sides,
    The short side of the laminated body is set as an upright surface parallel to the wall surface, and the laminated body is continuously arranged so that the long side directions are adjacent to each other, so as to correspond to the fixing means arrangement position of the flat surface of the laminated body. , Fixing means is arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface,
    After disassembling the laminate forming the shelter section,
    With the flat surface of the laminate facing the wall surface,
    With the fixing means arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface corresponding to the fixing means arrangement position of the laminated body.
    The corrugated uneven structure surface of the laminated body is fixed toward the indoor side,
    With the fixing means similarly arranged at a predetermined position on the wall surface with the flat surface of the other laminate facing the wall surface, another laminate is placed on the wall surface in a wavy shape so as to be continuous with the first laminate. Fix the uneven structure surface toward the indoor side,
    Further, a method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation center, which comprises forming a shock absorbing wall panel by fixing another laminated body one after another to the wall surface so as to be continuous with the laminated body fixed immediately before the wall surface. ..
  39.  避難所の区画の形成方法で用いられた積層体を用いた避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法であって、前記積層体を分解して前記衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成に用いる固定手段は、前記積層体の組立に用いる固定手段と同一の、組立時の接続、分解時の分離が容易な固定手段であり、前記固定手段は、テープ状部材に固定されたボタン状ファスナ、磁石、又は微小突起が多数形成された面ファスナのいずれかであることを特徴とする請求項38に記載の避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法。 A method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation center using a laminate used in a method for forming a section of an evacuation center, wherein the fixing means used for forming the shock absorbing wall panel by disassembling the laminated body is. It is the same fixing means used for assembling the laminated body, and is a fixing means that can be easily connected at the time of assembly and separated at the time of disassembly, and the fixing means is a button-shaped fastener, a magnet, or a minute piece fixed to a tape-shaped member. The method for forming a shock absorbing wall panel of an evacuation shelter according to claim 38, wherein the surface fastener is one in which a large number of protrusions are formed.
  40.  前記衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法において、前記積層体に代えて請求項1から請求項11のいずれかに記載のクッション材を使用することを特徴とする請求項37から請求項39のいずれかに記載の避難所の衝撃緩衝壁面パネルの形成方法。
     
    A method according to any one of claims 37 to 39, wherein the cushioning material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 is used instead of the laminated body in the method for forming the shock absorbing wall panel. The method of forming a shock absorbing wall panel of the shelter described.
PCT/JP2020/030486 2019-08-07 2020-08-07 Cushion material, method for manufacturing cushion material, laminate, method for manufacturing laminate, method for using cushion material, connection structure for shelter division, method for forming shelter division, method for dismantling and storing shelter division, and method for forming shock absorbing wall surface panel for shelter WO2021025160A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020217002146A KR20220040429A (en) 2019-08-07 2020-08-07 Cushioning material, cushioning material manufacturing method, laminate, laminate manufacturing method, cushioning material usage method, evacuation shelter connection structure, evacuation shelter division formation method, evacuation shelter division disassembly and storage method, and formation of evacuation shelter impact buffer wall panel method
JP2020544869A JP7084490B2 (en) 2019-08-07 2020-08-07 Connection structure of evacuation shelter section, formation method of evacuation shelter section, disassembly and storage method of evacuation shelter section, and method of forming impact buffer wall panel of evacuation center
SG11202100882RA SG11202100882RA (en) 2019-08-07 2020-08-07 Cushioning material, method for manufacturing cushioning material, laminated body, method for manufacturing laminated body, method for using cushioning material, connection structure of shelter partition, method for assembling shelter partition, method for disassembling and storing shelter partition, and method for forming impact-absorbing wall panel for shelter
PH12021550211A PH12021550211A1 (en) 2019-08-07 2021-01-28 Cushioning material, method for manufacturing cushioning material, laminated body, method for manufacturing laminated body, method for using cushioning material, connection structure of shelter partition, method for assembling shelter partition, method for disassembling and storing shelter partition, and method for forming impact-absorbing wall panel for shelter
JP2022087941A JP7630463B2 (en) 2019-08-07 2022-05-30 A cushioning material or laminate having a substantially rectangular cut surface, a method for using the cushioning material or laminate which has excellent self-supporting assembly properties by forming the profiled surface into a predetermined shape, and a method for coloring the fusion layer of the cushioning material or laminate.

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-145637 2019-08-07
JP2019145637 2019-08-07
JP2020094258 2020-05-29
JP2020-094258 2020-05-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021025160A1 true WO2021025160A1 (en) 2021-02-11

Family

ID=74503680

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/030486 WO2021025160A1 (en) 2019-08-07 2020-08-07 Cushion material, method for manufacturing cushion material, laminate, method for manufacturing laminate, method for using cushion material, connection structure for shelter division, method for forming shelter division, method for dismantling and storing shelter division, and method for forming shock absorbing wall surface panel for shelter

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (2) JP7084490B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20220040429A (en)
PH (1) PH12021550211A1 (en)
SG (1) SG11202100882RA (en)
WO (1) WO2021025160A1 (en)

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS4413645Y1 (en) * 1966-04-07 1969-06-07
JPS5375314A (en) * 1976-12-15 1978-07-04 Zaisou Mokuzai Kk Laminated wall material with embossed pattern
JPS55120813A (en) * 1979-03-12 1980-09-17 Mtp Kasei Kk Production of cushion material with different hardness
JPS608002A (en) * 1983-06-27 1985-01-16 松下電工株式会社 Manufacture of artificial decorative flitch
JPH0827678A (en) * 1994-07-13 1996-01-30 Sekisui Chem Co Ltd Lining substrate for carpet and its production
JPH1191058A (en) * 1997-09-19 1999-04-06 Bridgestone Corp Cushioning material
JP2000166707A (en) * 1998-12-11 2000-06-20 Achilles Corp Cushion material and its manufacture
JP2003231400A (en) * 2002-02-06 2003-08-19 Reina Onizuka Decorative element, manufacturing method for the same, and article and kit using the same
JP3107165U (en) * 2004-08-11 2005-01-27 岡畑産業株式会社 cushion
JP3122662U (en) * 2006-03-16 2006-06-29 数馬 斎藤 Futon core
JP3195735U (en) * 2014-11-19 2015-01-29 株式会社ライズステップ Sacroiliac joint massage mat

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0780874A (en) 1993-07-28 1995-03-28 Sekisui Chem Co Ltd Manufacture of thermoplastic resin foamed sheet having skinned tongued and grooved surface
JP2000054610A (en) 1998-08-07 2000-02-22 Lion Corp Soundproof floor structural body with built-in plastic foaming body
JP3585880B2 (en) 2001-10-19 2004-11-04 旭コンテナ工業株式会社 Partition structure using cardboard
JP4402399B2 (en) 2003-08-11 2010-01-20 株式会社イノアックコーポレーション Method for producing laminated foam
JP3874418B2 (en) * 2005-01-17 2007-01-31 勇 吉野 Simple partition structure
JP2006241886A (en) * 2005-03-04 2006-09-14 Kaneka Corp Partition structure
JP2006274740A (en) 2005-03-30 2006-10-12 Niigata Shiki Kogyo Kk Partition unit body for refuge, and partition structure for refuge using the same
JP4108103B2 (en) * 2006-05-18 2008-06-25 勇 吉野 Simple partition structure
JP2012057454A (en) * 2010-09-13 2012-03-22 Tetsuo Suda Partition air mat for disaster
JP6569113B2 (en) * 2013-11-01 2019-09-04 株式会社オカムラ Panel body and method for manufacturing panel body
JP2017061827A (en) 2015-09-25 2017-03-30 積水化学工業株式会社 Partition
JP6953008B2 (en) 2018-01-18 2021-10-27 東京コンテナ工業株式会社 Cardboard bed
JP3226650U (en) 2020-04-17 2020-07-09 東京コンテナ工業株式会社 Corrugated bed

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS4413645Y1 (en) * 1966-04-07 1969-06-07
JPS5375314A (en) * 1976-12-15 1978-07-04 Zaisou Mokuzai Kk Laminated wall material with embossed pattern
JPS55120813A (en) * 1979-03-12 1980-09-17 Mtp Kasei Kk Production of cushion material with different hardness
JPS608002A (en) * 1983-06-27 1985-01-16 松下電工株式会社 Manufacture of artificial decorative flitch
JPH0827678A (en) * 1994-07-13 1996-01-30 Sekisui Chem Co Ltd Lining substrate for carpet and its production
JPH1191058A (en) * 1997-09-19 1999-04-06 Bridgestone Corp Cushioning material
JP2000166707A (en) * 1998-12-11 2000-06-20 Achilles Corp Cushion material and its manufacture
JP2003231400A (en) * 2002-02-06 2003-08-19 Reina Onizuka Decorative element, manufacturing method for the same, and article and kit using the same
JP3107165U (en) * 2004-08-11 2005-01-27 岡畑産業株式会社 cushion
JP3122662U (en) * 2006-03-16 2006-06-29 数馬 斎藤 Futon core
JP3195735U (en) * 2014-11-19 2015-01-29 株式会社ライズステップ Sacroiliac joint massage mat

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2021025160A1 (en) 2021-02-11
JP7084490B2 (en) 2022-06-14
PH12021550211A1 (en) 2021-11-29
JP2022111182A (en) 2022-07-29
SG11202100882RA (en) 2021-03-30
KR20220040429A (en) 2022-03-30
JP7630463B2 (en) 2025-02-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR100758336B1 (en) FBC mat for interlayer noise isolation and manufacturing method
US20110072587A1 (en) Foam cushion having reduced cross-section area foam profiles forming hollow portion(s) for deformation
US20070209867A1 (en) Soundproof panel for impact sound insulation
KR20110122074A (en) Insulation and method of manufacturing the same
KR101611949B1 (en) insulation
WO2021025160A1 (en) Cushion material, method for manufacturing cushion material, laminate, method for manufacturing laminate, method for using cushion material, connection structure for shelter division, method for forming shelter division, method for dismantling and storing shelter division, and method for forming shock absorbing wall surface panel for shelter
TW202144155A (en) Cushion material, method for manufacturing cushion material, laminate, method for manufacturing laminate, method for using cushion material, connection structure for shelter division, method for forming shelter division, method for dismantling and storing shelter division, and method for forming shock absorbing wall surface panel for shelter
US6997514B2 (en) E.V.A. furniture
TW201628840A (en) Multilayer mat having improved noise reduction and shock absorption
JP2013067973A (en) Building material panel
CN114222513A (en) Flexible furniture with wooden panels and related methods
KR102612112B1 (en) A fuctional interior wallpaper sheet and manufacturing method the same
KR200446774Y1 (en) Interior finishing material with integral sound absorbing material
JPWO2021025160A5 (en) Connection structure of evacuation shelter section, method of forming evacuation shelter section, disassembly and storage method of evacuation shelter section, method of forming impact buffer wall panel of evacuation shelter, and cushioning material or laminate with excellent assembleability used for these.
JP2000170360A (en) Synthetic thin tatami mat core material, synthetic thin tatami mat floor and synthetic thin tatami mat
KR200380186Y1 (en) Heat insulating board for building
KR100478907B1 (en) The method and apparatus for manufacturing and sheet of decoration
JP2006241885A (en) Simplified partition wall
PL233038B1 (en) Sound-absorbing panel and method for producing it
JP3106413U (en) Architectural panel
KR20130015062A (en) Method and product for sound absorbing materials
JPH0514848Y2 (en)
JP2022111182A5 (en) Cushioning material or laminate having a substantially rectangular cut surface, method for using cushioning material or laminate with excellent assembly independence by shaping the profiled surface into a predetermined shape, coloring of the fused layer of the cushioning material or laminate A method and a processing method for imparting a predetermined side end shape to a cushioning material or a laminate.
JP2023050787A (en) Ceiling panel and building ceiling
US20020052426A1 (en) E.V.A. furniture

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020544869

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20849044

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20849044

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1